City of Hampton CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

:

City of Hampton CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

for the Construction of

PUMP STATION 32 REPLACEMENT

Date: October 2016

Prepared by: Woolpert

Pump Station 32 Replacement

October 2016 TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PUMP STATION 32 REPLACEMENT

PAGE

I. TABLE OF CONTENTS ……………………………………………………….. TOC 1 - 4

II. SCOPE OF WORK……………………………….……………………………… SOW 1

III. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01014 - Protection of Underground Utilities .......................................... 01014-1 – 01014-2

Section 01110 - Summary of Work ..................................................................... 01110-1 – 01110-2

Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures .............................................................. 01330-1 – 01330-12

Section 01521 - Temporary Station Bypass ........................................................ 01521-1 – 01521-6

Section 01575 - Temporary Environmental Controls........................................ 01575-1 – 01575-14

Section 01781 - Operation and Maintenance Data .............................................. 01781-1 – 01781-4

DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK

Section 02100 - Clearing and Grubbing .............................................................. 02100-1 – 02100-4

Section 02315 - Excavation and Fill ................................................................... 02315-1 – 02315-8

Section 02610 - Underground Utility Pipe .......................................................... 02610-1 – 02610-4

Section 02741 - Bituminous Concrete Pavement ................................................ 02741-1 – 02741-4

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete .............................................................. 03300-1 – 03300-8

Section 03410 – Precast Structural Concrete .................................................... 03410-1 – 03410-14

DIVISION 04 MASONRY

Section 04200 - Unit Masonry ............................................................................ 04200-1 – 04200-8

DIVISION 05 METALS

Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals and Fabrications .................................. 05500-1 – 05500-10

DIVISION 06 WOODS & PLASTICS

Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry ....................................................................... 06100-1 – 06100-8

Section 06192 - Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses ...................................... 06192-1 – 06192-8

Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry ........................................................................ 06200-1 – 06200-4



DIVISION 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07311 - Asphalt Shingles ........................................................................ 07311-1 – 07311-6

Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal .......................................................... 07600-1 – 07600-4

Section 07920 - Joint Sealants ............................................................................. 07920-1 – 07920-4

DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08255 - Doors and Frames .................................................................... 08255-1 – 08255-8

Section 08710 - Door Hardware .......................................................................... 08710-1 – 08710-6

DIVISION 09 FINISHES

Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings ................................................................. 09900-1 – 09900-17

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

Section 10201 - Metal Wall Louvers ................................................................... 10201-1 – 10201-4

Section 10525 – Monorail Hoists ........................................................................ 10525-1 – 10525-5

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT

Section 11330 – Horizontal Self-Priming Centrifugal Pump ............................ 11330-1 – 11330-10

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ................................ 15050-1 – 15050-4

Section 15060 - Interior Process Pipe, Fittings and Valves .............................. 15060-1 – 15060-10

Section 15190 - Hydrostatic Testing of Piping Systems ..................................... 15190-1 – 15190-2

Section 15200 – Heating and Ventilating Equipment ......................................... 15200-1 – 15200-6

Section 15210 - Domestic Water and Waste Piping............................................ 15210-1 – 15210-6

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

Section 16010 – Electrical Basic Requirements ............................................... 16010-1 – 16010-10

Section 16020 – Utility Service and Service Entrance ....................................... 16020-1 – 16020-2

Section 16035 – Electrical Testing and Placing in Service ................................ 16035-1 – 16035-4

Section 16110 – Raceways ................................................................................. 16110-1 – 16110-5

Section 16120 – Wires and Cables ...................................................................... 16120-1 – 16120-8

Section 16130 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings ................................................... 16130-1 – 16130-5

Section 16135 – Wiring Devices ........................................................................ 16135-1 – 16135-4

Section 16190 – Supporting Devices ................................................................. 16190-1 – 16190-4

Section 16195 – Electrical Identification ........................................................... 16195-1 – 16195-4

Section 16410 – Pump Control Panel ............................................................... 16410-1 – 16410-29

Section 16440 – Disconnect Switches ................................................................ 16440-1 – 16440-4

Section 16450 – Grounding ................................................................................. 16450-1 – 16450-4

Section 16470 – Panelboards............................................................................... 16470-1 – 16470-6

Section 16475 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) ................................. 16475-1 – 16475-2



Section 16482 – Motor Starters ........................................................................... 16482-1 – 16482-4

Section 16510 – Lighting Fixtures ...................................................................... 16510-1 – 16510-3

Section 16690 – Variable Frequency Drive ........................................................ 16690-1 – 16690-8

Section 16920 – Programmable Logic Controller ............................................ 16920-1 – 16920-16

IV. APPENDICES:

Appendix A – Geotechnical Report

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



This Page Intentionally Left Blank


October 2016 SOW-1

SCOPE OF WORK

SCOPE OF WORK:

The scope of the Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

Construction of a suction lift style wastewater pump station. The project includes a concrete wet

well, split face CMU building with all appurtenances, two suction lift style sewage pumps,

controls, piping, flow meter and vault, emergency power generator connection and associated

site work.

Gravity sewer as shown on the drawings. Force main from the new pump station to connect to

existing 10” force main within 2nd Street. All pavement cutting and patching for the installation

of the force main within 2nd Street. Construction access driveway from Tappan Avenue. New

concrete driveway from 2nd Street.

Demolition of the existing Pump Station 32 and abandonment of the existing 10” force main.


October 2016 01014 - 1

SECTION 01014 - PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

1. GENERAL

1.1 DRAWINGS

Data regarding the presence, size, character and location of existing underground structures

has been shown on the contract drawings for informational purposes only. There is no

certainty of the accuracy of this information and the Contractor shall perform his own

investigations and survey to ascertain any and all obstructions. The location of underground

structures shown may not be wholly accurate and other obstructions than those shown may be

encountered. In general, house services, buried electric, gas, CATV, telephone, water and

sewer services to houses are not shown. The Contractor shall assume that such services exist

and shall be responsible for protecting, maintaining and relocating such services or having

them replaced when damaged by his operations. The Contractor hereby expressly agrees that

neither the Owner nor the Engineer is responsible for the correctness or sufficiency or absence

of information regarding obstructions either revealed or not revealed by the plans and that he

shall have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility under the Contract, in case

the location, size or character of any pipe or other underground structure is not as indicated

or not shown on the plans. The Contractor shall not purchase any materials nor initiate any

work until he is completely satisfied that all underground structures or utilities have been fully

located and identified.

The Contractor should be aware that in some instances buried cables, gas lines, water lines,

etc., two inches and smaller in diameter may have to be excavated by hand and slightly

relocated to facilitate construction of the pipeline under this contract. This shall be

considered incidental to the work, and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK

Should the location of any pipe or conduit greater than 2 inches in diameter, pole, or other

structures, above or below the ground be such that in the opinion of the Owner or his

representative its removal, realignment, or change will be required due to work to be

performed under this Contract, the removal, realignment, or change will be done as a Change

Order, or will be done by the Owner of the obstructions, without cost to the Contractor. The

Contractor shall maintain at his own expense the structures until such removal and before and

after such realignment or change. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for

damages or extra compensation because of the presence of said structure, or because of any

delay in the removal or relocation of the same.


October 2016 01014 - 2

1.3 RESPONSIBILITY

The Contractor shall not interfere with any persons, firms or corporations, or with the Owner

or any agency having jurisdiction in protecting, removing, changing, or replacing their pipes,

conduits, poles, or other structures; but he shall suffer said persons, firms or corporations, or

the Owner, to take all such measures as they may deem necessary or advisable for the purpose

aforesaid, and the Contractor shall thereby be in no way relieved of any of his responsibility

under the Contract.

1.4 NOTIFICATION

The Contractor shall notify all owners of underground and overhead utilities at least 48 hours

prior to the commencement of excavation work where it is obvious or probable due to the

presence of nearby homes, markers and/or other types of structures that underground utilities

such as water, sewer, power, gas petroleum, telephone and the like exist near the site of

construction to ascertain the exact location of same so as not to interfere with or disrupt

service to the public.

1.5 COMPLIANCE

In addition to the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor is specifically cautioned

that he must comply with the requirements, including all revisions and amendments thereto, of

the Virginia "Underground Utility Damage Prevention Act" of 1979, which became effective

on July 1, 1980.

1.6 COORDINATION

Contractor is to contact and coordinate with "Miss Utility of Virginia" (811) when excavating

in the vicinity of underground utilities. Contractor shall also coordinate with other

contractors who may be working in the vicinity of the project site and installing underground

utilities as these utilities may not be marked by Miss Utility.

2. PRODUCTS

Not Used.

3. EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 01110-1

SECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 Project Description

The project will replace the existing sewage pump station located at 201 Tappan Avenue,

Hampton, VA. Include is the replacement of Pump Station number 32, the proposed

gravity sewer and force main for the new pump station, and the demolition of the existing

pump station. The project is comprised of the construction of a permanent single-story

sanitary sewage pumping station building. The pump station will provide services for the

existing service area. The pumps will convey flow from the gravity sewer collection

system via a new sanitary force main to discharge to an existing 10” force main serving

Pump Station number 30.

1.1.2 Location

The majority of the work shall be located at the pump station site as shown on the

drawings.

1.1.3 Sequence of Construction

The following is a suggested sequence of construction:

1. Perform pre-construction conference and obtain all required permits.

2. Perform pre-construction condition survey.

3. Install erosion & sediment control measures.

4. Install sheeting & excavate.

5. Form and pour pump station wet well. Install wet well components.

6. Remove sheeting and backfill excavation.

7. Install proposed gravity sewer from wet well to proposed mh a.

8. Complete pump station structure. Install station components.

9. Install proposed force main, magmeter, and emergency pump connection. Close

6" branch valve at connection point.

10. Perform pressure test on force main. After successful pressure test, coordinate

closing of valve at the intersection of n 2nd st and parkview pl with city of

hampton personnel. Make connection to existing 10" force main.

11. Perform proposed gravity sewer rehabilitation. Maintain flows as needed.

12. Install remaining proposed gravity sewer from mh b to connection at existing mh

032-0102. Maintain flows as needed.

13. Install proposed water service and connect to existing water meter.

14. Rough grade the site to restore existing stormwater drainage conditions.

15. Abandon existing sanitary w/ flowable fill as indicated.

16. Abandon existing pump station #032.


October 2016 01110-2

17. Provide site restoration.

18. Perform post-construction condition survey.

19. Remove erosion & sediment control measures.

The Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule within 7 calendar days of the

Notice to Proceed depicting timeframes for completion of the contract.

1.2 EXISTING WORK

The contractor shall endeavor to protect existing structures, piping and landscaping in

accordance with applicable provisions in the contract documents. In addition, the

contractor shall:

A. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to

any portions of the existing work designated to remain.

B. Repair or replace portions of existing work, which have been altered during

construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the

Owner. At the completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition equal

to or better than that which existed before new work started.

1.3 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES

Conform to Section 01014, "Protection of Underground Utilities." Obtain digging

permits prior to start of excavation. Scan the construction site with electromagnetic or

sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities

are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of

underground obstruction not indicated or specified to be removed but indicated or

discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work

to be installed. Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole

or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made.

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 01330-1

SECTION 01330 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1. GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Submittal

Shop drawings, product data, samples, and administrative submittals presented for review

and approval.

1.1.2 Types of Submittals

All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph "Submittal Descriptions (SD)".

Submittals also are grouped as follows:

A. Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other

data prepared specifically for this contract, by contractor or through contractor by

way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier

contractor, to illustrate portion of work.

B. Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules,

performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive

literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate portion of work, but not prepared

exclusively for this contract.

C. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or

workmanship that are physically identical to portion of work, illustrating portion of

work or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both.

D. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that

administrative requirements of project are adequately met but not to ensure directly

that work is in accordance with design concept and in compliance with contract

documents.

1.1.3 Submittal Descriptions (SD)

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Certificates of insurance

Surety bonds

List of proposed subcontractors

List of proposed products

Construction Progress Schedule

Submittal schedule

Schedule of values


October 2016 01330-2

Health and safety plan

Work plan

Quality control plan

Environmental protection plan

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the

work.

Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the

product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.

Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and

interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.

SD-03 Product Data

Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and

brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials or

equipment for some portion of the work.

Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties.

SD-04 Samples

Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and

aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the

work can be judged.

Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if

specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project.

Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which

the ensuring work can be judged. Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which

are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of

the work.

SD-05 Design Data

Calculations, mix designs, analyses, or other data pertaining to a part of work.


October 2016 01330-3

SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or

system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in

accord with specified requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date

of contract award for the project.)

Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on an

actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job

site.

Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the

job site, on portion of work during or after installation.

Investigation reports

Daily checklists

Final acceptance test and operational test procedure

SD-07 Certificates

Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material

attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. Must be

dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project.

Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or subcontractor through

Contractor, the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion

of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel

qualifications.

Confined space entry permits.

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including

special notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances, hazards and

safety precautions.

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's

representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.

Factory test reports.


October 2016 01330-4

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals. Comply with

section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data, and with specific sections of the

specifications.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to

establish an administrative mechanism.

As-built drawings

Special warranties

Posted operating instructions

Training plan

1.1.4 Approving Authority

Person authorized to approve submittal.

1.1.5 Work

As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract documents,

including labor necessary to produce construction and materials, products, equipment,

and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section.


Submittal register

1.3 USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER

Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses.

1.3.1 Submittal Register

Submit submittal register periodically throughout the project. Verify that all submittals

required for project are listed and add missing submittals. Complete the following on the

register:


October 2016 01330-5

Specification Section: Specification number requiring the submittal.

Contractor Approval Date: Date contractor needs approval of submittal.

Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers.

List date of submittal transmission.

List date approval received.

List date of submittal receipt.

List date returned to contractor.

1.3.2 Contractor Action Code and Action Code

Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form):

NR - Not Received

AN - Approved as noted

A – Approved as submitted

R - Rejected

RR - Revise and Resubmit

SI – Submit Specified Item

1.3.3 Copies Delivered to the Engineer

Deliver one copy of submitted register updated by Contractor to Engineer with each

invoice request.

1.4 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority

Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in

compliance with contract requirements. Approving authority on submittals is Engineer or

his representative unless otherwise specified for a specific submittal.


October 2016 01330-6

1.4.2 Constraints

A. Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of this

section, unless explicitly stated otherwise.

B. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work; components of

definable feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at same time.

C. When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or materials

included in separate subsequent submittals, submittal will be returned without

review.

D. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply approval of

assembly in which item functions.

1.4.3 Scheduling

A. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with

performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing.

Allow for potential requirements to resubmit.

B. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with receipt by

approving authority, which includes at least 15 working days for submittals for

approval. Period of review for submittals begins when Engineer or his

representative receives submittal from the contractor. Period of review for each

resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal.

C. Certain submittals, such as the Emergency Generator, Odor Control Systems, Pump

Station Control Panels, Pumps, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, etc., require

additional review and approval from the locality. Contractor shall allow an

additional 10 working days for review of these submittals. Contractor shall request

the identity of these particular submittals upon submission of the Submittal Register.

1.4.4 Variations

Variations from contract requirements require Engineer approval and will be considered

where advantageous to Owner.

1.4.4.1 Considering Variations

Discussion with the Engineer prior to submission will help ensure functional and quality

requirements are met and minimize rejections and resubmittals.


October 2016 01330-7

1.4.4.2 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Engineer, with documentation of

the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial

to the City. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals

required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.

1.4.4.3 Warranting That Variation Are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval, contractor warrants that this contract has been

reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other

elements of work.

1.4.4.4 Review Schedule Is Modified

In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be

allowed for consideration by the Engineer of submittals with variations.

1.4.5 Contractor's Responsibilities

A. Determine and verify field measurements, materials, field construction criteria;

review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements

of the work and contract documents.

B. Transmit submittals to Engineer or his representative in accordance with schedule

on approved Submittal Register, and to prevent delays in the work, delays to

Engineer, or delays to separate contractors.

C. Advise Engineer of variation, as required by paragraph entitled "Variations."

D. Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by approving authority. When

resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal, the

contractor shall provide copy of that previously submitted transmittal including all

reviewer comments for use by approving authority. Direct specific attention in

writing or on resubmitted submittal, to revisions not requested by approving

authority on previous submissions.

E. Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by Engineer, to a limit of 5

copies per submittal.

F. Complete work that must be accomplished as basis of a submittal in time to allow

submittal to occur as scheduled.

G. Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as

"approved," or "approved as noted", except to the extent that a portion of work must

be accomplished as basis of submittal.


October 2016 01330-8

1.4.6 Engineer's Responsibilities

When approving authority is Engineer or his representative, the Engineer will:

A. Note date on which submittal was received from Contractor, on each submittal for

which the Engineer is approving authority.

B. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for

conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.

C. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled

"Actions Possible" and with markings appropriate for action indicated.

1.4.7 Actions Possible

Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:

A. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been previously

reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have evidence of being reviewed

and approved by contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed"

will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit

submittals returned for lack of review by contractor or for being incomplete, with

appropriate action, coordination, or change.

B. Submittals marked "approved" or "approved as submitted" authorize contractor to

proceed with work covered.

C. Submittals marked "approved as noted" authorize contractor to proceed with work

as noted provided contractor takes no exception to the notations.

D. Submittals marked "revise and resubmit" or "rejected" indicate submittal is

incomplete or does not comply with design concept or requirements of the contract

documents and shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes. No work shall

proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved.

E. Submittals marked “submit specified item” authorize contractor to proceed with the

portions of the work except for the item noted by the approving authority. The

specified item shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed

for this item until resubmittal is approved.


October 2016 01330-9

1.5 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

1.5.1 Transmittal Form

Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels, to office of

approving authority. Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by Engineer

and standard for project. The transmittal form shall identify contractor, indicate date of

submittal, and include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in

paragraph entitled "Identifying Submittals." Process transmittal forms to record actions

regarding sample panels and sample installations.

1.5.2 Identifying Submittals

Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with the following

information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each

submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically,

with the following:

A. Project title and location.

B. Construction contract number.

C. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required.

D. Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.

E. When a resubmission, alphabetic suffix on submittal description, for example, SD-

10A, to indicate resubmission.

F. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer and

any other second tier contractor associated with submittal.

G. Product identification and location in project.

1.5.3 Format for Product Data

A. Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume.

Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers for product data.

B. Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted; indicate

specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains.

C. Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal

requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify this material as

developed specifically for project.


October 2016 01330-10

1.5.4 Format for Shop Drawings

A. Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 x 42

inches.

B. Present 8 1/2 x 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for

submittals required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.

C. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and

dates, in addition to information required in paragraph entitled "Identifying

Submittals."

D. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare drawings

demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Identify materials and products

for work shown.

1.5.5 Format of Samples

A. Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the

manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified:

(1) Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.

(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.

(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by 11

inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.

(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be

supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are

conduit and handrails.

(5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials are

sand and paint.

(6) Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches.

(7) Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.

(8) Sample Installation: 100 square feet.

B. Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to

nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing

extremes and middle of range.


October 2016 01330-11

C. Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or

indicated. Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of use.

D. Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area

constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of project.

E. When color, texture, or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and

style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.

1.5.6 Format of Administrative Submittals

A. When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become part

of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply contractor's approval stamp

to document, but to a separate sheet accompanying document.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Submit in accordance with Section

01781, "Operation and Maintenance Data." .

1.6 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS

1.6.1 Number of Copies of Product Data

A. Submit four copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval in

addition to those submittals required for contractor’s records and suppliers.

B. If Contractor elects to provide submittals electronically (via internet e-mail or FTP),

submit in Adobe PDF, TIFF, JPEG, or other acceptable digital format approved by

the Engineer. Submittals provided electronically will be returned electronically in

PDF, JPEG, or TIFF format, as appropriate. Contractor shall assume responsibility

for printing multiple copies of returned submittals for contractor’s records and

suppliers. Engineer shall forward appropriate copies to the developer and the

locality.

1.6.2 Number of Copies of Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for product

data.

1.6.3 Number of Samples

A. Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation, of each

required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving

authority and one will be returned to contractor.

B. Submit one sample panel. Include components listed in technical section or as

directed.


October 2016 01330-12

C. Submit one sample installation, where directed.

D. Submit one sample of non-solid materials.

1.6.4 Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals

A. Unless otherwise specified, submit administrative submittals compliance with

quantity requirements specified for product data.

B. Submit administrative submittals required under "SD-19 Operation and

Maintenance Manuals" to conform to Section 01781, "Operation and Maintenance

Data."

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 01521-1

SECTION 01521

TEMPORARY STATION BYPASS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish, maintain, and operate temporary facilities

(including but not limited to pumps, piping, diesel supply, temporary power,

pipe plugs and ties-in, etc.) to safely divert sewage as required to complete the

Work as described herein and as indicated on the Drawings at the Hampton

Sanitary Pump Station No. #032.

B. Temporary bypass pumping shall be used in accordance with Contract

documents. Temporary bypass pumping shall be performed as needed.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for design, installation, and operation of

the temporary bypass pumping system and all operation and maintenance costs

associated therewith. All labor, materials, tools, equipment and/or temporary

facilities required during the performance of the Work shall be provided at no

additional cost to the City.

D. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all temporary

bypass pumping system components from the Site.

E. No construction of the temporary bypass pumping system shall begin until all

provisions and requirements have been reviewed and approved by the

Engineer.

F. Any references to the “Engineer” will mean the City of Hampton or their

authorized representatives.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be designed and operated in

accordance with the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having

jurisdiction in the vicinity of the Project Site.

B. The temporary bypass system shall be provided with two pumps (1 duty/1

standby) and installed in such a manner that a loss of a single bypass pump

does not prevent the system from meeting the specified system hydraulic

performance parameters. The duty pump shall be electrically powered (to

reduce noise levels) and the standby pump shall be diesel powered.

C. Bypass pumping system shall be capable of operating at the following design

points:

1. Flow: 397 gpm @ 38 ft TDH


October 2016 01521-2

D. Provide a system to maintain flow around the work area in a manner that will

not cause surcharging of sewers, and that will protect public and private

property from damage.

E. Temporary bypass pumping system shall be capable of 24-hour per day

operation.

F. Temporary bypass system shall be provided with all of the instrumentation

necessary (flow, pressure, level, current, voltage, fuel level, etc.) to maintain,

operate and monitor performance of the bypass system, as well as providing a

continuous flow record of the bypass system operation.

G. Provide round-the-clock monitoring of temporary bypass pumping system

during working hours and non-working hours through remote telemetry

system that shall immediately notify the Contractor of alarm conditions.

H. Noise levels associated with the bypass pumping system shall not exceed 60

dba when measured at the property line, while being powered.

I. The pumping units shall be fully automatic self-priming units that do not

require the use of foot-valves in the priming system. All pumps used must be

constructed to allow dry running for long periods of time to accommodate the

cyclical nature of wastewater flows.

J. Pumps shall be adequately supported or secured.

K. Provide pumps with pressure taps and appropriate gauges on the discharge

outlets. Locate gauges as close as possible to the pump casing point of

discharge.

L. Each pumping unit shall have a fully automatic control system that allows for

variable speed control of the pumps. Control system shall include a unit

mounted packaged control panel, submersible pressure transducer, and all

necessary engine controls for variable speed operation. Control panel shall

include a microprocessor based control unit that monitors engine functions,

pressure transducer, and alarm functions.

1. In automatic mode, the microprocessor shall control the pumping unit

by variable speed. The speed of the pumping unit will vary by the level

in the suction well or manhole. When the pump start level is reached,

the pumping unit will run at full speed. As the level in the well or

manhole drops, the pumping unit will proportionally lower speed.

When the pump stop level is reached, the pumping unit shall shut

down.

2. In manual mode, manual “Start” button starts engine and runs until

“Stop” button is depressed or an emergency shutdown occurs.

3. Controls shall be adjustable without a change to the panel other than

via the keypad.

4. Controls shall function interchangeably from float switches, transducer

or manual start/stop by selection at the keypad.


October 2016 01521-3

M. Provide straining/screening as necessary for the suction piping.

N. Provide isolation and check valves for each pump discharge piping.

O. Telemetry System:

1. Provide remote telemetry system dedicated to the temporary bypass

pumping system.

2. System shall include necessary provisions to immediately notify the

Contractor of alarm conditions.

P. Security: As this site does not have security fencing, the Contractor may

provide a temporary security fence around the bypass pumping system during

the times during the construction period that workers are not on the Site and

the temporary bypass pumping system is operational.

Q. ACCEPTABLE VENDORS:

a. Godwin Pumps of America, Inc.

120 Dorset Avenue

Virginia Beach, Virginia 23462

2. Sunbelt Rentals Pump and Power Services.

4750 Baxter Road

Virginia Beach, Virginia 23462

3. Rain For Rent

P.O. Box 1077

Hopewell, Virginia 23860

4. Or approved equal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a Temporary Bypass Pumping Plan to the Engineer for review and

approval at least two weeks (14 calendar days) prior to commencing work in

accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. The plan must be specific and

complete, include all layouts of the bypass piping, and shall include, but not be

limited to, the following details:

1. Site Plan with Equipment Layout

2. Monitoring Plan

3. Listing of Equipment

4. Sewer pipe plugging method and types of plugs

5. Equipment Capacity (Including but not limited to pump curves

verifying the bypass pump is capable of meeting the peak flow and

head requirements)

6. Material and method of installation of suction and discharge piping

7. Description of Equipment Operational Controls. Telemetry and

security system description

8. Construction sequence

9. Repair and restoration plans for damaged infrastructure including, but

not limited to, pavement, sidewalks, curb, gutter and sewer system


October 2016 01521-4

10. Noise abatement and connection details associated with primary and

secondary power systems

11. Spill Contingency Plans and Protection against pipe breaks

1.4 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary means to safely convey sewage, to

bypass the normal station inlet. The temporary mechanical bypass system shall

meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.

All consequences, including fines, resulting from any spillage due to the

failure to successfully maintain or operate the temporary system are the sole

responsibility of the Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the

Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Locate all piping, pumping, and equipment so as to provide the least amount

of disruption to pump station access.

C. Provide a pressure gauge in the discharge piping from each pump for startup

testing.

D. All pipe joints shall be free of leakage.

E. All piping, hoses, and connections shall be secured and durable.

F. Provide all required piping supports and thrust blocking at all changes of

direction.

3.2 TESTING

A. Prior to 24 hour demonstration testing the Contractor shall field verify the

capacity of each pump operating independently, operate pumps in the hand

and automatic modes, test pumps in lead, lag and bypass pump fail modes, test

alarm conditions notification system, and measure and record pump discharge

pressure.

B. Perform leakage tests at full range of operating pressures for discharge piping

using clean water from tank truck or other clean water source prior to actual

operation with sewage.


October 2016 01521-5

C. Provide 72 hours advance Notice to the Engineer prior to testing.

D. After successful field and leakage testing, begin the 24 hour demonstration

testing on a Monday. Pump test shall demonstrate 24 hours of continuous

satisfactory bypass pump system operation (without the need to energize the

existing pumping units) before being allowed to disconnect or de-energize any

portion of the existing station which would prevent the station from resuming

its normal operation.

E. Any failure of the bypass system shall cause the demonstration testing period

to cease and to not be restarted until all repairs are completed and with written

City approval.

F. Leakage from pipes or pumps is strictly prohibited. Any leakage, including the

low volume “spit” that may be released from the dry-prime vacuum system or

other system must be captured and properly disposed.

G. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a Manufacturer's Certificate

certifying the bypass pumping system has been operated in a complete and

satisfactory manner and is ready for operation.

H. Pumps manufacturer’s field services shall be provided to witness initial

leakage tests, and pump capacity tests.

3.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Inspect temporary bypass pumping system at least twice daily to ensure that

the system is working correctly.

B. Straining/screening for the suction piping must be inspected, monitored and

cleaned as necessary.

C. Sufficient repair parts, tools, and equipment shall be available at all times on-

Site to assure rapid emergency troubleshooting and repair of any pump or

equipment.

3.4 SYSTEM REMOVAL

A. When removing piping or equipment from service, the Contractor shall flush

all temporary bypass piping with water and allow the piping to drain naturally

or be pumped to its lowest level prior to disassembly. All remaining fluids

shall be removed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. Solids

shall be disposed of off-Site by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City.

Disposal of these solids must be in accordance with federal, state and local

codes.

B. Following the completion of the temporary bypass pumping operation,

disturbed areas utilized during pump around operations shall be restored to

their original condition.


October 2016 01521-6

3.5 LEAKAGE, SPILLS AND DAMAGES

A. Leakage of sewage and sewage spills are strictly prohibited. Contractor shall

be responsible for compliance with all permit regulations, and shall

immediately respond with necessary equipment to stop all leaks and spills of

sewage and clean up spillage due to human or mechanical failure. Contractor

shall be responsible for all damage.

B. Any spillage that occurs shall be immediately cleaned up by the Contractor

and the site returned to a clean sanitary condition, at no cost to the City. Any

fines associated with such a spill will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall submit a spill action plan for approval by the Engineer.

The plan shall detail actions to be taken in the event of a sewage spill.

D. In the event of any spillage (wastewater, diesel fuel or other liquid) as a result

of a failure of the temporary system, the Contractor shall notify the City

immediately.

1. In making this notification, an estimate of the amount of sewage

discharge must be provided as well as estimated time of limitation of

the discharge. All telephone notifications shall be confirmed in writing

by five business days.

2. Overflows/spills shall be contained and removed in accordance with

Health Department regulations. Overflows should be prevented as

much as possible from entering nearby waters, lakes, rivers, or

adjacent properties. It should be isolated and treated with lime or

chlorine if exposed for a long period of time.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 01575-1

SECTION 01575 -TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

40 CFR 122.26 EPA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

Permit Regulations

40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste

40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of Residential,

Commercial, and Institutional Solid Waste

40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 263 Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 264 Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standard for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal

Facilities

40 CFR 266 Management of Specific Hazardous Wastes and Specific

Types of Hazardous Waste Management Facilities

40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions

40 CFR 279 Used Oil Regulations

40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution

Contingency Plan

49 CFR 173 Shipments and Packagings


October 2016 01575-2

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 832-R-92-005 Storm Water Management for Construction Activities

VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF CONSERVATION AND RECREATION (DCR)

VESCH (1994) Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control

Handbook, 3rd Edition.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Sediment

Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind.

1.2.2 Solid Waste

Garbage, refuse, debris, sludge, or other discharged material (except hazardous waste as

defined in paragraph entitled "Hazardous Waste" or hazardous debris as defined in

paragraph entitled "Hazardous Debris"), including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained

gaseous materials resulting from domestic, industrial, commercial, mining, or agricultural

operations. Material not regulated as solid waste are: nuclear source or byproduct

materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended; suspended

or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent or irrigation return flows, or other

regulated point source discharges; regulated air emissions; and fluids or wastes associated

with natural gas or crude oil exploration or production.

A. Green waste: The vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing and grubbing,

including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs, small trees and saplings, tree

stumps and plant roots. Marketable trees, grasses and plants that are indicated to

remain, be re-located, or be re-used are not included.

B. Surplus soil: Existing soil that is in excess of what is required for this work,

including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site mixing of concrete, mortars

and paving. Contaminated soil meeting the definition of hazardous material or

hazardous waste is not included.

C. Inert construction and demolition debris: Broken or removed concrete, masonry,

and rock asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may

be reinforced with or contain ferrous wire, rods, accessories and weldments.

D. Wood: Dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard, hardboard.

Treated and/or painted wood that meets the definition of lead contaminated or lead

based contaminated paint is not included.


October 2016 01575-3

E. Scrap metal: Scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as re-enforcing

steel, structural shapes, pipe and wire that are recovered or collected and disposed of

as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous

waste is not included.

F. Paint cans: Metal cans that are empty of paints, solvents, thinners and adhesives. If

permitted by the paint can label, a thin dry film may remain in the can.

G. Recyclables: Materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors, windows, door

and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and mirrors that are recovered and

sold as recyclable. Metal meeting the definition of lead contaminated or lead based

paint contaminated may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal

company. Paint cans may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal

company.

1.2.3 Debris

Non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction, demolition, or

renovation of a structure which exceeds 2.5 inch particle size that is: a manufactured

object; plant or animal matter; or natural geologic material (e.g. cobbles and boulders). A

mixture of debris and other material such as soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as

debris if the mixture is comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual

inspection.

1.2.4 Hazardous Debris

As defined in paragraph entitled "Debris" of this section, debris that contains listed

hazardous waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore structure)

per 40 CFR 261; or debris that exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste per 40 CFR

261.

1.2.5 Chemical Wastes

This includes salts, acids, alkalies, herbicides, pesticides, and organic chemicals.

1.2.6 Garbage

Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of

food.

1.2.7 Hazardous Waste

Hazardous waste as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State and local

regulations.


October 2016 01575-4

1.2.8 Oily Waste

Petroleum products and bituminous materials.

1.3 REPORTS

1.3.1 Preconstruction Survey

Perform a preconstruction survey of the project site, and take photographs showing

existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to the site. A report shall be made

available upon request by the Engineer or Owner.

1.3.2 Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste

Submit a copy, upon request by the Engineer or Owner, of the applicable EPA and State

permit(s), manifest(s), or license(s) for transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal of

hazardous and regulated waste by permitted facilities.

1.3.3 Regulatory Notification

The Contractor is responsible for all regulatory notification requirements in accordance

with Federal, State and local regulations. The Contractor shall forward copies to the

Engineer prior to commencement of work activities.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental protection as defined.

Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops

during normal construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective

measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of

permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project. Comply with

Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to the environment, including water, air,

solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily substances, and noise pollution.

1.4.1 Licenses and Permits

The contractor is responsible for acquiring and maintaining all licenses, permits, and

approvals necessary for this project as noted in the Contract Documents. Upon request,

provide copies to the Engineer or Owner. Post all permits in a weatherproofed enclosure

visible from the entrance to the site a minimum of four feet off the ground.

1.4.1.1 Virginia Stormwater Management Program (VSMP) General Permit

Operators of construction activities one (1) acre and larger, or larger than 2,500 square

feet and located in Chesapeake Bay Preservation localities, are required to apply for

registration coverage under the Virginia Stormwater Management Program (VSMP)


October 2016 01575-5

General Permit for Discharges of Stormwater From Construction Activities. For the

purposes of this project, the Owner is the applicant and the Contractor is the agent for the

registration. Contractor shall pay for all fees associated with the registration.

The latest forms and instructions can be found at the Virginia Department of Environmental

Quality website: http://www.deq.state.va.us/Programs/Water/StormwaterManagement/VSMPPermits/Co

nstructionGeneralPermit.aspx

To secure coverage under the General Permit for Discharges from Construction

Activities, the Registration Statement must be completed and mailed to:

Department of Environmental Quality

Office of Stormwater Management, 10th Floor

P. O. Box 1105

Richmond, VA 23218

The Permit Fee form must be completed and submitted with payment to:

Department of Environmental Quality

Receipts Control

P. O. Box 1104

Richmond, VA 23218

1.4.1.1.1 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) must be maintained at the site by the

Contractor. The Engineer has prepared a SWPPP for the Contractor’s use. The

Contractor may submit, for review and approval, an alternate plan. A guide for preparing

the SWPPP can be found at the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) website:

http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/swppp.cfm. It describes the SWPPP development

process and provides helpful guidance and tips for developing and implementing an

effective SWPPP. In addition, the guide provides customizable SWPPP templates and a

sample inspection report, in Microsoft Word format.

1.4.1.1.2 Responsible Land Disturber (RLD)

The Contractor shall supply the name and registration number of the “Responsible Land

Disturber” to the Owner prior to construction.

1.4.1.2 Land Disturbing Permit

Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring a Land Disturbing Permit from the local

authority.

http://www.deq.state.va.us/Programs/Water/StormwaterManagement/VSMPPermits/ConstructionGeneralPermit.aspx

http://www.deq.state.va.us/Programs/Water/StormwaterManagement/VSMPPermits/ConstructionGeneralPermit.aspx


October 2016 01575-6

1.4.1.3 Utility Certificate to Construct and Certificate to Operate

The Contractor will acquire certificate to construct/extend utilities from the local

authority, however Owner will pay all fees associated with acquiring the certificate. For

sewage pumping stations, the Engineer shall apply for the Certificate to Construct from

the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality. Contractor shall coordinate with the

Engineer for the final inspection and startup to obtain Certificate to Operate from

Virginia DEQ.

1.4.1.4 Right of Way Land Use Permit

The Contractor shall pay for and acquire any right of way land use permits required by

the local authority or VDOT. The Contractor will be responsible for completing the work

according to the terms of the permit. The Contractor will post the bond for the permit.

The Contractor's performance bond will cover his performance of all work in the project,

including compliance with right of way regulations. Where the word "Permittee" appears

in the permit and in special provisions tied to the permit, it shall be the responsibility of

the Contractor to meet these requirements.

1.4.1.5 Building Permits

Contractor is responsible for obtaining all building permits (including structural,

mechanical, electrical, and plumbing) required by the local authority. Contractor shall

coordinate all required inspections to obtain a Certificate of Occupancy prior to project

completion.

1.4.2 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection

The Contractor is advised that this project and the Owner are subject to Federal, State,

and local regulatory agency inspections to review compliance with environmental laws

and regulations. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with any representative from any

Federal, State, or local regulatory agency who may visit the job site and shall provide

immediate notification to the Owner, who shall accompany them on any subsequent site

inspections. The Contractor shall complete, maintain, and make available to the owner or

regulatory agency personnel all documentation relating to environmental compliance

under applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations. The Contractor shall

immediately notify the Engineer and Owner if a Notice of Violation (NOV) is issued to

the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property resulting from

Contractor fault or negligence as well as for the payment of any civil fines or penalties

which may be assessed by any Federal, State or local regulatory agency as a result of the

Contractor's or any subcontractor's violation of any applicable Federal, State or local

environmental law or regulation. Should a Notice of Violation (NOV), Notice of

Noncompliance (NON), Notice of Deficiency (NOD), or similar regulatory agency notice

be issued to the Owner as facility owner/operator on account of the actions or inactions of


October 2016 01575-7

the Contractor or one of its subcontractors in the performance of work under this

contract, the Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner in defending against

regulatory assessment of any civil fines or penalties arising out of such actions or

inactions.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 FILTER FABRIC

Synthetic pervious sheet of propylene, nylon, polyester or ethylene yarn meeting the

following requirements:

Physical Property Test Requirement

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D1682 220 lbs minimum

Elongation at Failure ASTM D1682 220 lbs minimum

Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D3786 430 lbs minimum

Puncture Strength ASTM D751 125 lbs minimum

2.2 SAFETY FENCE

Plastic fencing 4 ft high meeting the following requirements:


Tensile Yield ASTM D638 Avg. 2000 lbs.

Ultimate Tensile Strength ASTM D638 Avg. 2900 lbs.

Elongation at Break ASTM D638 >1000%

Chemical Resistance Inert to most chemicals

Color "International" orange

2.3 TREE PROTECTION

Plastic safety fencing, described above, secured to conventional metal "T" or "U" posts.

Posts shall be driven a minimum of 18 inches in the ground and placed on 6-foot

minimum centers.


October 2016 01575-8

2.4 SILT FENCE

Synthetic pervious sheet of propylene, nylon, polyester or ethylene yarn secured on the

upslope to 2 inch square oak or 4 inch square pine stakes driven a minimum of 12 inches

in the ground on 6-foot minimum centers and meeting the following minimum

requirements:


Filtering Efficiency ASTM D5141 75%

Tensile Strength @ VTM-52 Standard Strength

20% Elongation 30 lbs/inch

Flow Rate ASTM D5141 0.2 gal./sq.ft./min.

UV Radiation Stability ASTM G26 90%

2.5 SUPER SILT FENCE

Standard silt fence installed with wire backing per VESCH specification 3.05-1.

2.6 STONE CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE

No. 1 graded aggregate. Construct in accordance with VESCH.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE INSPECTIONS

Periodic site inspections will be made of the erosion and sediment control measures to

determine their condition and performance. The Contractor shall respond immediately by

making necessary repairs, adjustment or replacement of erosion and sediment control

measures in order to prevent erosion and/or sedimentation from the project site.

3.1.1 Pre-Installation Meeting

The Contractor shall contact the local authority’s environmental compliance office prior

to performing any work on the project site to allow them to determine if a meeting to

review Sediment and Control measures is necessary or required.

3.2 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of

permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of

work. Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or

specified.


October 2016 01575-9

3.2.1 Land Resources

Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or

shrubs without the Owner's permission. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to

existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by the Owner. Where such use of

attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor shall be responsible for any

resultant damage.

3.2.1.1 Protection of Trees

Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured, bruised, defaced, or

otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove displaced rocks from uncleared

areas. By approved excavation, remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root

systems destroyed. Delineate protected trees with safety fencing where noted on the

Drawings. Safety orange colored silt fence may be used in lieu of safety fencing where

approved by the environmental inspector.

3.2.1.2 Replacement

Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations,

and replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape features. Obtain Engineer's

approval before replacement.

3.2.2 Water Resources

3.2.2.1 Oily and Hazardous Substances

Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or

local bodies of water. For oil, fuel oil, or other hazardous substance spills, verbally

notify the Engineer immediately. Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage

tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents

of the tanks in the event of leakage or spillage.

3.2.2.2 Wetland Buffers

Disturbance within wetlands buffers is prohibited. Do not allow silt to enter wetlands

buffers. The limits of the wetland buffers are denoted on the drawings. Discharges from

dewatering operations must pass through an approved dewatering structure or sediment

trap prior to entering wetlands buffers. Delineate wetlands buffers with safety fencing

within 50 feet of disturbed areas. Safety orange colored silt fence may be used in lieu of

safety fencing.


October 2016 01575-10

3.2.3 Fish and Wildlife Resources

Do not disturb fish and wildlife. Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly

disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and

wildlife, except as indicated or specified.

3.3 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Engineer and Owner historical

and archaeological items or human skeletal remains discovered in the course of work.

Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed by the Owner to resume

work. The Owner retains ownership and control over all historical and archaeological

resources.

3.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

All temporary or permanent erosion and sediment control practices necessary for

retaining sediments on the construction site shall be installed and tree protection fencing

shall be erected at the locations as specified on the site plan prior to any land clearing,

grubbing, grading or earth moving activities. Maintenance of all erosion and sediment

control practices shall be scheduled on a weekly basis and after each rainfall producing

runoff. Necessary repair, adjustment or replacement shall be performed immediately.

3.4.1 Burnoff

Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.

3.4.2 Protection of Erodible Soils

Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or specified.

Where finished grades are not indicated, restore to original grade. Immediately protect

the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct

earthwork to minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils.

3.4.2.1 Construction entrance (CE)

Stone pad(s) shall be installed concurrently with the initiation of clearing and grubbing

operations. Where construction vehicle access routes intersect paved roads, provisions

shall be made to minimize the transport of sediment by vehicular tracking onto the paved

surface. Where sediment is transported onto a public road surface, the road shall be

cleaned thoroughly at the end of each day. Sediment shall be removed from the roads by

shoveling or sweeping and transported to a sediment control disposal area. Street

washing shall be allowed only after sediment is removed as prescribed above.


October 2016 01575-11

3.4.3 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils

Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation:

3.4.3.1 Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff

Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction site. This

includes construction of diversion ditches, benches, berms, and use of silt fences and

straw bales to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses and sediment

trapping devices.

3.4.3.1.1 Site Drainage

The installation of storm drainage facilities shall take precedence over all other

construction activities. Site drainage facilities shall be completed within 60 days

following completion of the rough grading operations at any point on the project.

3.4.3.1.2 Inlet Protection (IP)

Inlet protection practices shall be installed around the perimeter of all inlets to prevent

sediments from entering the structure prior to any clearing, grubbing, grading or earth

moving activities.

3.4.3.1.3 Sediment Basins (SB) / Sediment Traps (ST)

All effluent from excavations (including building) shall be filtered through a properly

sized sediment trap before discharging into the project storm drain system. The discharge

shall be filtered adequately so it does not adversely affect downstream wetlands.

Sediment basins and traps, perimeter dikes, sediment barriers and other measures

intended to trap sediment shall be constructed at the initiation of land disturbing

activities, and shall be made functional before upslope land disturbance takes place. The

basin(s) are to be kept clear of debris. Sediment accumulations shall be cleaned out

periodically during and after construction activities. All other storm water management

facilities shall be installed and made operational within 30 days following the start of

land disturbance.

3.4.3.1.4 Diversions (DV), Diversion Dikes (DD), Outlet Protection (OP)

All temporary or permanent earthen structures such as dams, dikes and diversion shall be

stabilized (seeded) immediately after their construction. Stone outlet(s) shall be provided

as required.


October 2016 01575-12

3.4.3.1.5 Trenches and Dewatering Structures (DS)

All areas designated for underground utilities shall be stabilized as soon as practical but

not exceeding 15 days following their installation and backfilling. No more than 300 feet

of sanitary sewer, storm drain, water main, or any other line trench shall be opened at any

one time. Excavated material shall be placed on the uphill side of trenches. Effluent

from dewatering operations shall be filtered or passed through an approved sediment

trapping device, or both, and discharged in a manner that does not adversely affect

flowing streams or property beyond the contract limits.

3.4.3.2 Vegetation and Mulch

Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough grading is

completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion protection. Permanent or

temporary stabilization (PS & TS) shall be applied to denuded areas within seven days

after final grade is reached on any portion of the site. Temporary soil stabilization shall

be applied within seven days to denuded areas that may not be a final grade but will

remain dormant (undisturbed) for longer than 30 days. Permanent stabilization shall be

applied to areas that are to be left dormant for more than one year. Temporary vegetative

cover shall consist of seeding as scheduled on the drawings. Temporary vegetative cover

may be eliminated in favor of the permanent vegetative cover if site conditions permit

and the Architect/Engineer so directs. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent

vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching (MU), or netting. Stabilize slopes by

hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with anchored netting, sodding, or

such combination of these and other methods necessary for effective erosion control.

Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include topsoil (TO) or nutriment

during the seeding operation necessary to establish a suitable stand of grass. The seeding

operation shall be as specified on the Drawings.

3.4.3.2.1 Stockpile Treatment

Material such as topsoil, waste, spoils, sand and other erodible materials which are to be

stockpiled for use or later disposal shall be located away from streams, drainage ditches

and other waterways. Such stockpiles shall have slopes no steeper than a 2:1 ratio and

shall be protected against erosion with temporary vegetation, covers, and silt fencing

around the stockpile. Removal of material from such stockpile shall be done from the

side(s) away from the down grade slope. After each removal or stockpile operation,

disturbed area must be restablized. Storage areas on the project site must be approved by

the Owner prior to installation.

3.5 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES

Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers that are regularly emptied. Do not

prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent contamination of the site or other areas

when handling and disposing of wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean.

Remove all solid waste (including non-hazardous debris) from the property and dispose


October 2016 01575-13

off-site at an approved landfill. Solid waste disposal off-site must comply with most

stringent local, State, and Federal requirements including 40 CFR 241, 40 CFR 243, and

40 CFR 258.

3.6 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTES

3.6.1 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management

The Contractor shall identify all construction activities which will generate hazardous

waste/debris. The Contractor must provide a documented waste determination for all

resultant waste streams. Hazardous waste/debris shall be identified, labeled, handled,

stored, and disposed of in accordance with all Federal, State, and local regulations

including 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR

266, and 40 CFR 268. Hazardous waste shall also be managed in accordance with the

approved Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental Protection Plan.

Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance with 49 CFR 173. No

hazardous waste shall be brought onto Owner property. For hazardous wastes spills,

verbally notify the Owner immediately. Spill response shall be in accordance with 40

CFR 300 and applicable State regulations.

3.7 DUST CONTROL

Keep dust down at all times, including during non-working periods. Sprinkle or treat,

with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by

operations. Dry power brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet

mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for

cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be

permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not

unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.

3.8 NOISE

Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the EPA.

Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 01575-14



October 2016 01781-1

SECTION 01781 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit operation and maintenance (O&M) data which is specifically applicable to this

contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment or product.

Data containing extraneous information to be sorted through to find applicable

instructions will not be accepted. Present information in sufficient detail to clearly

explain user O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly

level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with Section

01330, "Submittal Procedures."

1.1.1 Quantity

Submit copies of the manufacturers' information specified herein for the components,

assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, and accessories. The items for which O&M data

is required are listed in the technical sections which specify that particular item. Where

not specifically called for in the technical sections, supply Data Package 2S.

1.1.2 Package Content

For each product, system, or piece of equipment requiring submission of O&M data,

submit the package required in the individual technical section. At a minimum, package

content shall be as required in the paragraph entitled "Schedule of Operations and

Maintenance Data Packages." The operation and maintenance manuals are to be put in a

format and with content acceptable to the locality and the Engineer.

1.1.3 Delivery

Four copies of Operations and Maintenance Manuals must be submitted to the Engineer

for review and approval prior to acceptance by the locality to operate the pump station.

Submit Operations and Maintenance data to the Engineer for review and approval to use

in the manual; submit data specified for a given item within 30 calendar days after the

item is delivered to the contract site. The locality will not accept the station without

submission of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.1.4 Changes to Submittals

Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the

Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M

data. Changes, additions, or revisions required by the Owner for final acceptance of

submitted data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the

notification of this change requirement.


October 2016 01781-2

1.2 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES

1.2.1 Safety Precautions

List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating

conditions.

1.2.2 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-shutdown Procedures

Include a control sequence for each of these operations.

1.2.3 Environmental Conditions

Include a list of environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant

data) which are best suited for each product or piece of equipment and describe

conditions under which equipment should not be allowed to run.

1.2.4 Lubrication Data

Include lubrication data, other than instructions for lubrication in accordance with

paragraph entitled "Operator Service Requirements":

A. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and

applications;

B. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points,

recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities; and

C. A lubrication schedule showing service interval frequency.

1.2.5 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions.

Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought.

Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and

equipment may be reused or require replacement.

1.2.6 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and

control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate

depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number

electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each

type, identically to actual installation numbering.


October 2016 01781-3

1.2.7 Maintenance and Repair Procedures

Include instructions and list tools required to restore product or equipment to proper

condition or operating standards.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES

Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The required

information for each O&M data package is as follows:

1.3.1 Data Package 1S

A. Safety precautions

B. Environmental conditions

C. Wiring and control diagrams

D. Maintenance procedures

1.3.2 Data Package 2S

A. Safety precautions

B. Environmental conditions

C. Lubrication data

D. Wiring and control diagrams

E. Maintenance and repair procedures

F. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures

G. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 01781-4



October 2016 02100-1

SECTION 02100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING

1. GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Clearing

Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, brush, down timber, rotten wood, rubbish, any

other vegetation, and objectionable material at or above original ground elevation not

designated to be saved; clearing also includes removal of fences, walls, guard posts, guard rail,

signs, and other obstructions interfering with the proposed work.

1.1.2 Grubbing

Grubbing is defined as the removal from below the surface of the natural ground of stumps,

roots and stubs, brush, organic materials, and debris.

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS

The Contractor may clear and grub all obstructions within the limits indicated. The

Contractor shall endeavor to minimize the clearing required and make every effort to save

trees and shrubbery. All areas disturbed during the course of construction shall be returned to

a condition equal to or better than those existing prior to the commencement of construction

and in accordance with the plans and specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."

SD-02 Shop Drawings

VDOT Tree Trimming Permit

The Contractor will obtain the necessary permit, if required, and supply one copy to the

Owner.

Burning Permits

If permitted by local and state jurisdiction, provide one copy to the Engineer and post and

maintain one copy on-site with other permits.

Debris Disposal

If debris is to be disposed of on private lands, obtain a letter from the owner of the land

granting permission. Provide one copy to the Engineer.


October 2016 02100-2

Erosion and Sediment Control Permit (aka Land Disturbing)

Will be acquired by the Contractor.

Certificate to Construct

Will be acquired by the Owner.

Post all permits in a weatherproofed enclosure visible from the entrance to the site. The sign

shall be a minimum of four feet off the ground.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY FENCING

Safety fencing specified in Section 01575, "Temporary Environmental Controls."

2.2 WOOD TREE GUARDS

2.2.1 Wood posts

2"x4" Southern Pine Lumber

2.2.2 Wood stringers

2"x2" Southern Pine Lumber

2.3 WRAPPING MATERIALS

2.3.1 Burlap

AASHTO M182, Class 1

2.3.2 Krinkle-kraft waterproof paper

4" width

2.4 TREE WOUND DRESSING

Antiseptic and waterproof, asphalt base.

2.5 STRAW BALES

Wheat or oat straw, reasonably free of viable seed, well cured.


October 2016 02100-3

2.6 FILTER BARRIER:

Geotextile fabric conforming to Section 245.02 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications.

2.7 SILT FENCE

Conform to Section 01575, "Temporary Environmental Controls."

2.8 ROCK CHECK DAMS


2.9 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE:


3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Mark areas to be cleared, the areas to be grubbed, and items to be saved with stakes,

flags, paint or plastic colored ribbon for the approval of the Engineer.

2. Protect benchmarks, utilities, existing trees, shrubs and other landscape features

designated for preservation with temporary barricades satisfactory to the Engineer.

3. No material shall be stored or construction operation carried on within 5 feet of any

tree to be saved or within the tree protection fencing.

4. When a private enclosure fence encroaches on the work area, notify the property

owner at least 5 days in advance of the clearing/grubbing operations to permit the

owner to remove it, construct a supplemental fence, or make such other arrangements

as may be necessary for security purposes; in failure of the property owner to

reasonably proceed with the work required to secure his property, carefully remove

the fence, in whole or in part, and neatly pile the materials onto the owner's property.

3.2 CLEARING

Confine clearing to within the permanent and construction rights-of-way or property. Fell

trees in a manner that will avoid damage to trees, shrubs, and other installations which are to

be retained. Where stumps are not required to be grubbed, flush-cut with ground elevation.

3.3 GRUBBING


October 2016 02100-4

Grub areas within the construction limits to remove roots and other objectionable material to

a minimum depth of 8". Remove all stumps within the cleared areas except those designated

to be saved as indicated on the plans.

3.4 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL

Strip topsoil to whatever depth it may occur from areas to be excavated, filled, or graded and

stockpile at a location approved by the Engineer for use in finish grading. The topsoil is the

property of the Owner and shall not be used as backfill. Topsoil shall not be removed from

the site unless otherwise authorized by Engineer. Provide silt fence around toe of stockpile.

3.5 DEBRIS DISPOSAL

Trees, logs, branches, brush, stumps, and other debris resulting from clearing and grubbing

operations shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally disposed of. Do

not deposit or bury on the site debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work. Debris

may be burned on-site if local ordinances allow open-air burning, if required permits are

obtained, and if burning operations are conducted in compliance with local ordinances and

regulations. Burning contract and permits shall be acquired by Contractor.

3.6 RESTORATION

Repair all injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, and roots of remaining plants by properly dressing,

cutting, tracing and painting, using approved arboricultural practices and materials. Replace

trees, shrubs and plants designated to be saved which are permanently injured or die during

the period of the warranty as a result of construction operations with like species acceptable

to the Owner. Remove protective fences, enclosures and guards upon the completion of the

project. Restore guard posts, guard rail, signs and other interferences to the condition equal

to that existing before construction operations.

3.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

Install in accordance with details shown on drawings, in accordance with Section 01575,

"Temporary Environmental Controls," and in compliance with all applicable sections of the

Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, 1994 edition.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 02315-1

SECTION 02315 - EXCAVATION AND FILL

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM C 33 (2008) Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C 136 (2006) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D 698 (2007; Rev. e1) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-

m/m))

ASTM D 1140 (2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than

the No. 200 (75-Micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D 1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the

Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 (2009) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))

ASTM D 2487 (2010) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 4318 (2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index

of Soils

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C600 (2005) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and

Their Appurtenances

CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)

COE EM-385-1-1 (2008) Safety and Health Requirements Manual


October 2016 02315-2

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures."

SD-06 Test Reports

Fill, common fill and backfill test

Select material test

Capillary Water Barrier

Density tests

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.

1.4 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria:

A. Surface elevations are as indicated.

B. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.

C. Groundwater elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time

subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent groundwater

elevation at the time of construction.

D. Character of soil material to be encountered is as indicated in the geotechnical

evaluation report.

E. Hard materials will not be encountered.

F. Blasting will not be permitted. Remove material in a manner approved by the

Owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and

frozen, deleterious, unsuitable or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the

maximum particle diameter shall not exceed one-half the lift thickness at the intended

location.


October 2016 02315-3

2.1.1 Common Fill

Unclassified soil material that can be compacted to form a dense stable soil mass to the

density specified for the intended location.

2.1.2 Backfill and Fill Material

ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC with a maximum

ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35, maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12, and a

maximum of 25 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve.

2.1.3 Topsoil

Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of

subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and

other material detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5

to 7.

2.1.4 Select Material

ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, SW, SP with not more than 5 percent by weight

passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, and maximum particle size not exceeding 2

inches.

2.2 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER

ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 7 with a maximum of 3 percent by weight

passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, and conforming to the general soil material

requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Soil Materials."

2.3 BORROW

Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from

sources off-site or identified by the Owner.

2.4 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning

tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.

Provide tape on rolls, 6-inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the

intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters

continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read,

"CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and

printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.


October 2016 02315-4

Warning Tape Color Codes

Red: Electric

Yellow: Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials

Orange: Telephone and Other Communications

Blue: Water Systems

Green: Sewer Systems

2.5 PIPE BEDDING AND AGGREGATE BASES

ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 7 with a maximum of 3 percent by weight

passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, and conforming to the general soil material

requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Soil Materials."

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Protection

3.1.1.1 Protection Systems

Provide shoring, bracing, and sheeting in accordance with COE EM-385-1-1.

3.1.1.2 Site Drainage

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water and waterborne

sediment encountered during construction. Provide appropriate erosion and sediment

control measures as indicated and in accordance with Section 01575, “Temporary

Environmental Controls.”

3.1.2 Surface Preparation

3.1.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

Comply with Section 02100, “Clearing and Grubbing.”

3.1.2.2 Stripping

Strip existing topsoil to a depth of 4 inches without contamination by subgrade material.

Stockpile topsoil separately from other excavated material and locate convenient to finish

grading area.

3.1.2.3 Unsuitable Material

Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish

underneath paved areas, foundations or concrete slabs.


October 2016 02315-5

3.2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall

physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to

starting construction. Conform to Section 01014, "Protection of Underground Utilities."

3.3 EXCAVATION

Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials

that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended

location. Keep excavations free from water. Discharge from dewatering operations shall

be directed to appropriate sediment trapping devices. Excavate soil softened or made

unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather or due to Contractor's

operations. Refill with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D

698 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated

depth with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698,

maximum density at no additional cost or time.

3.3.1 Pipe, Conduit and Utility Trenches

Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform

support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.

3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

3.4.1 Common Fill Placement

Provide for general site. Place in 6 inch lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or

compactors with mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by

rain to satisfactory moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with

a smooth roller, or both.

3.4.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement

Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs, except where select material is

provided. Place in 6 inch lifts. Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the

structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when

approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure.

3.4.3 Select Material Placement

Provide under capillary water barrier for structures not pile supported. Place in 6-inch

lifts. Placement adjacent to structures shall be as structural elements are complete and

accepted. Place against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to

avoid loading upon or against structure.


October 2016 02315-6

3.4.4 Capillary Water Barrier

Provide under floor slab on a compacted subgrade. Place in 4-inch lifts.

3.4.5 Trench Backfilling

Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits. Place and

compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 6-inch lifts to top of trench and in 6

inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas.

3.4.5.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12-inches below

finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6-inches below top of subgrade.

3.4.5.2 Bedding Requirements

Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section or where indicated, provide

bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified

herein. Backfill to top of pipe, to top of trench under structures and paved areas, shall be

compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density.

3.5 COMPACTION

Expressed as a percentage of maximum density at optimal moisture content. Determine

in-place density of existing subgrade; if required density exists, no compaction of

existing subgrade will be required.

3.5.1 General Site

Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5-foot line

measured from the toe of the concrete foundation to 80 percent of ASTM D 698.

3.5.2 Structures and Concrete Slabs

Compact subgrades of structures, foundations and slabs to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557.

Compact select material beneath concrete slabs and drainage structures to 95 percent of

ASTM D 698.

3.5.3 Capillary Water Barrier

Compact with two passes of a hand-operated, plate type vibratory compactor.


October 2016 02315-7

3.5.4 Foundation Backfill

Compact areas within 5-feet of the toe of the foundation to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557.

3.5.5 Paved Areas

Compact top 12-inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557. Compact fill and

backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.

3.5.6 Sidewalks

Compact top 6-inches of subgrade to 95 percent of ASTM D 698. Compact aggregate

bedding materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.

3.5.7 Deep Fill Consolidation

Fills greater than 10 feet deep shall be allowed to consolidate after placement in

accordance with recommendations from the geotechnical engineer prior to construction

of pavements, building structures, or slabs on the fill. Maximum long term settlement

shall not exceed 1 inch for pavements and equipment slabs and ½ inch for building

structures.

3.6 GRADING

Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one-foot. Grade areas to drain water away

from structures. For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by

Contractor's operations, grade as directed.

3.6.1 Topsoil

Scarify existing subgrade. Provide 4-inches of topsoil for newly graded finish earth

surfaces and areas disturbed by the Contractor. Additional topsoil will not be required if

work is performed in compliance with stripping and stockpiling requirements. If there is

insufficient on-site topsoil meeting specified requirements for topsoil, provide topsoil

required in excess of that available. Seed in accordance with Section 02900,

"Landscaping and Seeding."

3.7 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove from the project site surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for

filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber.


October 2016 02315-8

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.8.1 Sampling

Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.

3.8.2 Testing

Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional

tests for each source change.

3.8.2.1 Fill, Common Fill and Backfill Material Testing

Test fill, common fill, and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for

conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than

the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit; ASTM D 698 or

ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.

3.8.2.2 Select Material Testing

Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487

gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 698

or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.

3.8.2.3 Capillary Water Barrier Material Testing

Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to gradation specified

in ASTM C 33.

3.8.2.4 Density Tests

Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556. Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test

at the start of the job. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 500 square feet

of subgrade in fills for structures and concrete slabs, and every 625 square feet for other

fill areas and every 500 square feet of subgrade in cut.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 02610-1

SECTION 02610 – UNDERGROUND UTILITY PIPE

1. GENERAL

This section refers to gravity sanitary sewer pipe, force main pipe, fittings, and accessories

required for buried service outside the building perimeter. Interior process pipe and

fittings shall comply with Section 15060, “Interior Process Pipe, Fittings And Valves.”

Domestic water supply piping shall comply with Section 15200, “Domestic Water and

Waste Piping.” Underground utilities shall comply with the Hampton Roads Planning

District Commission Regional Construction Standards, latest edition.

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using

Flexible Elastomeric Seals


AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and

Fittings for Water

AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in.

Through 48 in. (75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water

and Other Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 (2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure

Pipe and Fittings

AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

or Other Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 (2006) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. Through 24

in. (76 mm Through 610 mm) and 54 in. Through 64 in.

(1,400 mm Through 1,600 mm), for Water Service

AWWA C509 (2009) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply

Service

AWWA C600 (2005) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and

Their Appurtenances


October 2016 02610-2

AWWA C605 (2005) Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C900 (2007) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and

Fabricated Fittings, 4 In.-12 In. (100 mm-300 mm), for

Water Distribution

AWWA C909 (2009) Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO)

Pressure Pipe, 4 In.-12 In. (100 mm-300 mm), for Water

Distribution

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Submit manufacturer’s standard catalog data sheets for pipe, pipe fittings, joints,

joint gaskets, lubricants, valves, and appurtenances.

SD-07 Certificates

Submit each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings, joints,

joint gaskets, lubricants, valves, and appurtenances meet or exceed specification

requirements.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.3.1 Delivery and Handling

Do not place materials on private property without written permission of the property

owner. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to

materials. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Avoid shock or damage at all times. Take

measures to prevent damage to the exterior surface or internal lining of the pipe.

1.3.2 Storage

Do not stack pipe higher than recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Store all PVC

products and gaskets in a cool, dry location out of direct sunlight, covering if necessary,

and not in contact with petroleum products.


October 2016 02610-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

Sanitary force main and gravity systems shall comply with the HRPDC Regional

Construction Standards.

2.2 MARKING TAPE

All pipelines shall be marked with a continuous strip of identification tape as specified in

Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill."

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Perform trench excavation to the line and grade indicated on the Contract Drawings and in

accordance with Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill." Unless otherwise indicated on the

Contract Drawings, provide for a minimum cover of 36-inches above the top of piping laid

in trenches. Provide pipe bedding as specified in Section 02315, “Excavation and Fill” and

as detailed in the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards. Place bedding in a manner to

avoid segregation, and compact to the maximum practical density so that the pipe can be

laid to the required tolerances.

3.2 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

Install sanitary gravity and force main sewer systems in accordance with Division 8 of the

HRPDC Regional Construction Standards.

3.3 LAYING PIPE IN TRENCHES

Lower pipe into trench using handling equipment designed for the purpose to assure safety

of personnel and to avoid damage to pipe. Do not drop pipe. Chains will not be

permitted. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade with the bell or groove pointing upstream. Lay

pipe to a true uniform line with the barrel of the pipe resting solidly in pipe bedding

material throughout its length. Excavate recesses in pipe bedding material to

accommodate joints, fittings and appurtenances. Do not subject pipe to a blow or shock to

achieve solid bearing or grade. Lay each section of pipe in such a manner as to form a

close concentric joint with the adjoining section and to avoid offsets in the flow line.

Clean and inspect each section of pipe before joining. Assemble to provide tight, flexible

joints that permit movement caused by expansion, contraction, and ground movement.

Use lubricant recommended by the pipe or fitting manufacturer for making joints. If

unusual joining resistance is encountered or if the pipe cannot be fully inserted into the

bell, disassemble joint, inspect for damage, re-clean joint components, and reassemble.


October 2016 02610-4

3.4 PROGRESSION OF WORK

Disassemble and remake improperly assembled joints using a new gasket. Check each pipe

installed as to line and grade in place. Correct deviation from grade immediately. A

deviation from the designed grade as shown on the Contract Drawings, or deflection of

pipe joints, will be cause for rejection. Place sufficient backfill on each section of pipe, as

it is laid, to hold firmly in place. Clean interior of the pipe as work progresses. Where

cleaning after laying is difficult because of small pipe size, use a suitable swab or drag in

the pipe and pull forward past each joint immediately after the jointing has been

completed. Keep trenches and excavations free of water during construction. When the

work is not in progress, and at the end of each workday, securely plug open ends to

prevent trench water, earth, or other substances from entering the pipes or fittings.

3.5 DEFLECTION:

When it is necessary to deflect pressure mains from a straight alignment horizontally or

vertically, do not exceed 50% of manufacturer’s recommendations or per AWWA C600

or AWWA C605, as applicable, whichever is most stringent.

3.6 THRUST RESTRAINT

Provide thrust restraints for pressure pipeline at all bends, tees, valves and changes in

direction as indicated on the Drawings.

3.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

Conform to the applicable requirements of Section 03300 and as detailed on the drawings.

3.8 BACKFILLING TRENCHES

Backfill trenches as specified in Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill."

3.9 TESTING

Provide testing in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 15190, "Hydrostatic

Testing of Piping Systems."

END OF SECTION


October 2016 02741-1

SECTION 02741 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM D 1559 (1989) Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous

Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the Virginia Department of

Transportation (VDOT), Road and Bridge Specifications, dated January 1994, except that

contractual and payment provisions do not apply, and are hereby made a part of these

specifications and as specified on the plans. The specification sections referred to herein are

VDOT specifications.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.3.1 Final Paving

The final layer of asphaltic concrete paving shall be placed no earlier than 30 days prior

to substantial completion of the project unless a written request is received and approved

by the Owner or his representative.

1.3.2 Warranty

Replace without additional cost to the Owner, all sections of paving which may become

defective within a year after date of Substantial Completion. Maintain paving free of

vegetation growing through from below for one year after date of Substantial

Completion. Any procedure required for eradication of such vegetation growth shall be

subject to approval of the Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-07 Certificates

Asphalt concrete: Submit certificates, signed by the producer, that paving

materials and incidental construction items conform to specification requirements.


October 2016 02741-2

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT CONCRETE

Provide asphalt concrete in accordance with applicable requirements of the VDOT Road

and Bridge Specifications, except where specified otherwise.

2.2 SUBGRADE MATERIALS

The subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted in accordance with Section 02315,

"Excavation and Fill," and as indicated on the drawings. If material unsuitable for subgrade

is encountered during compaction, the Contractor will be required to remove the unsuitable

material and backfill with suitable soil materials. If the backfill materials are overly wet or

dry, the Contractor shall manipulate until satisfactory or at his option remove and replace at

his own expense. The extent of undercutting and backfilling operations will be determined

by the Owner’s representative.

2.3 SUBBASE MATERIALS

Stone Base Course: #21-A or #21-B Graded Aggregate per Section 208 of the VDOT

Specifications, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 PRIME COAT

The stone base course shall receive a prime coat of liquid asphalt (RC-250), prior to

subsequent course. Material and application shall conform to Sections 210 and 311 of the

VDOT Specifications. Application rates shall be .20-.25 gallon per square yard. Contractor

to immediately remove any materials, which during the application thereof, are accidentally

splattered onto curbs and gutters, etc. If bituminous pavement is 4 1/2 inches finished

thickness or more, prime coat may be omitted.

2.5 TACK COAT

The asphaltic concrete paving base course shall receive a tack coat of liquid asphalt (RC-

250), prior to subsequent course. Material and application shall conform to Sections 210

and 311 of the VDOT Specifications. Application rates shall be 0.05 - 0.10 gallons per

square yard for undiluted asphalt. Diluted asphalt shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 - 0.15

gallons per square yard. If pavement surface has not been contaminated or exposed for

more than 72 hours, tack coat may be omitted upon approval by the Engineer.

2.6 BASE COURSE MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide the asphalt course as indicated. Base Course shall conform to

Section 211 of the VDOT Specifications, Type BM-3 (Type BM-25.0 using "Superpave"

Mixtures). Irregularities, roller marks, etc. will not be accepted.


October 2016 02741-3

2.7 SURFACE COURSE MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide the asphalt course as indicated. Wearing course shall conform

Section 211 of the VDOT Specifications, Type SM-2A (Type SM-9.5A using "Superpave"

Mixtures). Irregularities, roller marks, etc. will not be accepted.

2.8 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

Excavation and filling to establish elevation of subgrade is specified in Section 02315,

"Excavation and Fill."

3. EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

Provide construction in accordance with applicable requirements of the VDOT Road and

Bridge Specifications, except where indicated or specified otherwise.

3.1.1 Subgrade

Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill."

3.1.2 Subbase

Construct subbase as specified on the plans and in accordance with Section 308 and 309 of

the VDOT Specifications. The stone subbase course shall be proof-rolled and soft spots

replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

3.1.3 Base Course

Construct base course in accordance with Section 315 of the VDOT Specifications.

Provide Prime Coat prior to placing base course as specified herein. Compact asphalt

mixture to 95 percent of that attained in a laboratory specimen of same mixture prepared

in accordance with ASTM D 1559.

3.1.4 Surface Course

Construct wearing course in accordance with Section 315 of the VDOT Specifications.

Provide tack coat on base course as specified herein. Compact asphalt mixture to 95

percent of that attained in a laboratory specimen of same mixture prepared in accordance

with ASTM D 1559.


October 2016 02741-4

3.2 PROTECTION

Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury until surface

temperature is less than 140 degrees F (60 degrees C). Vehicular traffic shall be prohibited

from newly paved areas for 12 hours.

3.3 TOLERANCES

Upon completion of grading operations, subgrade shall be firm, hard and unyielding with a

true, even and uniform surface at required grades; finished grades shall not show any

deviation in excess of 0.04' from intended grade when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

Minor pavement surface projections, joints and minor honeycombed surfaces shall be ironed

smooth to grade as may be directed by the Owner’s representative.


Testing shall be provided by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner’s representative.

Stone base and asphalt pavement compaction shall be tested every 6,000 square feet.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

Maintain subgrade in its final condition until surfacing is completed. Maintain ditches,

drains and flowlines along subgrade to drain effectively at all times.

3.6 CLEAN-UP

Operations include removal of oil splashes from adjacent construction and prompt removal

from site of excess excavated materials, debris and surplus materials.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 03300-1

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)

ACI 301 (2005) Structural Concrete


ASTM A 497 (2007) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for

Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 615/A 615M (2009; Rev. b) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for


ASTM C 31/C 31M (2009) Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

the Field

ASTM C 39 (2009; Rev. a) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens

ASTM C 42 (2010) Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed

Beams on Concrete

ASTM C 94 (2010) Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 143 (2010) Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

ASTM C 172 (2008) Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 173 (2010; Rev. a) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete

by the Volumetric Method

ASTM C 231 (2009; Rev. b) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete

by the Pressure Method

ASTM C 260 (2006) Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 309 (2007) Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete


October 2016 03300-2

ASTM C 567 (2005; Rev. a) Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight

Concrete

ASTM C 923 (2008) Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals

ASTM C 1107 (2008) Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink)

ASTM C 1478 (2008) Storm Drain Resilient Connectors between

Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Structures, Pipes, and

Laterals

ASTM F2510 (2007) Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures and Corrugated High

Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipes

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcing layout

SD-03 Product data

Waterstops

Wall sleeves

Pipe sleeve seals

SD-06 Test Reports

Compressive strength tests

SD-07 Certificates

Concrete

Provide the dry weight of cement, saturated surface-dry-weights of fine and coarse

aggregate and quantities, type, and name of admixtures and of water (per cubic yard

of concrete used in the manufacture of each batch of concrete. Certify the concrete


October 2016 03300-3

is proportioned to provide concrete of quality and strength specified for its intended

purpose.

1.3 DELIVERY

Do not deliver concrete until forms, reinforcement and embedded items are in place and

ready for concrete placement.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 READY-MIXED CONCRETE

ASTM C 94, Option A. Concrete shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi,

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Slump shall be between 2 and 4 inches.

Provide ASTM C 260, 4 +/- 2 percent air entrainment for concrete exposed to freeze-

thaw conditions, normal weight concrete.

Antimicrobial Additive:

Antimicrobial additive, ConmicShield®, shall be used to render the concrete uninhabitable for

bacteria growth, where indicated on the plans. The liquid antibacterial additive shall be an

EPA registered material and the registration number shall be submitted for approval prior to

use in the project. The amount to be used shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of

the antibacterial additive. This amount shall be included in the total water content of the

concrete mix design. The additive shall be added into the concrete mix water to insure even

distribution of the additive throughout the concrete mixture.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

2.2.1 Reinforcing Bars

ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 including supplementary requirement S1.

2.2.2 Welded Wire Fabric

ASTM A 497, galvanized.

2.3 MATERIALS FOR CURING CONCRETE

2.3.1 Impervious Sheeting

Waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.

2.3.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

ASTM C 309, white-pigmented, Type 2, free of paraffin or petroleum.


October 2016 03300-4

2.4 MOISTURE BARRIER

Polyethylene sheeting, minimum 6 mil thickness, vapor permeance rating not exceeding

0.5 perms.

2.5 WALL SLEEVES AND SEALS

Conduits and pipes passing through concrete floors and walls shall be made with a wall

sleeve, unless otherwise noted on the plans.

2.5.1 Perpendicular Penetration Seals

Seals constructed of an assembly of synthetic rubber links connected with corrosion

resistant stainless steel bolts shall be used to seal the space between wall sleeve and

carrier pipe for pipes entering perpendicular to the concrete surface. When the bolts are

tightened, Delrin plastic pressure plates compress the rubber links to fill the annular space

between the pipe and the wall sleeve to form a watertight seal. Seals shall be

manufactured by Link Seal or approved equal.

2.5.2 Non-Perpendicular Penetration Seals

Rubber boot connectors with stainless steel bands meeting ASTM C 923, ASTM C 1478,

and ASTM F 2510, as applicable for the application, by Kor-N-Seal, PSX, or approved

equal shall be used for conduits and pipes passing through non-perpendicular

penetrations or where entering circular structures below grade. Place non-shrink grout in

annular space (inside and outside, as applicable) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

All belowground concrete construction joints (vertical and horizontal) shall have

bentonite-type waterstops that have a 75 percent minimum bentonite content. Acceptable

waterstop is WATERSTOP-RX® by Volclay. Where a pipe, conduit, or sleeve is cast

into a concrete wall, roof or floor, a bentonite waterstop must be installed around the

outside of either the pipe or of the sleeve.

2.7 NONSHRINK GROUT

ASTM C 1107.

2.8 FORM MATERIALS

Provide metal, plywood, or hardboard forms capable of producing the required surface

without adverse effect on concrete. Do not use form coating that adversely affects

concrete surfaces or impairs subsequent applications to the concrete. Provide metal form

ties, factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off type that will leave holes less than 1/4 inch

deep and not more than one inch in diameter.


October 2016 03300-5

2.9 SPACERS, CHAIRS, BOLSTERS, TIES AND OTHER DEVICES

Galvanized steel or non-corroding material conforming to the Concrete Reinforcing Steel

institute (CRSI) “Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction.”

3. EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

ACI 301.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

ACI 301. Provide bars, wire fabric, including wire ties, supports, and other devices

necessary to install and secure the reinforcement.

3.3 SETTING MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL

Place and secure anchors and bolts, waterstops, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such

items in position before concrete placement in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation.

3.3.1 Wall sleeves and seals

Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of

concrete. After installation of carrier pipe and pipe seal, place non-shrink grout in

annular space (both faces) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

3.3.2 Embedded pipes and conduits

Comply with ACI 318, Article 6.3.5.1 and Article 6.3.5.2. Conduits and embedded pipes

shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on center. The largest conduit size

shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of the concrete

member.

3.4 EDGE AND CORNER TREATMENTS

Chamfer edges are required for all joints and exposed edges whether indicated or not.

Slope for wet well fillets shall be as noted in the plans.

3.5 FLOOR PENETRATION CURBING

All pipe and conduit 3 inch and smaller passing through the floor shall have a 3 inch high

concrete grout curbing around it. Provide 1 inch chamfer on all exposed edges.


October 2016 03300-6

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE BARRIER

Provide beneath the on-grade concrete floor slab. Lap 4 inches minimum, and seal laps

and patches with pressure-sensitive adhesive or tape 2 inches wide, minimum.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

Deliver concrete from mixer to forms continuously until approved unit of operation is

completed. Provide scaffolding, ramps and walkways so that personnel and equipment

are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when sun,

heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper

consolidation, finishing and curing. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final

position in the forms. When a vertical drop greater than 8 feet is authorized, provide

equipment to prevent segregation. Regulate depositing of concrete so that it will be

consolidated in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches thick. Place slabs in one layer.

Screed concrete to provide levels and profiles indicated.

3.8 CONSOLIDATION

Immediately after placing, consolidate each layer of concrete by internal vibrators, except

for slabs 4 inches or less. Use vibrators adequate in effectiveness and number to properly

consolidate the concrete; keep a spare vibrator at the job site during placing operations.

3.9 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

Use special protection measures as approved by Engineer, when freezing temperatures

are anticipated before expiration of the specified curing period (minimum 48 hours).

Temperature of concrete placed during warm weather shall not exceed 85 degrees F

except where an approved retarder is used.

3.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Locate where indicated or approved. Where concrete work is interrupted by weather, end

of work shift or other type of delay, location and type of construction joint shall be

subject to approval of the Engineer.

3.11 SURFACE FINISHES

ACI 301 for repair and finish. Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are provided

or indicated. At a minimum, provide the following finishes:

A. Rough Form - Exterior walls below grade

B. Smooth Form - Interior wet well walls

C. Smooth Rubbed - Interior walls, beams, edges of slab, housekeeping and

equipment pads, and exterior wall exposed to view.


October 2016 03300-7

D. Float Finish - Top of interior slabs

E. Broom Finish - Porch, steps, walks and other exterior pedestrian surfaces

above grade

F. Pavement Finish - Exterior concrete driveways and vehicular access slabs

3.11.1 Floated Finish

Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade,

and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for

floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. When bleedwater is

present prior to floating the surface, drag excess water off or remove by absorption with

porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater. Surface shall be level to

within 1/4 inch in 10 feet where floor drains are not provided.

3.11.2 Broomed Finished

Provide for exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide a floated finish, then finish with a flexible bristle broom. Permit surface to

harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at right

angles to the slope of the slab.

3.11.3 Pavement Finish

Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and

crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After

screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a straight edge to check slope and

flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish by belting. Lay belt flat on

the concrete surface and advance with a sawing motion; continue until a uniform but

gritty nonslip surface is obtained. Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius

of 1/8 inch.

3.12 CURING AND PROTECTION

ACI 301. Preserve moisture, protect from temperature extremes, wind and rain, and from

mechanical injury.

3.13 COATINGS

Coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09900, “Paints and Coatings.”

3.14 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES

Clean and dampen concrete surface before grouting. Set plate or equipment base to line

and elevation. Provide grout at least 3/4 inches thick. Surfaces in contact with grout

shall be free of oil and grease.


October 2016 03300-8


3.15.1 Sampling

ASTM C 172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C

31/C 31M for making test specimens.

3.15.2 Testing

3.15.2.1 Slump Tests

ASTM C 143. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. Perform tests at

commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are made, and for each batch

(minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.

3.15.2.2 Air Content

ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. Test air-entrained concrete

for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests.

3.15.2.3 Temperature Tests

Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold

weather conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F) for each batch

(minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified

temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.

3.15.2.4 Compressive Strength Tests

ASTM C 39. Make two test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C

31/C 31M. Precautions shall be taken to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the

specimen. Test two cylinders at 28 days. Samples for strength tests of each mix design

of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for

each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 500 square feet of surface

area for slabs or walls. Each strength test result shall be the average of two cylinders from

the same concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the average of any three consecutive

strength test results is less than f'c or if any strength test result falls below f'c by more

than 500 psi, take a minimum of three ASTM C 42 core samples from the in-place work

represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Remove concrete not meeting

strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete at no additional expense to the

Owner. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent

concrete.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32 Replacement October 2016 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 1

SECTION 03410

PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Precast structural concrete.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete topping and placing connection anchors in concrete.

2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes.

3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing receivers and reglets. 4. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for joint-filler materials for fire-resistance-

rated construction. 5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved precast structural concrete color, finish, and texture, preapproved by Architect.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated on the design drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests.


C. Shop Drawings: Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units.

1. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. 2. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses. 3. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Show size, length, and type of

each weld. 4. Detail loose and cast-in hardware, lifting and erection inserts, connections, and joints. 5. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or

attached to structure or other construction. 6. Include and locate openings larger than by 10 inches (250 mm). 7. Indicate location of each precast structural concrete unit by same identification mark

placed on panel. 8. Indicate relationship of precast structural concrete units to adjacent materials. 9. Indicate estimated camber for precast floor slabs with concrete toppings. 10. Indicate shim sizes and grouting sequence. 11. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance

requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, testing agency.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons. 3. Admixtures. 4. Bearing pads. 5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.

H. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

I. Source quality-control reports.

J. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant.


B. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified, as evidenced by PCI's Certificate of Compliance, to erect Category S1 - Simple Structural Systems and Category S2 - Complex Structural Systems.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

D. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast structural concrete units indicated.

E. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products."

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

G. Fire-Resistance Calculations: Where indicated, provide precast structural concrete units whose fire resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies," and PCI MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material in same position as during storage.

B. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

1. Store units with dunnage across full width of each bearing point unless otherwise indicated.

2. Place adequate dunnage of even thickness between each unit. 3. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

C. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive stresses that would cause cracking or damage.

D. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

B. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

C. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.

2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116.

2.4 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

A. Pretensioning Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 (Grade 1720) or Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire or ASTM A 886/A 886M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), indented, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand.

B. Unbonded Post-Tensioning Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand.


1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with ACI 423.6 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.6. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.

C. Post-Tensioning Bars: ASTM A 722, uncoated high-strength steel bar.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source.

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S or Class 4S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate unless otherwise approved by Architect.

D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.


H. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.

2.6 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 116.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M.

D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.

K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) or ASTM A 490 ((ASTM A 490M),) Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M).

1. Do not zinc coat ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) bolts.

L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20.

M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized-steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 or SSPC-Paint 25 according to SSPC-PA 1.

N. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.


O. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories required to install precast structural concrete units.

2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, Alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs; stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers. Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an antiseize thread lubricant during assembly.

C. Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 116.

2.8 BEARING PADS

A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application:

1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412.

2. Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer. 70 to 90 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with no cracking, splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test 1 specimen for every 200 pads used in Project.

3. Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; 80 to 100 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Specifications," Division II, Section 18.10.2; or with MIL-C-882E.

4. Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene, glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless- or mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.

5. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.

2.9 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.


2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast-furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 116.

F. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to provide lightweight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 2. Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m), plus or

minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), according to ASTM C 567.

G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.

H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

2.11 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.

1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form liner with form-release agent.


B. Maintain molds to provide completed precast structural concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. 2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered or radiused.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcement exceeds limits specified, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.

2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum coverage. Increase cover requirements according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

4. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses.


G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.

1. Delay detensioning or post-tensioning of precast, prestressed structural concrete units until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as established by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete.

2. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.

3. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.

4. Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich, or epoxy paint to avoid corrosion and possible rust spots.

5. Protect strand ends and anchorages with a minimum of 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout mortar and sack rub surface. Coat or spray the inside surfaces of pocket with bonding agent before installing grout.

H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

I. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm) or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.

J. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

K. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116.

1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."

L. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement.

M. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot-weather concrete placement.

N. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.

O. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

P. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval.


2.13 COMMERCIAL FINISHES

A. Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in molds that impart a smooth finish to concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch (13 mm) caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air holes greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in (1300 sq. mm). Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate precast structural concrete fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

1. Allow testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with testing agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation.

B. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements.

1. Test and inspect self-consolidating concrete according to PCI TR-6.

C. Strength of precast structural concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength.

D. If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, employ a qualified testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.

1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect.

2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition or, if units will be wet under service conditions, test cores after immersion in water in a wet condition.

3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.

4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include the following:

a. Project identification name and number. b. Date when tests were performed. c. Name of precast concrete fabricator. d. Name of concrete testing agency. e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core

tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.


E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast structural concrete units comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with same precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

F. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved samples, sample panels, and mockups.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting, cast-in-place, building structural framing has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or until supporting steel or other structure is complete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, supports, and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connection.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast structural concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.

2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

4. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs.

C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.

D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of the Architect.


E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast, prestressed concrete units.

F. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Protect precast structural concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.

2. Clean weld-affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780.

3. Clean weld-affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and reprime damaged painted surfaces.

4. Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random by calibrated torque wrench.

H. Grouting: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.

1. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. 2. Fill joints completely without seepage to other surfaces. 3. Trowel top of grout joints on roofs smooth and uniform. Finish transitions between

different surface levels not steeper than 1 to 12. 4. Place grout end cap or dam in voids at ends of hollow-core slabs. 5. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or

hardens. 6. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135.

B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Erection of precast structural concrete members.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


C. Field welds will be visually inspected and nondestructive tested according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections.

D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect.

1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and appearance of units has not been impaired.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION 03410


October 2016 04200-1

SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)

ACI 530.1 (2008) Masonry Structures (ASCE 6-08)


ASTM A 36/A 36M (2008) Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A 82 (2007) Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 153/A 153M (2009) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware

ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2009) Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A 366/A 366M (1997; Rev. e1) Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled,

Commercial Quality

ASTM A 615/A 615M (2009; Rev. b) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for


ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009; Rev. a) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip

Process (Metric)

ASTM B 370 (2009) Copper Sheet and Strip for Building

Construction

ASTM C 55 (2009) Concrete Brick

ASTM C 90 (2009) Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

ASTM C 216 (2010) Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from

Clay or Shale)


October 2016 04200-2

ASTM C 270 (2010) Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 476 (2010) Grout for Masonry

ASTM C 652 (2010) Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made

from Clay or Shale)

ASTM D 2000 (2008) Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

ASTM D 2287 (1996; R 2010) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and

Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcing steel

SD-03 Product Data

Accessories

Reinforcement and anchorage

Mortar

SD-04 Samples

Building brick

Concrete Masonry units

Mortar color

Submit one set of each type masonry units, showing full range of color, texture,

finish, and dimensions and one sample of each color of mortar.


Masonry cement


October 2016 04200-3


Do not change source or supply of materials after work has started if the appearance of

the finished work would be affected.

1.3.1 Drawing Requirements

Indicate splicing, laps, shapes, dimensions, and details of reinforcing steel and

accessories. Include details of anchors, adjustable wall ties, positioning devices, bond

beams, and lintels. Do not scale drawings to determine lengths of bars.

1.3.2 Certification of Masonry Cement

Submit the manufacturer's printed instructions on proportions of water and aggregates

and on mixing to obtain the type of mortar required.


Deliver cementitious materials to the site in unbroken containers, plainly marked and

labeled with manufacturers' names and brands. Store cementitious materials in dry,

weather-tight sheds or enclosures and handle so as to prevent entry of foreign materials

and damage by water or dampness. Store masonry units off the ground and handle with

care to avoid chipping and breakage. Protect materials from damage and, except for sand,

keep dry until used. Cover sand to prevent intrusion of water and foreign materials and to

prevent drying. Do not use materials containing frost or ice. Store Type II, concrete

masonry units at the site before using for a minimum of 28 days for air cured units, 10

days for atmospheric steam or water cured units, and 3 days for units cured with steam at

a pressure of 120 to 150 psi and at a temperature of 350 to 365 degrees F for at least 5

hours.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, follow the cold weather construction

procedures of ACI 530.1. When ambient temperature goes above 100 degrees F, follow

the hot weather construction procedures of ACI 530.1.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

2.1.1 Hollow Load Bearing Units

ASTM C 90, Grade N-I, normal weight. Provide standard size, commercially made, load

bearing concrete block, cured and aged by a reputable manufacturer. CMU shall be

modular type; square and true without chips or surface blemishes; have 2 finished faces;

and seasoned at the plant 28 days or autoclave aged before delivery to site. Provide all


October 2016 04200-4

special blocks required by ASTM C 55 and ASTM C 90 for fractional, corner, pier, and

similar blocks.

2.2 LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS

ASTM A 36/A 36M, loose steel angle lintels. Preformed bond beam block to match

adjacent masonry, reinforced as indicated.

2.3 MORTAR

ASTM C 270, Type M for all work below grade; Type N or S for non-load-bearing, non-

shear-wall interior masonry; and Type S for remaining masonry work. Mortar color to be

“Brick Bond Straw” unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer. Air content

shall not be less than 11 percent. Where colored mortar is required, add pigment to

obtain the mortar color. The quantity of metallic oxide pigment relative to the

cementitious content of the mortar mix shall be 10 to 15 percent by weight. Carbon black

shall be no more than 2 percent by weight.

2.4 GROUT

ASTM C 476, coarse. 3,000 psi at 28 days, 8-10 inch slump. 4,000 psi at 28 days for

bond beam.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

2.5.1 Horizontal Joint Reinforcement

Ladder type with 3 or more longitudinal wires for insulated cavity wall installation; 9

gauge steel wire ASTM A 82, galvanized ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 at 1.5 ounces

per square foot minimum. Reinforcement with drips will not be acceptable.

2.5.2 Reinforcing Steel

ASTM A 615/A 615M including supplementary requirement S1, 60 ksi, deformed billet

bars.

2.5.3 Steel Wire Wall Ties

ASTM A 82, galvanized ASTM A 153/A 153M, B-2.

2.5.4 Sheet Metal Anchors and Ties

ASTM A 366/A 366M, ASTM A 653/A 653M, galvanized.


October 2016 04200-5

2.5.5 Plate, Headed and Bent Bar Anchors

ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.6 FLASHINGS

Comply with Section 07600, “Flashing And Sheet Metal.”

2.7 ACCESSORIES

a. Preformed control joints, ASTM D 2287, Type PVC 654-4, minimum durometer

hardness of 85 or ASTM D 2000, 2AA-805, minimum durometer hardness of 80.

b. Joint filler of closed cell polyethylene, polyurethane, or rubber foam; oversized 50

percent to joint width; self-expanding.

c. Head Weeps: Open head joint weeps of plastic construction 3/8 inch wide with

openings to allow for ventilation and drainage while preventing insects from

entering. Weeps shall be full height of masonry joint to minimize blockage.

Hollow tube holes or rope weeps will not be permitted.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

a. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive Work.

b. Coordinate anchor placement for other sections.

3.2 COURSING

3.2.1 Concrete Masonry Units

Lay in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form

concave mortar joints.

3.3 CONTROL JOINTS

Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint

as indicated. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing

members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. Do not extend horizontal joint

reinforcement through control joints.


October 2016 04200-6

3.4 WEEPS

Install open head joint weeps above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and at

bottom of walls. Install in accordance with manufacturers’ installation instructions and

protect from mortar drippings during construction.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

a. As indicated on the plans.

3.6 MASONRY FLASHINGS

Comply with Section 07600, “Flashing And Sheet Metal.” Install flashings as indicated

and at all structural members. Extend flashings through veneer; turn up minimum 8

inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry. Provide end dams in flashing over openings.

Lap end joints and seal watertight.

3.7 LINTELS

Install loose metal shape lintels over openings. Bond beam or concrete lintels shall be as

indicated. Bearing as indicated or 8 inches minimum.

3.8 GROUTED COMPONENTS

Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2

inch of dimensioned position. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing

reinforcing. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches

either side of opening.

3.9 WINDOWS, DOORS, AND LOUVERS

Coordinate with Section 08110 and Section 10201. As work progresses, build in frames.

Bed anchors of frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill

adjacent masonry cores with grout. Provide openings indicated.

3.10 EMBEDDED ITEMS

Build in anchor bolts, plates, wall sleeves, wall thimbles, etc. as indicated.

3.11 WORKMANSHIP AND TOLERANCES

ACI 530.1. Cover walls not being worked on with waterproof membrane.

3.12 OPENINGS

Provide pipe and conduit openings as indicated. Build in pipe sleeves as indicated.


October 2016 04200-7

3.13 CLEANING

a. Keep exposed surfaces clean during construction. Avoid smearing mortar on face

of units.

b. Clean masonry with potable water. Detergents may be used.

c. Do not use acid or caustic solutions.

d. Masonry shall be free of stains, efflorescence, mortar or grout droppings, and debris.

3.14 SEALING

Seal exterior masonry surface in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do

not caulk weep holes.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 04200-8



October 2016 05500-1

SECTION 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATIONS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA 45 (2003) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AA 46 (1978) Anodized Architectural Aluminum

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC S303 (2005) Steel Buildings and Bridges

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A10.3 (2006) Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems

ANSI A14.3 (2008) Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements

ANSI B18.2.1 (1996; R 2005) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch

Series

ANSI B18.6.2 (1998) Slotted Head Cap Screws, Square Head Set

Screws, and Slotted Headless Set Screws

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 (1987; R 2005) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B18.6.3 (2003; R 2008) Machine Screws and Machine Screw

Nuts

ASME/ANSI B18.21.1 (2009) Lock Washers (Inch Series)

ASME/ANSI B18.22.1 (1965; R 2003) Plain Washers


ASTM A 36/A 36M (2008) Carbon Structural Steel


October 2016 05500-2

ASTM A 47/47M (1999; R 2009) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A 53 (2007) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless

ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products

ASTM A 153/A 153M (2009) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware

ASTM A 307 (2007; Rev. B) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi

Tensile Strength

ASTM A 325/325M (2010) Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A 500 (2010) Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009; Rev. A) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or


Process

ASTM A 687 (1993) High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs

ASTM A 780 (2009) Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-

Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A 786/A 786M (2005; R 2009) Rolled Steel Floor Plates

ASTM B 26/B 26M (2009) Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM B 108 (2008) Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B 209M (1995) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

(Metric)

ASTM B 209 (2007) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 221/221M (2008) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

ASTM B 429 (2010) Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and

Tube


October 2016 05500-3

ASTM E 488 (1996; R 2003) Strength of Anchors in Concrete and

Masonry Elements

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

ASCE 7 (2010) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS)

AWS D1.1 (2010) Structural Welding Code Steel

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)

CID A-A-1923 (Rev. A) Shield, Expansion (Lag, Machine and

Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt Anchors)

CID A-A-1924 (Rev. A) Shield, Expansion (Self Drilling Tubular

Expansion Shell Bolt Anchors)

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

FS TT-P-664 (Rev. D) Primer Coating, Alkyd, Corrosion-Inhibiting,

Lead and Chromate Free, VOC-Compliant

FS RR-G-1602 (Rev. D) Grating, Metal, Other Than Bar Type (Floor,

Except for Naval Vessels)

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS

(NAAMM)

NAAMM MBG 531 (2000) Metal Bar Grating Manual

NAAMM MBG 532 (1994) Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM AMP 521 (2001) Pipe Railing Manual


October 2016 05500-4

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Access doors and panels

Stairs, Ladders and Platforms

Embedded angles and plates, installation drawings

Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system,

and anchoring details as specified in AISC S303.

Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type,

grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement,

anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction.

SD-03 Product Data

Access doors and panels


SD-05 Design Data


Provide the services of a qualified professional Engineer registered in the

Commonwealth of Virginia to prepare calculations, shop drawings, and other

structural data required, including structural analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1, as necessary, using procedures,

materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an

enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged

items with new items.


October 2016 05500-5

1.5 INSTALLATION LOCATION

Non-corrosive (aluminum or stainless steel) metals shall be used within the wet well. All

fasteners (nuts, bolts, etc.) installed in the wet well or outside of the station building shall

be stainless steel. All fastebers (nuts, bolts, etc.) installed inside the station pump room

may be galvanized.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel

ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.1.2 Structural Tubing

ASTM A 500.

2.1.3 Steel Pipe

ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe

Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47.

2.1.5 Anchors and Fasteners

Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to which

applied. Fasteners installed in the wet well shall be stainless steel.

2.1.5.1 Expansion Anchors

Provide embedment not less than required by manufacturer. Test expansion anchors per

ASTM E 488.

2.1.5.2 Self-drilling concrete anchors

McMaster-Carr catalog No. 103, Item No. 97052A.

2.1.5.3 Lag Screws and Bolts

ANSI B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.


October 2016 05500-6

2.1.5.4 Toggle Bolts

ANSI B18.2.1.

2.1.5.5 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets

ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307, ASTM A 325.

2.1.5.6 Powder Driven Fasteners

Use when permitted by ANSI A10.3. Follow safety provisions of ANSI A10.3.

2.1.5.7 Screws

ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.6.2, and ANSI B18.6.3.

2.1.5.8 Washers

Provide plain washers to conform to ASME/ANSI B18.22.1. Provide beveled washers

for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness,

and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to ASME/ANSI B18.21.1.

2.1.6 Aluminum Alloy Products

Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B

26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum extrusions at

least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch thick.

2.1.7 Gratings

NAAMM MBG. Provide aluminum gratings that meet the indicated loads. Aluminum

grating shall be of a design, material thickness and strength to support all dead loads plus

a minimum uniform live load of 100 lbs per square foot with a L/240 or 1/4-inch

maximum deflection, whichever is less. Grating shall be welded or pressure locked I-bar

with abrasive embedded non-slip surface. Anchor angle frames to supporting

construction. Band grating along entire perimeter and at holes or other openings. Bands

shall be the full thickness of the grating. Grating shall be removable to permit access for

maintenance.

2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES

2.2.1 Galvanizing

Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable.

Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153Mor ASTM A 653/A 653M G-


October 2016 05500-7

90, as applicable. Galvanize anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices

necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.

2.2.2 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM

A 780.

2.2.3 Shop Cleaning and Painting

Provide steel with the manufacturer's standard prime coat for material to be field painted,

and manufacturer's standard coating for finished material.

2.2.4 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.

2.2.5 Aluminum Surfaces

2.2.5.1 Surface Condition

Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in scratches, kinks,

stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks, and other defects which will affect

uniform appearance of finished surfaces.

2.2.5.2 Unexposed Sheet, Plate, and Extrusions

Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated. Sandblast

castings' finish, medium, AA 45, or AA 46.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

2.3.1 Doors and Frames

Entry doors and frames shall comply with Section 08255, “Flush Doors and Frames.”

2.3.2 Louvers

Ventilation and exhaust louvered openings shall comply with Section 10201, “Metal Wall

Louvers.”

2.3.3 Embedded Access Doors

Provide flush type access doors where indicated for embedment in concrete. Fabricate

frames for embedded access doors using 1/4 inch thick one-piece, mill finish, extruded

aluminum frame, incorporating a continuous concrete anchor. Where the frame exterior


October 2016 05500-8

comes in contact with the concrete, provide a bituminous barrier coating. Doors shall be

constructed of 1/4 inch diamond plate aluminum with adequate reinforcing framing to

withstand a live load of 300 lbs per square foot. Door shall be single leaf and have

opening size as indicated. Door shall open 90 degrees and automatically lock with a

stainless steel hold open arm and aluminum handle. The hold open arm shall be assisted

by a fully enclosed stainless steel compression spring operator to act as a check in

retarding downward motion of the door and to assist in opening the door from below.

Door shall close flush with the frame and rest on a neoprene gasket. Hinges shall be

brass or stainless steel with stainless steel hardware. Doors shall be fitted with stainless

steel padlock hasps. Lock to be provided by locality. Frame drains shall be directed to

discharge to the wet well through a check valve. Embedded access doors shall be

warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of no less than five

years. Acceptable manufacturers are Halliday Products Series 'W' Access Doors, The

Bilco Company Series 'J' or 'JD' Pit, Vault and Sidewalk Doors, or approved equal.

2.4 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS)

Provide 4 inch galvanized standard weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A 53.

Anchor posts in concrete and fill solidly with concrete with minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 2500 psi. Posts shall be coated with paint in accordance with

Section 09900, Paints and Coatings. Color shall be Safety Yellow.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels,

sill angles, miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide lintels fabricated from

structural steel shapes over openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as

required to support wall loads over openings. Provide with connections and fasteners.

Construct to have at least 200 mm 8 inches bearing on masonry at each end. Provide

angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embedment as indicated. Galvanize all

embedded items, whether exposed to the elements or not, according to ASTM A 123/A

123M. Piping supports within the wet well shall be aluminum or stainless steel securely

anchored to the wall with stainless steel fasteners.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install items at locations indicated and according to shop drawings.

3.2 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in

place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts,

expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts

and through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag


October 2016 05500-9

bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous

attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials,

generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Fasteners used in

the wet well shall be stainless steel. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

3.3 BUILT-IN-WORK

Form for anchorage of metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide with

suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal work in ample time

for securing in place as the work progresses. Fabrications shall be installed and protected

in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4 WELDING

Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS

D1.1. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in

the finished installation

3.5 FIELD FINISHING

3.5.1 Coatings

Coat exposed metal items in accordance with Section 09900, “Paints and Coatings.”

Aluminum items shall be anodized finish and not coated except where specified herein.

3.5.2 Dissimilar Materials

Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with concrete,

mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect surfaces with a

coat conforming to FS TT-P-664 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Alkyd is not to

be used on metal in contact with concrete or masonry.

3.5.3 Field Preparation

Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by

the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease,

dirt and other foreign matter. Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to

foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above

the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F

or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 05500-10



October 2016 06100-1

SECTION 06100 -ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AFPA)

AFPA NDS (2005) National Design Specification for Wood

Construction and Supplement 2005 Design Values for

Wood Construction

AFPA WCD1 (2001) Wood Frame Construction Manual (WFCM) for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings


ANSI B18.2.1 (2010) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series

ANSI B18.5.2.1M (2006) Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts

ANSI B18.6.1 (1981; R 2008) Wood Screws (Inch Series)

APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)

APA E30 (2007) Engineered Wood Construction Guide

APA E445 (2002) Quality Assurance Policies for Structural-Use

Panels Qualified to PRP-108


ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 (2010) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

ANSI/ASME B18.5.2.2M (1982; R 2005) Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts




Process

ASTM D 2103 (2010) Polyethylene Film and Sheeting


October 2016 06100-2

ASTM F 1667 (2005) Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples

AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA T1 (2010) Use Category System: Processing and Treatment

Standard

AWPA U1 (2010) Use Category System: User Specification for

Treated Wood

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

FS UU-B-790 (Rev. A Reinst) Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber:

(Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire

Resistant)

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE PRODUCT STANDARDS (PS)

PS-1 (2007) Structural Plywood

SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB SPIBGR (1994) Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Grading Rules

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-05 Design Data

Framing calculations

Provide the services of a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the


structural data required when framing other than pre-fabricated roof trusses

conforming to Section 06192, “Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses.”


October 2016 06100-3

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to

provide proper ventilation, drainage, and protection against dampness. Protect from

extreme changes in temperature and humidity.

1.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

AWPA T1 and AWPA U1 for lumber, timber, and plywood. Air or kiln dry after

treatment. Verify specific treatments by the report of an approved independent

inspection agency, or the AWPB Quality Mark on each piece. Brush-coat areas that are

cut or drilled after treatment with either the same preservative used in the treatment or

with a 2 percent copper naphthenate solution. Preservative treat the following items:

A. Wood sills, soles, plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than 24 inches from the

ground, furring, and nailers that are set into or in contact with concrete or masonry.

B. Nailers, edge strips, crickets, curbs, and cants for roof decks.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER AND SHEATHING

2.1.1 Grading and Marking

Provide materials bearing the grademark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating

grades of material and rules or standards under which produced.

2.1.2 Sizes

Sizes shall conform to requirements of the rules or standards under which produced.

Unless otherwise specified, lumber shall be surfaced on four sides. Size references are

nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the

standard under which the product is produced.

2.1.3 Structural and Miscellaneous Wood Members

2.1.3.1 Structural Members

Provide structural lumber, except trusses, with allowable design values of 1,500 psi in

extreme fiber in bending; 1,200 psi in compression parallel to the grain; and a modulus of

elasticity of 1,700,000 psi. Other stress graded or dimensioned items such as blocking,

carriages, sleepers and studs shall be standard or No. 2 grade except that studs may be

Stud grade.


October 2016 06100-4

2.1.3.2 Nonstress Graded Members

Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and nailing strips.

Provide members in accordance with SPIB SPIBGR. Sizes shall be as follows unless

otherwise indicated:

Member Size

________ ______

Bridging 1 by 3 or 1 by 4 for use between members

2 by 12 and smaller; 2 by 4 for use

between members larger than 2 by 12

Corner bracing 1 by 4

Furring 1 by 3

Grounds Plaster thickness by 1 1/2 inch

Nailing strips 1 by 3 or 1 by 4 when used as shingle

base or interior finish, otherwise

2 by stock

2.1.4 Sheathing

Provide roof sheathing of plywood, or structural-use panels.

2.1.4.1 Plywood

PS-1 with grade-trademark of the APA, showing species, glue type, and compliance with

applicable commercial standards. Provide sheathing for roof and walls without corner

bracing with span rating of 16/0 or greater for supports 16 inches on center and span

rating of 24/0 or greater for supports 24 inches on center. Use exterior type plywood

where faces and edges are exposed to the weather. General use plywood and plywood for

sheathing shall be grade C-D. Plywood for ceiling shall be grade A-C.

2.1.5 Preservative-Treated Lumber

AWPA T1 and AWPA U1, provide treated sills and roof nailers.

2.2 FASTENERS

2.2.1 Bolts and Nuts

ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.5.2.1M, ANSI/ASME B18.5.2.2M, ASME/ANSI B18.2.2.


October 2016 06100-5

2.2.2 Lag Screws and Lag Bolts

ANSI B18.2.1.

2.2.3 Wood Screws

ANSI B18.6.1.

2.2.4 Wire Nails

ASTM F 1667.

2.2.5 Joist Hangers

Provide zinc coated steel hanger, sized to develop the full strength of the supported

member. Furnish complete with any special nails required.

2.2.6 Tie Straps

Provide 1/8 by 1 1/2 inch by 2 feet steel strap for joists supported by the lower flange of

steel beams.

2.2.7 Metal Bridging

Provide No. 16 U.S. Standard gage, cadmium-plated or zinc-coated bridging at locations

indicated.

2.2.8 Panel Edge Clips

Extruded aluminum or galvanized steel, H-shaped clips to prevent differential deflection

of roof sheathing.

2.2.9 Metal Framing Anchors

Provide anchors, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, 18 gage minimum, punched and formed so

that nails are stressed only in shear. Provide zinc-coated nails supplied by the

manufacturer for the anchor.


October 2016 06100-6

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS

3.1.1 General

AFPA WCD1 for nailing schedule. Installation of timber connections shall conform to

applicable requirements of AFPA NDS. Members framed for passage of ducts and pipes

shall be cut, notched, or bored in accordance with applicable requirements of AFPA

WCD1. Set rafters, purlins, and joists with crown edge up. Level joists, beams, and

girders on masonry or concrete with slate or steel; level wood or metal without shims.

3.1.2 Structural Members

Brace members during erection. Align members and complete connections before

removal of bracing. Treat scratches and abrasions through the factory-applied sealer with

two brush coats of the same sealer.

3.1.3 Ceiling Framing

A. Except where otherwise indicated, provide joist bearing not less than 4 inches on

concrete or masonry and 1 1/2 inches on wood or metal.

B. Joists, trimmers, headers, and beams framing into carrying members at the same

relative levels shall be carried on joist hangers.

C. Lap and connect joists at bearings or butt end-to-end with scab ties at joint and spike

to plates.

D. Frame openings with headers and trimmers. Double headers carrying more than

two tail joists and trimmers supporting headers carrying more than one tail joist.

Provide minimum 24” x 36” (nominal) framed opening for attic access.

3.1.4 Roof Framing or Rafters

A. Provide valley, ridge, and hip members of depth equal to cut on rafters where

practicable, but in no case less than depth of rafters. Form crickets and watersheds.

Rafters, except hip and valley rafters, shall be bolted by angles. Rafters shall be toe-

nailed to ridge; valley, or hip members with at least three 8 penny nails.

B. Brace rafters to prevent movement until permanent bracing, decking or sheathing is

installed. Secure hip and valley rafters to wall plates by clip angles.

C. Frame roof openings with headers and trimmers. Double headers carrying more

than two rafters, and double trimmers supporting headers carrying more than one

rafter.


October 2016 06100-7

D. Hip rafters longer than the available lumber shall be butt jointed and scabbed.

Double valley rafters longer than the available lumber, with pieces lapped not less

than 4 feet and spike together.

3.1.5 Install Metal Framing Anchors

Provide framing anchors where indicated. Fasten rafter to plates and studs against uplift

movement. Drive a nail in each nail hole provided in the anchor.

3.1.6 Bridging

Bevel-cut wood bridging to afford firm contact and nail at each end with two nails.

Install metal bridging as recommended by the manufacturer. The lower ends of bridging

shall be driven up tight and secured after subflooring or roof sheathing has been laid and

partition framing installed.

3.1.7 Nailers and Nailing Strips

Provide nailers and nailing strips as necessary for attachment of finish materials. Provide

treated roof nailers. Install nailers, used in conjunction with roof deck installation, flush

with the roof deck system. Assemble stacked nailers with spikes or nails spaced not more

than 18 inches on center and staggered. Beginning and ending nails shall not be more

than 6 inches from nailer end. Offset ends of stacked nailers approximately 12 inches in

long runs and alternate at corners. Extend anchors through entire thickness of nailer.

Provide strips in lengths as long as practicable, butt join, cut into wood framing members

when necessary, and secure in place.

3.1.8 Wood Sleepers

Provide wood sleepers in lengths as long as practicable, butt joint, and stagger end joints

in adjacent rows.

3.1.9 Furring Strips

Provide furring strips as indicated. Install furring strips at 16 inches on center, run in

lengths as long as practicable, butt joint and secure in place.

3.1.10 Rough Bucks and Frames

Set rough bucks true and plumb, and secure with anchors near top and bottom of each

wood member and at intermediate intervals of not more than 3 feet. Provide expansion

bolts for concrete. Provide steel strap anchors for masonry.


October 2016 06100-8

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING

3.2.1 Plywood and Structural-Use Panels

Apply sheathing with edges 1/8 inch apart at side and end joints, and nail at supported

edges at 6 inches on center and at intermediate supports 12 inches on center. Nail 3/8

inch from the edges. Roof sheathing shall be applied with long dimension at right angles

to supports, end joints made over supports, and end joints staggered. APA E30 for

blocking, panel edge clips, or interlocking edge.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING PAPER

Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4 INSPECTIONS

Contractor shall coordinate with Code Officials and the Engineer for inspections of the

structural members in accordance with building code requirements. Removal and

reinstallation of building components due to Contractor’s lack of coordination shall be

performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 06192-1

SECTION 06192 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES

1. GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

Metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal-

plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled

before delivery to project site.

1.2 REFERENCES



AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AFPA)

AFPA NDS (2005) National Design Specification for Wood

Construction and Supplement 2005 Design Values for

Wood Construction

AFPA WCD1 (2001) Wood Frame Construction Manual (WFCM) for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings


PS-20 (2010) American Softwood Lumber Standard


ANSI B18.2.1 (2010) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series

ANSI B18.5.2.1M (2006) Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts

ANSI B18.6.1 (1981; R 2008) Wood Screws (Inch Series)

APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)

APA E30 (2007) Engineered Wood Construction Guide


ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 (2010) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

ANSI/ASME B18.5.2.2M (1982; R 2005) Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts


October 2016 06192-2




Process

ASTM F 1667 (2005) Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples



Standard


Treated Wood

SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB SPIBGR (1994) Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Grading Rules

TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI)

ANSI/TPI 1 (2007; R 2010) National Design Standard for Metal-

Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction

TPI BCSI (2008) Building Component Safety Information,: Guide

to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining &

Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses

TPI DSB (1989) Recommended Design Specification for

Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood

Trusses

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Metal-plate-connected wood trusses

Shop drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing

for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be

used; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, and orientation and

location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. Include truss shop drawings


October 2016 06192-3

signed and sealed by the qualified Professional Engineer responsible for their

preparation.

SD-05 Design Data


Provide the services of a qualified professional Engineer registered in the


structural data required.

SD-07 Certificates


Product certificates signed by officer of truss fabricating firm certifying that metal-

plate-connected wood trusses supplied for project comply with specified

requirements and shop drawings.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Engineer, fabricate, and erect metal-plate-connected wood trusses to withstand design

loads within limits and under conditions required. All roof trusses supporting mechanical

equipment shall be designed for the actual weight of the equipment in addition to the

loads listed above. See mechanical drawings for location of equipment. Coordinate the

weight and location of truss-supported equipment with the equipment purchased.

1.5 DESIGN LOADS

Metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall be designed for the loads indicated on the

drawings without vertical deflection of 1/360 of span due to total load.


1.6.1 Installer Qualifications

Installer shall have completed wood truss installation similar in material, design, and

extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service

performance.

1.6.2 Fabricator's Qualifications

Provide the services of a firm that complies with the following requirements for quality

control and is experienced in fabricating metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to

those indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

Fabricator shall participate in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves


October 2016 06192-4

inspection by SPID; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; TPI; or other independent

inspecting and testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6.3 Metal-Plate Connector Manufacturer's Qualifications

A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality-control

procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in ANSI/TPI 1. Provide metal

connector plates from one source and one single manufacturer.

1.6.4 Professional Engineer’s Qualifications

A Professional Engineer who is registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia and is

legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where project is located and who is

experienced in providing Engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in

the installing metal-plate-connected wood trusses, truss connections, and accessories

similar to those indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service

performance.


Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition. Inspect trusses showing discoloration,

corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are

damaged or defective. Do not alter trusses in the field. Store under cover in well-

ventilated area. Stack to ensure ventilation and drainage. Protect against dampness.

Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's written instructions

and TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS

2.1.1 Wood Structural Design Standard

Comply with applicable requirements of AFPA national design specification for wood

construction and its supplement.

2.1.2 Softwood Lumber

Conform to PS-20. AWI QS Premium grade. Provide lumber with each piece factory

marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule

requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of

surfacing, and mill.


October 2016 06192-5

2.1.2.1 Grade and Species

Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded as

follows and of the following minimum design values for size of member required

according to AFPA National Design Specification for wood construction, and its

supplement:

Bending, FB 1200 psi

Modulus of elasticity, E 1,600,000 psi

Shear 90 psi

Compression parallel to grain 1,000 psi

Tension parallel to grain 625 psi.

2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES

Fabricate connector plates from structural quality steel sheet; zinc coated by hot-dip

process complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M; Grade 33 and not less than 0.0359 inch

(0.91 millimeter) thick.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Metal framing anchors

Size and type to suit application. Hot-dip galvanized steel. Manufactured by Simpson

Strong-Tie Company, Inc. or approved equal.

2.3.2 Fasteners

Size and type to suit application. Hot-dip galvanized or steel stainless steel Type 304 or

316 for exterior, high humidity and treated wood locations.

2.3.2.1 Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples

FS FF-N-105.

2.3.2.2 Powder Driven Fasteners

Not acceptable.

2.3.2.3 Wood Screws

ASME B18.6.1.

2.3.2.4 Lag Bolts

ASME B18.2.1/B18.2.3.8M


October 2016 06192-6

2.3.2.5 Bolts

Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6);

with ASTM A 563/A 563M hex nuts and flat washers.

2.4 WOOD TREATMENT

Treat lumber and plywood for exterior use or in contact with masonry or concrete with

water-borne preservatives in accord with AWPA T1 and AWPA U1. Identify treatment

on each piece by quality mark of an agency accredited by the board of review of the

American Lumber Standards Committee.

2.5 GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT

SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc

dust by weight.

2.6 FABRICATION

Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.

Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details

required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated. Assemble truss

members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity

and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances of

ANSI/TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. Fabricate wood

trusses within manufacturing tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1. Connect truss members by metal

connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously into both sides of wood

members by air or hydraulic press.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Where trusses do not fit, return them to fabricator and replace with trusses of correct size;

do not alter trusses in the field. Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction

is in place and is braced and secured. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to project

site in more than one piece.

3.2 TRUSS INSTALLATION

Hoist trusses in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses

required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending

or other causes. Install and brace trusses according to recommendations of TPI DSB and

TPI BCSI and as indicated. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely

fasten to supporting construction. Space, adjust, and align trusses in location before


October 2016 06192-7

permanently fastening at a maximum truss spacing of 24 inches. Install wood trusses

within installation tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.

3.3 ANCHORAGE

Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install

fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's

fastening schedules and written instructions. Install and fasten permanent bracing during

truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent

bracing where terminating at walls or beams.

3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

3.4.1 Metal Connector Plates

Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint

according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4.2 Wood Trusses

Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator and

replace with trusses that do meet requirements. Do not alter trusses in the field. Do not

cut or remove truss members.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 06192-8



October 2016 06200-1

SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

AWI QS (2009) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and

Quality Certification Program



Standard


Treated Wood

NATIONAL WOOD WINDOW & DOOR ASSOCIATION (NWWDA)

NWWDA IS 4 (2009) Preservative Treatment for Millwork


PS-20 (2010) American Softwood Lumber Standard


Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition. Store under cover in well-ventilated

area. Stack to ensure ventilation and drainage. Protect against dampness.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS

2.1.1 Softwood Lumber

Conform to PS-20. AWI QS Premium grade.

2.1.2 Hardwood Lumber

AWI QS Premium grade.


October 2016 06200-2

2.2 NON-WOOD MATERIALS

Comply with Section 06670, “Cellular PVC Fabrications.”

2.3 ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Fasteners

Size and type to suit application. Hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel for exterior,

high humidity and treated wood locations.

2.3.2 Contact Adhesive

Water base type.

2.3.3 Wall Adhesive

Cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving durable bond.

2.3.4 Primer

Alkyd primer sealer type.

2.4 WOOD TREATMENT

2.4.1 Nonpressure Preservative Treatment

Treat exterior woodwork and trim, except for all-heart material of cedar, cypress or

redwood, in accord with NWWDA IS 4. Label or certify to indicate compliance.

Brushcoat cuts and holes with same preservative.

2.4.2 Pressure Preservative Treatment

Treat lumber and plywood for exterior use or in contact with masonry or concrete with

water-borne preservatives in accord with AWPA T1 and AWPA U1. Identify treatment

on each piece by quality mark of an agency accredited by the board of review of the

American Lumber Standards Committee.

2.5 PREFABRICATED MILLWORK FABRICATIONS

2.5.1 Quality Standards (QS)

Fabricate to AWI QS Premium Grade standards.


October 2016 06200-3

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Before installation, apply primer to items or assemblies which will be in contact with

cementitious materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Exterior Finish Work

Machine-sand exposed flat members and square edges. Machine-finish semi-exposed

surfaces. Construct joints to exclude water. In addition to nailing, glue joints of built-up

items with waterproof glue as necessary for weather-resistant construction. Provide well

distributed end joints in built-up members. Provide shoulder joints in flat work. Hold

backs of wide-faced miters together with metal rings and waterproof glue. Fascias and

other flat members, unless otherwise indicated, shall be 3/4 inch thick. Provide door and

window trim in single lengths. Provide braced, blocked, and rigidly anchored cornices

for support and protection of vertical joints. Position plywood joints over center lines of

supports.

3.2.2 Finish Hardware

Install hardware furnished under other sections in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 06200-4



October 2016 07311-1

SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM D 41 (2005) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing,

and Waterproofing

ASTM D 226 (2009) Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing

and Waterproofing

ASTM D 249 (2002; R2007) Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt)

Surfaced with Mineral Granules

ASTM D 3018 (2010; Rev. A) Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with

Mineral Granules

ASTM D 3462 (2010; Rev. A) Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt

and Surfaced with Mineral Granules

ASTM D 4586 (2007) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

UL 790 (2004) Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials

UL 997 (2007) Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering

Materials

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Top lap: That portion of shingle overlapping shingle in course below.

B. Head lap: The triple coverage portion of top lap which is the shortest distance from

the butt edge of an overlapping shingle to the upper edge of a shingle in the second

course below.

C. Exposure: That portion of a shingle exposed to the weather after installation.


October 2016 07311-2

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Shingles

Submit data including type, weight, color, class, UL labels, and special types of

underlayment and eave flashing.

SD-04 Samples

Shingles


Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened bundles and containers bearing the

manufacturer's brand name. Keep materials dry, completely covered, and protected from

the weather. Store according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.5 WARRANTIES

Warranties shall begin on the date of Owner acceptance of the work.

1.5.1 Manufacturer's Warranty

Furnish the asphalt shingle manufacturer's standard 30-year warranty for the asphalt

shingles. The warranty shall run directly to the Owner and be transferable.

1.5.2 Contractor's Warranty

The Contractor shall warrant for 5 years that the asphalt shingle roofing system, as

installed, is free from defects in workmanship. When repairs due to defective

workmanship are required during the Contractor's warranty period, the Contractor shall

make such repairs within 72 hours of notification. When repairs are not performed

within the specified time, emergency repairs performed by others shall not void the

warranty.


October 2016 07311-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Shingles

Glass fiber mat base, ceramically colored/UV resistant mineral granule-surfaced asphalt

shingles; two-piece laminated, algae-resistant, self-sealing, fungus-resistant, architectural

grade, ASTM D 3018, Type I, and ASTM D 3462, weighing not less than 300 pounds per

100 square feet. Shingles shall meet the fire resistance requirements of UL 790 for Class

A and the wind resistance requirements of UL 997. Color shall be as indicated or

approved by the Engineer.

2.1.2 Shingle Underlayment

Two-ply, No. 15, asphalt-saturated felt conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I, without

perforations or other material specified by the shingle manufacturer for use as

underlayment.

2.1.3 Self-Adhering Membrane

Self-adhering rubberized asphaltic membrane, a minimum of 40 mils thick, and

recommended by the shingle manufacturer for use as eaves flashing.

2.1.4 Nails for Applying Shingles and Asphalt-Saturated Felt

Aluminum or hot-dipped galvanized steel with sharp points and flat heads 3/8 to 7/16

inch in diameter. Shank diameter of nails shall be a minimum of 0.105 inch and a

maximum of 0.135 inch. Nails shall be long enough to penetrate completely through or

extend a minimum of 3/4 inch into roof deck, whichever is less, when driven through

materials to be fastened.

2.1.5 Asphalt Roof Cement

ASTM D 4586, Type II.

2.1.6 Asphalt Primer

ASTM D 41.

2.1.7 Hip and Ridge Vents

Low profile, crush proof design, made from heat resistant, dimensionally-stable, profile

extruded polypropylene. Vents must be UL Class “A” as to external fire exposure.

Vents must be installed beneath a shingle overlay. Vent shall provide 13.5 sq. inches of

Net Free Ventilation Area (NFVA) for a 1/150 vent ratio.


October 2016 07311-4

3. EXECUTION

3.1 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

Ensure that roof deck is smooth, clean, dry, and without loose knots.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

Cover knotholes and cracks with sheet metal nailed securely to sheathing. Flash and

secure vents and other roof projections, and drive projecting nails firmly home.

3.3 APPLICATION

Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless specified or recommended otherwise

by shingle manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3.1 Underlayment

Provide for roof slopes 4 inches per foot and greater. Provide a 19 inch wide strip as

starter sheet to maintain specified number of layers throughout roof. Lay parallel to

eaves, starting at eaves. Provide minimum 19 inch head laps, 6 inch laps from both sides

over hips and ridges, and 12 inch end laps in the field of the roof. Nail sufficiently to

hold until shingles are applied. Turn up vertical surfaces a minimum of 4 inches. When

a self-adhering membrane is used for eave flashing, start underlayment from upper edge

of eave flashing.

3.3.2 Drip Edges

Provide metal drip edges as specified in Section 07600, "Flashing and Sheet Metal,"

applied directly on the wood deck at eaves and over the underlayment at rakes. Extend

back from edge of deck a maximum of 3 inches, and secure with nails spaced a maximum

of 4 inches o.c. along inner edge.

3.3.3 Starter Strip

Apply starter strip at eaves, using 9 inch wide strip of mineral-surfaced roll roofing of a

color to match shingles. Optionally, use a row of shingles with tabs removed and

trimmed to ensure that joints are not exposed at shingle cutouts. Apply starter strip along

eaves, overhanging the metal drip edge at eaves and rake edges 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch;

fasten in a line parallel to and 3 to 4 inches above eave edge. Place nails so tops are not

exposed in cutouts of first course of shingles.


October 2016 07311-5

3.3.4 Shingle Courses

Start first course with full shingle, and apply succeeding courses with joints staggered at

thirds or halves. Butt-end joints of shingles shall not align vertically more often than

every fourth course. Apply shingle courses as follows:

A. Fastening: Do not drive fasteners into or above the factory-applied adhesive unless

adhesive is located 5/8 inch or closer to top of cutouts. Place fasteners so they are

concealed by shingle top lap and penetrate the head lap.

B. Nailing: Apply shingles with nominal 5 inch exposure. Apply each shingle with

minimum of six nails. Place one nail one inch from each end and one nail on each

side of each cutout, on a horizontal line 5/8 inch above cutouts.

C. Sealing: Seal each tab with continuous, 9 inch long, 1/4 inch diameter bead of

asphalt roof cement, applied to the surface of course below. Place bead on

horizontal line 5/8 inch above cutouts so bead will be one inch from bottom edge of

tab to be sealed and so bead will not show through cutouts. After nailing each

shingle, press tabs down to ensure spreading and bonding of asphalt roof cement.

3.3.5 Hips and Ridges

Form with 9 by 12 inch individual shingles or with 12 by 12 inch shingles cut from 12 by

36 inch strip shingles. Bend shingles lengthwise down center with equal exposure on

each side of hip or ridge. Lap shingles to provide a maximum 5 inch exposure, and nail

each side in unexposed area 5 1/2 inches from butt and one inch in from edge.

3.3.5.1 Vented Hips and Ridges

Initially form as for non-vented ridge or hip. Measure a 3 inch slot, 1 ½ inches each side

of ridge centerline to allow for a 2x ridge board or smaller. Snap chalk lines the entire

length of the ridge. Cut slot with a circular saw and clean out debris. Set saw depth so as

not to cut roof rafters. Stop the slot 12 inches short of any ridge end, intersecting ridge or

obstruction (such as a chimney). If architectural shingles, shakes, or roofing with an

irregular surface is used, apply a bead of caulk to roof deck before installing vent. This

will seal any gaps that could allow weather penetration under the vent. Install vent in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. Begin at one end. Caulk between

bottom edge of vent and roof. Pull firmly to fully extend, center vent on ridge and nail

other end down. Make sure vent matches roof pitch before nailing both sides in place.

Fasten per manufacturer’s recommended spacing. Center shingle cap on vent and nail.

Continue nailing until all vent is covered with ridge caps. Be careful not to overdrive

nail. Nail head should be flush with top of shingle, without indenting it. Pre-forming

caps in cold weather helps avoid cracking.


October 2016 07311-6

3.3.6 Valleys

Provide open sheet metal valleys.

3.3.6.1 Open Sheet Metal Valleys

Sheet metal flashing for valleys is specified in Section 07600, "Flashing and Sheet

Metal." Before installing and fastening flashing in place with metal cleats:

A. Install single layer of 36 inch wide, asphalt-saturated felt, centered on valley and

extending entire length of valley over felt underlayment.

B. Cut regular shingle courses on each roof on true line 2 inches from valley centerline

at top of valley, and increase width between lines by one inch for each 8 feet of

valley length, continuing to eaves.

C. Apply 2 inch band of asphalt roof cement over flashing, along and under side of

shingles adjoining valley.

D. Press shingles tightly into cement, and nail in normal manner, except apply nails not

closer than 5 inches to valley centerline. Do not drive nails through valley flashing.

E. Provide a 4 inch band of asphalt roof cement for fastening shingle tabs down along

open metal gutters.

3.3.7 Flashing

3.3.7.1 Roof Penetration Flashing

Provide treated wood crickets as specified in Section 06100, "Rough Carpentry." Provide

metal base and counterflashing as specified in Section 07600, "Flashing and Sheet

Metal." Uniformly coat masonry surfaces that are to receive flashing with asphalt primer

applied at rate of one gallon per 100 square feet. Apply shingles over underlayment up to

front face of penetration. Apply metal front base flashing with lower section extending at

least 4 inches over shingles. Set base flashing in a 1/16 inch coating of asphalt roof

cement on shingles and penetration face. Apply metal step flashing at sides in a coating

of asphalt roof cement. Embed end shingles in each course that overlap step flashing

with asphalt roof cement. Apply metal rear base flashing over cricket and back of

penetration in coating of asphalt roof cement. Apply end shingles in each course up to

cricket, and cement in place. Lap base flashing minimum of 3 inches with metal

counterflashing.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 07600-1

SECTION 07600 -FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL

ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA)

SMACNA ASMM (2003) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.2 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

Package and protect materials during shipment. Inspect for damage, dampness, and wet-

storage stains upon delivery to job site. Remove and replace damaged materials that

cannot be restored to like-new condition. Handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and

ends. Store in dry, weather-tight, ventilated areas until installation.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Standard commercial materials with weights as listed in Table I, as specified below, or as

indicated. Fabricate sheet metal items of the materials specified below and to gage,

thickness, or weight shown in Table I at end of this Section. Provide accessories and

other items essential to complete the sheet metal installation. For fasteners, use same

metal or metal compatible with item fastened. Use stainless steel fasteners for dissimilar

materials.

2.1.1 Sheet flashing

Sheet flashing shall be one of the following types or as approved by the Engineer:

a. Flexible neoprene, 1/16” thick

b. Nervastral 300 by Rubber and Plastics Compound, Inc.

c. Vi-Seal – Type 30 by AFCO Products, Inc.

2.1.2 Roof Edge Strips

Form of minimum 0.032” thick aluminum with baked enamel finish, color shall be

bronze anodized or as approved by the Engineer to match fascia trim.


October 2016 07600-2

2.2 FABRICATION

Form components true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or

defects. Form in longest practical lengths. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch;

miter and seam corners. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4

inch and hemmed to form drip.

2.3 FINISH

Mill finish unless otherwise shown. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with heavy-

bodied bituminous paint.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves and vents through roof are solidly set;

nailing strips, cant strips and reglets are in place.

B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place and sealed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Requirements

Conform to SMACNA ASMM, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide sheet metal

flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or

other vertical surfaces and wherever indicated and necessary to make the work

watertight. Join items together as shown in Table II. Make sheet metal exposed to

weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.

3.2.2 Nailing

Confine nailing generally to sheet metal having maximum width of 18 inches. Confine

nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space nails 3 inches on center, approximately 1/2

inch from edge unless otherwise specified or indicated. Do not face nail.

3.2.3 Cleats

Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inches and over in width, spaced 12 inches on center

unless otherwise specified or indicated. Secure one end of cleat with two nails and fold

cleat back over nailheads. Lock other end into seam.

3.2.4 Expansion and Contraction

Provide joints spaced evenly 40 feet apart.


October 2016 07600-3

TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES

Sheet Metal Items Copper,

Ounces Per

Square Ft.

Aluminum,

Inch

Stainless

Steel, Inch

Terne-

coated

Stainless

Steel, Inch

Zinc-coated

Steel, U.S.

Std. Gage

Flashings:

Base 20 .040 .018 .018 24

Cap (Counter-flashing) 16 .032 .015 .015 26

Eave 16 - .015 .015 24

Spandrel beam 10 - .010 .010 -

Bond barrier 16 - .015 .015 -

Stepped 16 .032 .015 .015 -

Valley 16 .032 .015 .015 -

Coping 16 - - - -

Gravel stops and fascias:

Extrusions - .075 - - -

Sheets, corrugated 16 .032 .015 .015 -

Sheets, smooth 20 .050 .018 .018 24

Edge strip 24 .050 .025 - -


October 2016 07600-4

TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTS

Item Designation Cooper, Terne-coated

Stainless Steel, Zinc-

coated Steel and

Stainless Steel

Aluminum Remarks

Joint cap for roof

expansion joint

1.25 inch single lock,

standing seam, cleated

1.25 inch single lock,

standing seam, cleated

- - -

Flashings

Base

One inch

flat locked, soldered;

3 inch lap for

expansion joint.

One inch flat locked,

sealed; 3 inch lap for

expansion joint.

Fill with aluminum

mfrs recommended

hard setting sealant

for locked aluminum

joints.

Cap-in Reglet

3 inch lap

3 inch lap

Seal groove with joint

sealing compound.

Reglets

Butt joint

- - -

Seal reglet groove

with joint sealing

compound.

Stepped

3 inch lap 3 inch lap - - -

Valley

6 inch lap cleated

6 inch lap cleated

- - -

Edge Strip

Butt

Butt

- - -

Gravel Stops:

Extrusions

- - -

Butt with 1/2 inch

space

Use sheet flashing

beneath and a cover

plate.

Sheet, smooth

Butt with 1/4 inch

space

Butt with 1/4 inch

space

Use sheet flashing

backup plate.

Sheet corrugated

Butt with 1/4 inch

space

Butt with 1/4 inch

space

Use sheet flashing

beneath and a cover

plate or a combination

unit.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 07920-1

SECTION 07920 -JOINT SEALANTS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM C 834 (2010) Latex Sealants

ASTM C 920 (2010) Elastomeric Joint Sealants


Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 100 degrees F.


Deliver to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with material designations and

shelf life clearly marked thereon. Store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or

exposure to temperatures exceeding 100 degrees F or less than 40 degrees F.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

2.1.1 Interior Sealant

ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. Location(s) and color(s):

LOCATION COLOR

A. Perimeter of frames which adjoin concrete Match Frame Color

or masonry.

B. Joints of interior masonry walls adjoining Match Masonry Mortar

columns, pilasters or concrete walls.

C. Not otherwise indicated, where small voids Match Adjacent

exist between materials to be painted.


October 2016 07920-2

2.1.2 Exterior Sealant

For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25,

Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade P,

Class 25, Use T. Location(s) and color(s):

LOCATION COLOR

A. Joints and recesses formed where frames Match Frame Color

of windows, doors, louvers, and vents

adjoin masonry, concrete or metal frames.

B. Joints between new and existing exterior Match Masonry Mortar

masonry walls.

C. Voids where items pass through exterior Match Masonry Mortar

walls.

D. Seats of exterior door thresholds. Clear

E. Control and expansion joints in floors Lt. Grey or Match Floor

and walks.

2.2 PRIMERS

As recommended by sealant manufacturer for the application.

2.3 BOND BREAKERS AND BACKSTOPS

As recommended by sealant manufacturer for the application.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from loose material, dirt, oil or foreign matter that

would impair adhesion. For existing joints, remove old caulk or sealant.

3.1.1 Steel Surfaces

Remove loose mill scale by scraping and wire brushing.


October 2016 07920-3

3.1.2 Aluminum Surfaces

Remove protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact with sealant. When

masking tape is used as protective coating, remove tape and residual adhesive just before

sealant application. Use non-staining solvents recommended by manufacturer of

aluminum item.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios (Elastomeric Sealant)

A. Acceptable Ratios:

JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH

Minimum Maximum

For metal, glass, or other

nonporous surfaces:

1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch

over 1/4 inch 1/2 of Equal to

width width

For wood, concrete, masonry,

or stone:

1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch

Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to

width

Over 1/2 inch to 2 inches 1/2 inch 5/8 inch

Over 2 inches (As recommended by

sealant manufacturer)

3.2.2 Backstops

Pack back or bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide joint of

acceptable depth.

3.2.3 Primer

Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer in accord with sealant

manufacturer's instructions.


October 2016 07920-4

3.2.4 Bond Breaker

Install bond breakers to back or bottom of joint cavities, as recommended by sealant

manufacturer for sealant used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Avoid

contamination of adjoining surfaces.

3.2.5 Sealants

Provide sealant compatible with material to which it is applied. Do not use sealant that

has exceeded shelf life or has gelled and cannot be discharged in continuous flow from

gun. Follow manufacturer's directions, forcing sealant into joints to fill solidly without

air pockets. Tool after application to ensure adhesion. Sealant shall be uniformly smooth

and free of wrinkles.

3.3 PROTECTION

Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be used for this

purpose if removed within 10 minutes after joint is filled.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 08255-1

SECTION 08255 –DOORS AND FRAMES

1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




A. AAMA 1503-98 - Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of

Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.

B. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance

for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings.

C. ASTM B 117 - Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

D. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

E. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

F. ASTM D 256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched

Specimens of Plastics.

G. ASTM D 543 - Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.

H. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.

I. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics.

J. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and

Electrical Insulating Materials.

K. ASTM D 1308 - Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic

Finishes.

L. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

M. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular

Plastics.

N. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid

Aging.


October 2016 08255-2

O. ASTM D 2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol

Impressor.

P. ASTM D 5420 – Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimens by Means of

a Falling Weight.

Q. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.

R. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

S. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of

Building Partitions.

T. ASTM E 283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the

Specimen.

U. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

V. ASTM E 331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and

Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

W. ASTM F 476 - Security of Swinging Door Assemblies.

X. ASTM F 1642-04 – Standard Test Method for Glazing Systems Subject to Air

blast Loading.

Y. NWWDA T.M. 7-90 – Cycle Slam Test Method

Z. SFBC PA 201 - Impact Test Procedures.

AA. SFBC PA 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure

Loading.

AB. SFBC 3603.2 (b)(5) - Forced Entry Resistance Test.ASTM


October 2016 08255-3

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Doors

Frames

Accessories

Weatherstripping

Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware provisions, method of

glazing, and installation details.

Submit door and frame locations.

SD-03 Product Data

Doors

Frames

Accessories

Weatherstripping

Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames, and accessories.

Include data and details on door construction, panel (internal) reinforcement,

insulation, and door edge construction.

SD-04 Samples

Factory-applied finish. Where colors are not indicated, submit manufacturer's

standard colors and patterns for selection.


Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective wrappings or

packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Store doors and frames on platforms

under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace

between doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces

dry. Replace damaged materials with new.


October 2016 08255-4

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES

CP3 FRP Door and Frame FRP Division Chase Industries (See www.chem-pruf.com), or

approved equal.

Door Dimensions:

4’ – 0” x 7’ – 0”

2.1.1 FRP Doors

Doors shall be made of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) using Class 1 premium resin

with no fillers that is specifically tailored to resist chemicals and contaminants typically

found in environment for which these specifications are written.

Doors shall be of flush construction, having no seams or cracks. Doors and frames shall

maintain the same physical properties throughout the structure,

2.1.2 Anchors

Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide steel anchors,

zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter than 18 gage.

2.1.2.1 Wall Anchors

Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more than 7.5 feet in

height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for each additional 2.5 feet or

fraction thereof.

A. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 3/16 inch

diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;

B. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete or masonry with

expansion bolts in accordance with SDI 111F.

2.1.2.2 Floor Anchors

Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each jamb member.

2.2 WEATHERSTRIPPING

As specified in Section 08710, "Door Hardware."

http://www.chem-pruf.com/


October 2016 08255-5

2.3 HARDWARE PREPARATION

All related hardware as specified must be furnished and installed by the door frame

manufacturer to maintain product quality, function and warranty as well as to ensure

sufficient support/reinforcement.

2.4 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP

Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from

defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members

shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in

true alignment. Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame

sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed

and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. On wraparound frames for

masonry partitions, provide a throat opening 1/8 inch larger than the actual masonry

thickness. Design frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space

between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive calking compound.

2.4.1 Grouted Frames

For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar or grout, fill the

stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout out of the stops and to facilitate

installation of stop-applied head and jamb seals.

2.4.2 Finish

Doors and frames shall have a Resin-rich gelcoat of the specified color integrally molded

in at time of manufacture resulting in a smooth gloss surface that is dense and non-

porous. To achieve optimum surface characteristics, the gelcoat shall be cured within a

temperature range of 120F to 170F creating an impermeable outer surface, uniform

bronze color throughout, and a permanent homogeneous bond with the resin/fiberglass

substrate beneath.

2.5 WARRANTY

All fiberglass doors and frames shall have a lifetime guarantee against failure due to

corrosion. Additionally, fiberglass doors and fiberglass frames shall be guaranteed for a

minimum of ten years against failure due to materials and workmanship, including warp,

Separation or delamination, and expansion of the core


October 2016 08255-6

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Frames

Set frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Plumb, align, and brace

securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts

or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction.

Backfill frames with mortar. When an additive is provided in the mortar, coat inside of

frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. For frames in exterior walls,

ensure that stops are filled with rigid insulation before grout is placed.

3.1.2 Doors

A. Doors shall be delivered at job site individually crated. Each crate to be clearly

marked with the specific opening information for quick and easy identification.

B. All single doors to be shipped completely assembled in the frame with hardware

installed. Double doors to be prehung at the factory to ensure a proper fit and that

hardware functions properly, then disassembled for shipping purposes.

C. Install door opening assemblies in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer’s

printed installation instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in

installation instructions.

D. Field alteration of doors or frames to accommodate field conditions is strictly

prohibited.

E. Site tolerances: Maintain plumb and level tolerance specified in manufacturer’s

printed installation instructions

F. After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.

3.2 PROTECTION

Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to

completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed.

3.3 CLEANING

Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly. Remove

mastic smears and other unsightly marks.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 08255-7



October 2016 08710-1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM E 283 (2004) Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure

Differences Across the Specimen

ASTM F 883 (2009) Padlocks

BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC. (BHMA)

ANSI/BHMA A156.1 (2006) Butts and Hinges (BHMA 101)

ANSI/BHMA A156.2 (2003) Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches

(BHMA 601)

ANSI/BHMA A156.3 (2008) Exit Devices (BHMA 701)

ANSI/BHMA A156.4 (2008) Door Controls - Closers (BHMA 301)

ANSI/BHMA A156.5 (2001) Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products (BHMA

501)

ANSI/BHMA A156.6 (2005) Architectural Door Trim (BHMA 1001)

ANSI/BHMA A156.7 (2009) Template Hinge Dimensions

ANSI/BHMA A156.8 (2003) Door Controls - Overhead Holders (BHMA 311)

ANSI/BHMA A156.12 (2005) Interconnected Locks & Latches (BHMA 611)

ANSI/BHMA A156.13 (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches (BHMA 621)

ANSI/BHMA A156.15 (2006) Closer Holder Release Devices

ANSI/BHMA A156.16 (2008) Auxiliary Hardware

ANSI/BHMA A156.17 (2004) Self Closing Hinges & Pivots


October 2016 08710-2

ANSI/BHMA A156.18 (2006) Materials and Finishes (BHMA 1301)

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

UL BMD (2010) Building Materials Directory

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Hardware items


Installation


Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1S

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01781, "Operation and

Maintenance Data."


1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications

Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, and closers of one lock, hinge, or closer

manufacturer's make. Modify hardware as necessary to provide features indicated or

specified.


Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary

appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Deliver keys to the Owner directly.


October 2016 08710-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPLATE HARDWARE

Hardware to be applied to prefinished doors shall be made to template. Promptly furnish

template information or templates to door and frame manufacturers. Template hinges

shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7. Coordinate hardware items to prevent

interference with other hardware.

2.2 HARDWARE SETS

Provide hardware sets for each door in the following quantity, item, manufacturer and

product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.

3 Full Mortise Hinges Stanley # FBB191, 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 inch, US 32D

1 Lockset/Latch: Best 40H-Series with 14J lever design, US 32D,

N-Passage type (Cannot be locked).

1 Hasp Stainless Steel, US 32D

1 Overhead Holder-Stop Glynn-Johnson, 81 series, US 32D

1 Kick plate as specified, US 32D

1 Threshold NGP # 425 Saddle Type 1/2 x 5 inch

3 Silencers Glenn-Johnson #GJ64 (Grey)

1 Set Jamb and Head Seals Reese 797, Self Adhesive

36" Door Sweep Reese 967 DUR

2.3 HARDWARE ITEMS

Hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts, and closers shall be clearly and

permanently marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark where it will be visible

after the item is installed. For closers with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath

the cover.

2.3.1 Hinges

Five knuckle, full mortise, ANSI/BHMA A156.1, 4 1/2 by 4 1/2 inches unless otherwise

specified. Provide three hinges per door leaf to 90 inches high and one additional hinge

for each 30 inches of additional height. Full mortise hinges shall be stainless steel at

doors opening to exterior and interior, finish shall match lockset. Provide wide throw,

full mortise hinges for doors requiring 180 degree swing. Construct loose pin hinges for

exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so that pins will be nonremovable,

nonrising when door is closed. Other antifriction bearing hinges may be provided in lieu

of ball-bearing hinges. Tips shall be Flat button with matching plug, finished to match

leaves, except where hospital tips are indicated.


October 2016 08710-4

2.3.2 Thresholds

ANSI A 156.21, aluminum. One-piece units with bolt cutouts, not more than 1/2 inch

high.

2.3.3 Locks and Latches

ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Grade 1.

2.3.3.1 Mortise Locks and Latches

ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Provide heavy-duty, field reversible, all working parts forged or

machined, mortise locks. Cut escutcheons to suit cylinders and provide trim items with

straight, beveled, or smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges. Knobs and roses of

mortise locks shall have screwless shanks and no exposed screws. Provide 3/4 inch

minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Lock shall have a 2 3/4 inch backset.

2.3.4 Lock Trim

Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design with curved lip

extended to protect frame. Finish to match hardware set.

2.3.4.1 Lever Handles

Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs. Lever handles for exit devices shall meet the test

requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.13 for mortise locks. Lever handle locks shall have

a breakaway feature (such as a weakened spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable

damage to the lock when a force in excess of that specified in ANSI/BHMA A156.13 is

applied to the lever handle. Lever handles shall return to within 1/2 inch of the door face.

2.3.5 Closers

ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Provide with brackets, arms, mounting devices,

fasteners, and other features necessary for the particular application. Size closers in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide manufacturer's 10 year

warranty. Provide with integral back checks and cold weather fluid.

2.3.6 Overhead Holders

ANSI/BHMA A156.8. Adjustable, surface mounted, including hold-open feature for

exterior and interior installations.

2.3.7 Closer Holder-Release Devices

ANSI/BHMA A156.15.


October 2016 08710-5

2.3.8 Door Protection Plates

ANSI/BHMA A156.6. Stainless steel, 0.050 inch thickness. Apply to push side of doors

equipped with closers. Width for single doors shall be 2 inches less than door width;

width for pairs of doors shall be one inch less than door width. Height of kick plates

shall be 12 inches.

2.3.9 Door Stops and Silencers

ANSI/BHMA A156.16. Provide three silencers for each single door, two for each pair.

2.3.10 Weather Stripping

A set shall include head and jamb seals, drop seals and sweep strips. Sweeps shall be

extruded aluminum retainer with a flexible sweep of flexible vinyl or neoprene wiper or a

sweep seal strip. Aluminum shall be anodized.

2.3.11 Special Tools

Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to

service and adjust hardware items.

2.4 FASTENERS

Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with hardware.

Fasteners exposed to weather shall be of nonferrous metal or stainless steel. Provide

fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a permanent installation.

2.5 FINISHES

US32D for stainless steel. Aluminum finishes shall be clear anodized.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions. Provide machine

screws set in expansion shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry

surfaces. Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core construction.

Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory installation.

3.1.1 Weather Stripping Installation

Handle and install weather stripping so as to prevent damage. Provide full contact,

weather-tight seals. Doors shall operate without binding.


October 2016 08710-6

3.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

ANSI/SDI 100 or door manufacturer's recommended locations and as follows, unless

indicated or specified otherwise:

A. Door Knobs/Levers: 3 feet – 2 inches above finished floor to center of knob/lever

unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

B. Kick and Armor Plates: Push side of single-acting doors. Both sides of double-

acting doors.

C. Locking Hasp: 4 feet – 0 inches above finished floor to center of hasp on exterior of

door unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.


After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and other damage until

acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days before scheduled, so that testing

can be witnessed by the Engineer and the locality. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts,

holders, closers, and other items to operate properly. Correct, repair, and finish, as

directed, errors in cutting and fitting and damage to adjoining work.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 09900-1

SECTION 09900 -PAINTS AND COATINGS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH TLV-BKLT (2010) Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical

Substances and Physical Agents and Biological

Exposure Indices (BEIs)

ACGIH TLV-DOC Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and

Biological Exposure Indices


ASTM D 6386 (2010) Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces

for Painting

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)

CID A-A-378 Putty, Linseed Oil Type (For Wood Sash Glazing)

CID A-A-1558 (Rev. A) Paint, Stencil

CID A-A-2904 Thinner, Paint, Mineral Spirits, Regular and Odorless

CID A-A-50557 Primer, Water-Borne, Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, For

Metal Surfaces

FEDERAL STANDARDS (FED-STD)

FED-STD-313 (Rev. C) Material Safety Data, Transportation Data and

Disposal Data for Hazardous Materials Furnished to

Government Activities


October 2016 09900-2

STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC)

SSPC PA 1 (2008) Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting

SSPC PA 3 (2008) Safety in Paint Application

SSPC SP 1 (2008) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 3 (2008) Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 (2008) Commercial Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 7 (2008) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 10 (2008) Near-White Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Coating

Sealant

For each type of coating, sealant, or other product furnished, submit data from the

manufacturer's paint laboratory indicating that the product conforms to requirements

of the referenced specification.

SD-04 Samples

Color

Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference color samples to

color scheme as indicated.


Application instructions

Manufacturer's material safety data sheets

Submit Manufacturer's material safety data sheets for coatings, solvents, and other

potentially hazardous materials, as defined in FED-STD-313.


October 2016 09900-3

SD-07 Certificates

Wet Well Coating

Provide written certification from a certified manufacturer's representative that the

surfaces of the wet well were prepared in the proper manner for installation of the

coating product and the product was prepared and installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. This certification shall be performed on-site at

the Contractor's expense. Manufacturer's certification shall consist of evaluating the

surface preparation, the coating product during the preparation stage and upon

completion of its application in accordance with manufacturer's testing standards.


Wet Well Coatings Warranty

The Contractor shall warrant the wet well coatings to be free of defects in

workmanship and/or materials for a period of five (5) years from the date of final

acceptance. Final acceptance will be based on field inspection by the Locality and

the Engineer. The Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written

notice thereof, repair defects in materials and/or workmanship which may develop

during the aforementioned time period, and any damage to other work caused by

such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense and without cost to the

Owner.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 Lead Content

Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of nonvolatile

content.

1.3.2 Chromate Content

Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.

1.3.3 Asbestos Content

Materials shall not contain asbestos.

1.3.4 Mercury Content

Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.


October 2016 09900-4

1.3.5 Silica Sand

The use of silica sand is prohibited.

1.3.6 Human Carcinogens

Materials shall not contain ACGIH TLV-BKLT and ACGIH TLV-DOC confirmed

human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).

1.4 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the designation name, formula or

specification number, batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's

formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special

precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented paints shall be furnished

in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance

with the manufacturer's written directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground,

under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and

at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F. Protect from freezing or damage.

1.5 SAFETY METHODS

Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the

following:

1.5.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA 3.

1.5.2 Toxic Materials

To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the most stringent

guidance of:

A. The chemical manufacturer when using mineral spirits, or other chemicals. Use

impermeable gloves, chemical goggles or face shield, and other recommended

protective clothing and equipment to avoid exposure of skin, eyes, and respiratory

system. Conduct work in a manner to minimize exposure of building occupants and

the general public.

B. 29 CFR 1910.1000.

C. ACGIH TLV-BKLT, threshold limit values.

D. Manufacturer's material safety data sheets (MSDS).


October 2016 09900-5


The contractor shall be responsible for taking wet bulb, dry bulb, surface temperature,

humidity and dew point readings to ensure that conditions are within the manufacturer's

specifications prior to any painting. A daily weather conditions log shall be maintained

during all paint applications of the above parameters and shall be submitted to the

Engineer for review upon request.

1.6.1 Exterior Coatings

Not applicable.

1.6.2 Interior Coatings

Apply coatings when surfaces to be painted are dry and the following surface

temperatures can be maintained:

A. Between 50 and 95 degrees F during application of enamels and varnishes;

B. Between 50 and 95 degrees F during application of other coatings.

1.7 COLOR SELECTION

Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not indicated or specified,

colors shall be selected by the Owner. Manufacturers' names and color identification are

used for the purpose of color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use

only if they conform to specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers are

acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to

specified requirements.

1.8 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

1.8.1 Painting Included

Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following unless

indicated otherwise.

A. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by

removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.

B. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory

finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.

C. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.


October 2016 09900-6

D. All exterior wood, ferrous and galvanized metal surfaces, and all interior surfaces

unless indicated not to be painted. Surfaces included to be painted, but not

necessarily limited to, are:

1. Interior concrete wall and ceiling surfaces.

2. Interior CMU wall surfaces.

3. Plywood and gypsum board ceilings.

4. Equipment supports.

5. Steel beams and framing.

6. Metal fabrications, bollards, hoist beams, and lintels.

7. Plain, insulated, or wrapped interior building piping, valves, fittings and

appurtenances.

8. Plain, insulated or wrapped exterior building piping, valves, fittings,

hydrants, appurtenances above ground and inside tankage (including within

the wet well).

9. Plain, insulated or wrapped interior ductwork and appurtenances only when

located in areas indicated to be painted.

10. Plain, insulated or wrapped exterior ductwork and appurtenances where

indicated to be painted.

11. Interior pipe, conduit and appurtenances when located in areas indicated to

be painted.

12. Exterior pipe, conduit and appurtenances above ground.

13. Ferrous and galvanized metal conduits.

14. Exposed woodwork.

15. Machinery and equipment, including factory finished, electrical panels,

switchboards, switch gear, safety switches, motor starter equipment,

busways, raceways, high-voltage conduits, and any ferrous metal enclosure

not provided with an approved, weather and corrosion resistant finish

(excluding electrical bus conductors) or surfaces which have rusted.


October 2016 09900-7

1.8.2 Painting Excluded

Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.

A. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed ductwork,

machinery, and equipment fixed in place.

B. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces

above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl spaces, and chases.

C. Steel to be embedded in concrete.

D. Copper, stainless steel, brass, and lead except existing coated surfaces.

E. Exposed to view aluminum surfaces including immersed surfaces except those

specified previously.

F. Fiberglass surfaces, unless indicated otherwise.

G. Interior of pipe, ductwork and conduits.

H. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units.

I. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates.

J. Factory furnished motor control centers, control panels, engines, engine generators,

outdoor electrical panels, and electrical switchgear.

K. Exterior surfaces of all louvers and fans.

1.8.3 Interior Painting

Includes new surfaces, existing uncoated surfaces, and existing coated surfaces of the

building and appurtenances as indicated and existing coated surfaces made bare by

cleaning operations. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the

following items, unless indicated otherwise.

A. Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and

B. Other contiguous surfaces.

1.8.4 Mechanical and Electrical Painting

Includes field coating of interior and exterior new and existing surfaces. Where a space

or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items unless indicated

otherwise.


October 2016 09900-8

A. Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;

B. Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;

C. Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced or as specified herein.

2.2 EXTERIOR BELOW-GRADE WALLS

Exterior below-grade walls shall be coated with Cooper Black No 733 rubberized

protective coating as manufactured by Cooper’s Creek Chemical Corporation or

approved equal. Coating shall be inspected by Engineer and Locality personnel prior to

placing backfill.

2.3 INTERIOR WET WELL

Surface preparation, number of coats, and DFT shall be per manufacturer’s

recommendation. Coverage shall be for wet well fillet concrete surfaces. Finish color

shall be battleship gray or as approved by the Engineer. Coating shall be an epoxy/grout

coating system, or as approved by the Engineer.

2.3.1 Epoxy/Grout Coating System

A. Sauereisen "SewerGard 210S"

B. Raven Lining Systems "Raven 404"

C. Liquid Plastics Inc. "Cemprotec E-942" (minimum 80 mils)

D. Tnemec Series "Series 434 Chembloc" (minimum 125 mils)

2.4 IDENTIFICATION PLAQUE

Station identification plaque shall be mounted on station interior wall. Plaque shall be

black with minimum ¼” white engraved letters. Plaque shall include the following:

A. Station Name

B. Station Serial Number (from pump manufacturer)

C. Voltage

D. Horsepower

E. Design Flow (in gpm)

F. Design Total Dynamic Head (in feet)


October 2016 09900-9

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES

Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect,

hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting

fixtures, public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in

contact with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in

the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by

coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings, and other

substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate.

3.2.1 Existing Coated Surfaces with No Defects

Before application of coatings, perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly-

adhered coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife:

A. Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings, except stucco

and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean, dry cloth saturated with mineral

spirits, CID A-A-2904. Allow surface to dry. Wiping shall immediately precede

the application of the first coat of any coating, unless specified otherwise.

B. Sand existing enamel and other glossy surfaces to remove gloss. Brush and wipe

clean with a dry cloth.

C. The requirements specified are minimum. Comply also with the application

instructions of the paint manufacturer.

3.2.2 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects

Sand, spackle, and treat minor defects to render them smooth. Minor defects are defined

as scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges, spalls, alligatoring, chalking, and irregularities due to

partial peeling of previous coatings.

3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

3.3.1 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces

Shop-coated Surfaces and Areas That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign

Substances: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease.

Where shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to SSPC SP 3, SSPC SP 6, or

SSPC SP 10 as applicable for the surface use.


October 2016 09900-10

3.3.2 Galvanized Surfaces

A. New or Existing Galvanized Surfaces with Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products:

Clean with solvent, steam, or non-alkaline detergent solution in accordance with

SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been passivated or stabilized, the coating

shall be completely removed by brush-off abrasive blast or other treatment, or the

surface shall be primed with a primer which is specifically recommended by the

paint manufacturer for use on passivated or stabilized galvanized steel. For new

galvanized steel to be coated, if absence of hexavalent stain inhibitors is not

documented, test as described in ASTM D 6386, and remove by one of the methods

described therein.

B. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No Rusting: Water

jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating from surfaces with less than 20

percent coating deterioration and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor

as recommended by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.

C. Galvanized With Severe Deteriorated Coating or Severe Rusting: Spot abrasive

blast rusted areas as described for steel in SSPC SP 6, and abrasive blast as

described for steel in SSPC SP 7, to remove existing coating.

3.3.3 Aluminum, Other Non-Galvanized, and Non-Ferrous Surfaces

Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with mild non-

alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble contaminates.

3.3.4 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces

Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, CID A-A-2904. Wipe dry with clean, dry

cloths.

3.3.5 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous Coating

Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution of 1/2 cup

trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5 percent sodium

hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.

3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE

3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry

A. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.

(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new and existing uncoated surfaces

with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household

detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly with fresh


October 2016 09900-11

water. Wash existing coated surfaces with a suitable detergent and rinse

thoroughly. For large areas, water blasting may be used.

(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new, existing coated, and existing uncoated surfaces

with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household

detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of

warm water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.

(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed by washing

with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of hydrochloric (muriatic)

acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the surface for more than five minutes

before rinsing with fresh water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of

surface, per workman, at one time.

B. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints and minor defects,

including but not limited to spalls, in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and prior to coating application.

C. Allowable Moisture Content: Verify moisture content is less than 8 percent. Allow

surfaces to cure a minimum of 7 days before painting.

3.5 PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES

3.5.1 New, Existing Uncoated, and Existing Coated Surfaces

New, Existing Uncoated, and Existing Coated Plywood and Wood Surfaces, Except

Floors, to Receive Natural Finish:

A. Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other deleterious substances

and in a condition approved by the Owner prior to receiving paint or other finish.

Do not use water to clean uncoated wood. Scrape to remove loose coatings.

Lightly sand to roughen the entire area of previously enamel-coated wood surfaces.

B. Removal of Fungus and Mold: Wash existing coated surfaces with a solution

composed of 3 ounces (2/3 cup) trisodium phosphate, 1 ounce (1/3 cup) household

detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm

water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

C. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:

(1) Knots and Resinous Wood: Prior to application of coating, cover knots and

stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut shellac varnish, plasticized with

5 ounces of castor oil per gallon. Scrape away existing coatings from knotty


October 2016 09900-12

areas, and sand before treating. Prime before applying any putty over

shellacked area.

(2) Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty, CID A-A-378.

Sand smooth after putty has dried.

(3) Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the surface, wipe and

apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow to dry before paint is applied.

D. Prime Coat for New Exterior Surfaces: Prime coat wood trim before wood becomes

dirty, warped, or weathered.

E. Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty cracks after the prime

coat has dried.

3.6 APPLICATION

3.6.1 Coating Application

Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are

applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein. Thoroughly work coating

materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Touch up damaged coatings before

applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and

during the application of coating material. Apply coating materials under adequate

illumination.

A. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating

manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat adhesion

problems. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat.

B. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry

more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by manufacturer, before applying

subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation

if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by

manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding

coat or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in

shades of successive coats. Apply zinc-rich primers under continuous agitation.

C. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves,

laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.

D. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and urethanes)

should be applied while the intermediate coat is still tacky, within a few days.

E. Floors: Concrete floor coatings shall be applied by qualified contractor and shall be

applied only by air spray.


October 2016 09900-13

F. Provide "Wet Paint" signs in areas being painted.

3.6.2 Equipment

Apply coatings with clean approved brushes, clean approved rollers, or clean approved

spray equipment, unless specified otherwise. Spray areas made inaccessible to brushing

by items such as ducts and other equipment.

3.6.2.1 Spray Equipment

Spraying operation shall conform to the following procedures

A. Spray equipment shall be available for inspection.

B. Operative moisture trap shall be between air supply source and application

equipment.

C. Air source shall provide continuous volume of 20 cfm air at each gun nozzle at 80

psi for applying coatings by conventional spray technique. When coatings are

applied by airless spray technique, input pressure to pump shall be such as to

produce uniform spray patterns.

D. Provide regulators and gauges in good working order on both air and material lines.

User operation pressure compatible for particular paint.

E. Spray nozzle shall be a minimum of 8 inches to a maximum of 18 inches from

substrate during application.

F. Keep dry overspray to a minimum.

3.6.3 Thinning of Paints

Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is

mandatory for the type of paint being used. Obtain written permission from the Engineer

to use thinners. The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to

use.

3.6.4 Coating Systems

A. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications

listed in Table 1. The materials specified herein are named for the purpose of

establishing type and quality. Products of other manufacturers may be approved

provided their equality is established by data submittals. Complete lists of paint

systems proposed for use in the work, together with the names of the manufacturers,


October 2016 09900-14

shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner prior to

commencing work.

B. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels,

undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat

unless specified otherwise in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers

to the minimum dry film thickness.

C. Unless primer coats are removed by sandblasting or as required in this specification,

primer coats specified in coating systems are in lieu of shop-applied primers.

D. Ensure prime coatings are compatible with finish coatings. If prime coating is not

compatible, apply a universal barrier coat of 2 mils thickness prior to finish coats or

remove primer coat and reprime.

E. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces, which have not been

specified, the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure.

F. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work, Including New

Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with the following:

(1) One coat of primer.

(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.

(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.

3.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL

A. Primer: Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is

cleaned. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the surface prior to application of primer.

Prime ferrous metals bedded in concrete to minimum of 1 inch below exposed

surfaces.

(1) Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use two coats of specified primer on

metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.

(2) Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to

protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.

(3) Pipes and Tubing: Semitransparent film applied to pipes and tubing at the

mill is not to be considered a shop coat. Remove shop coat and apply

specified ferrous metal primer prior to application of subsequent coats.


October 2016 09900-15

(4) Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces. On

surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime exposed nails

and other ferrous metal with latex primer, CID A-A-50557.

B. Apply coatings of Table 1 by location of use. "DFT" means dry film thickness in

mils.

3.8 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES

A. Apply coatings of Table 1 by location of use or as specified herein.

B. Backroll concrete and masonry surfaces with a roller if primer has been spray

applied, except for floor surfaces.

3.9 COATING SYSTEMS FOR WOOD AND PLYWOOD AND GYPSUM BOARD

A. Apply coatings of Table 1 by location of use.

B. Prior to erection, apply two coats of specified primer to treat and prime wood

surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection.

C. Back prime wood trim before installation.

3.10 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Coat exposed piping to

Owner approved color code scheme. In addition to color coding, provide stenciling on all

pipe, including surfaces in concealed spaces. Place stenciling in clearly visible locations.

Stencil approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping

and a minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on piping to

indicate direction of flow. Use black stencil paint, CID A-A-1558.

3.11 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate mobility of

moving components, including swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows

with operable sash, for inspection by the Engineer. Perform this demonstration after

appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing

for final payment.

B. Measure paint dry film thickness with mikrotest gauge calibrated against National

Bureau of Standards certified coating thickness calibration standards in presence of

the Engineer.

C. Measure wet paint with wet film thickness gauges.


October 2016 09900-16

D. Measure surface temperature of items to be blasted or painted with temperature

gauge

E. Monitor humidity with humidity gauge.

F. The Engineer will observe prepared surfaces before primer and successive coats are

applied.

3.12 RESTORATION

A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.

B. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding and debris. Leave areas broom clean.

C. All private and public property disturbed in the process of construction shall be

restored to the condition existing prior to construction. Proper notice shall be given

to the Owner and to homeowners of any expected inconvenience or hazardous

conditions. Special care must be taken to prevent damage to trees and shrubs.

D. The contractor will be responsible for any damages resulting from sandblasting or

painting activities, including overspray.


October 2016 09900-17

TABLE 1

Surface Preparation Generic Type Coats

Tnemec

Products Name

DFT

(mils) Color Interior Wood

and Plywood

Clean and

Dry

Undercoater

Alkyd/Oil

Alkyd/Oil

Prime

Intermed.

Finish

Tnemec

Undercoat 36-603

Hi-Build Tneme-

Gloss 2H

Hi-Build Tneme-

Gloss 2H

2.0-3.0

1.5-3.5

1.5-3.5

White

Off-

White

White

Interior Masonry Clean and Dry

Acrylic Filler

Acrylic Epoxy

Acrylic Epoxy

Masonry Filler

Intermed.

Finish

Envirofill 130

Hi-Build Tneme-Tufcoat 113/114

Hi-Build Tneme-Tufcoat 113/114

60-80 sf/gal.

4.0-6.0

4.0-6.0

White

Lt.Gray

White

Interior Building

Metal Piping

Valves, Fittings, Etc.

SSPC-SP-6 Epoxy Mastic

Acrylic

Urethane

Prime

Finish

Hi-Build

Epoxoline 66

Endura-shield

73/74

3.0-5.0

2.0-5.0

Red

Battle-

ship

Gray

Electrical Metal Conduit, Wall or

Ceiling Mounted

(Rigid conduit only. Flexible

conduit to remain

unpainted.)

SSPC-SP-3 Epoxy Mastic

Acrylic

Urethane

Prime

Finish

Hi-Build Epoxoline 66

Endura-shield

73/74

3.0-5.0

2.0-3.0

Red or Factory

Prime

Safety

Red

Concrete Floor Brush-Off Blast

Epoxy Polyamide

(non-skid)

Primer

Finish

Epoxoprime 201

Tneme-Glaze

10.0-12.0

6.0-8.0

White

Battle-

ship Gray

END OF SECTION


Pump Station 32

October 2016 10201-1

SECTION 10201 –METAL WALL LOUVERS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INCORPORATED (AA)

AA 45 (2003) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION, INC. (AMCA)

ANSI/AMCA 500 D (2007) Testing Dampers for Rating

ANSI/AMCA 500 L (2007) Testing Louvers for Rating

AMCA 511 (2007; Rev 8/2008) Certified Ratings Program – Product

Rating Manual for Air Control Devices


ASTM B 209 (2007) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 221 (2008) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Wall louvers

Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of louvers. Indicate

materials, sizes, thickness, fastenings, and profiles.

SD-04 Samples

Wall louvers

Colors of finishes shall closely approximate colors indicated. Where color is not

indicated, submit the manufacturer's standard colors to the Owner for selection.

Pump Station 32

October 2016 10201-2

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store materials off the

ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and protection against dampness.

Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. Replace defective or

damaged materials with new.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Aluminum Sheet

ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming.

2.1.2 Extruded Aluminum

ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or -T52.

2.2 METAL WALL LOUVERS

Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind load of not less

than 30 pounds per square foot. Wall louvers shall bear the AMCA certified ratings

program seal for air performance and water penetration in accordance with AMCA 500

L, AMCA 500 D, and AMCA 511. The rating shall show a water penetration of 0.20 or

less ounce per square foot of free area at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute. .

2.2.1 Extruded Aluminum Louvers

Fabricated of extruded 6063-T5 or -T52 aluminum with a wall thickness of not less than

0.081 inch.

2.2.2 Formed Metal Louvers

Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or aluminum sheet not

less than 0.08 inch thick.

2.2.3 Shutters

Provide anodized aluminum gravity shutter at each louver location. Gravity shutter shall

open in the direction of flow as indicated.

Pump Station 32

October 2016 10201-3

2.2.4 Screens and Frames

For aluminum louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 14 or 16 gage aluminum or 1/4

inch square mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screening. Mount screens in removable,

rewirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers between louver and shutter.

2.3 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES

Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers. Provide other

accessories as required for complete and proper installation.

2.4 FINISHES

2.4.1 Aluminum

Provide factory-applied anodic coating. Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and apply an

anodized finish conforming to AA 45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes,

integral color anodized, Architectural Class II.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Fixed Wall Louvers

Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners as appropriate

for the wall construction and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

3.2.1 Aluminum

Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer

and two coats of aluminum paint.

3.2.2 Cement-based Substrates

Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-

resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32

October 2016 10201-4



October 2016 10525-1

SECTION 10525 – HOIST BEAM, TROLLEY, AND HOIST

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): MH27.1, Underhung

Cranes and Monorail Systems.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. B30.10, Hooks.

b. B30.11, Monorails and Underhung Cranes.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): A275, Standard Practice for Magnetic

Particle Examination of Steel Forgings.

4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Monorail System: Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail

Systems, ANSI MH27.1 and ASME B30.11.

B. Hoist: ASME B30.11, Hoist Manufacturers’ Institute.

C. Trolley: ANSI MH27.1.

D. Wire Rope Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 4M.

E. Chain Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 1M.

F. Hook: ASME 30.10.

G. Stress and Safety Factors: ANSI MH27.1 and ASME B30.11. Properly select

materials of construction for stresses to which subjected.

H. Safety of Operation, Accessibility, Interchangeability, and Durability of Parts: ASME

B30.11 and OSHA requirements.

I. Provide system, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorages,

designed in accordance with this Section and the Plans.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly.


October 2016 10525-2

b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of

construction, and specifications on hoist, wheels, gears and bearing,

hoist assemblies, hook, and accessories.

c. Detail Shop Drawings of hoist beam, brackets, hangers, and their

attachments to building structural steel.

d. Factory finish system.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.

2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

3. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance that factory finish system is

identical to requirements specified herein.

4. Factory Functional Test Report.

5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period

of 1 year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts

replacement, and maintenance with current price information.

6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use

prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.

7. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01781,

Operation and Maintenance Data.

8. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

C. Test Report Submittals:

1. Required test reports include the following:

a. 125 percent rated load test.

b. No-load test.

c. Post erection inspection.

d. Operation tests.

e. Rated load speed test.

f. Load chain proof test.

g. Hook NDT report.

2. Certified test report from the non-destructive test of hooks and the 125%

rated load test.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Hoist and trolley manufacturer to coordinate equipment requirements with steel

structures, hoisting cable or chain, hook, track, and stops.

2.2 TRACK

A. Hoist beam furnished as detailed in the plans.


October 2016 10525-3

2.3 HOIST AND TROLLEY

A. Hoist and trolley shall be provided, designed and rated for load capacities

specified herein. Trolley and wheels shall be suitable for operation on the steel

beam provided.

1. Harrington Hoist and Cranes Navy Trolley Hoist Model NTH, or approved

equal.

B. The hoist shall meet the requirements specified as follows.

1. Capacity: 2 tons (4,000 pounds).

2. Hook Lift Range: Approximately 13 feet, measured from finished floor to

centerline of the hook.

2.4 LOAD HOOK AND COMPONENTS

A. Hook: Construct with sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure,

equipped with safety latch, free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load and positively

held in place with locknuts, collars or other devices.

B. Hook Non-Destructive Test:

1. Each hook, including shank and hook nut, shall be inspected over the entire

surface area by magnetic particle inspection. If hook nut is not used, any

device that functions the same as the hook nut shall be inspected by

magnetic particle inspection.

a. Procedure: Magnetic particle inspection shall be conducted in accordance

with ASTM A275. This inspection shall be conducted at the factory of

the hook manufacturer or hoist manufacturer. Alternately, a recognized

independent testing organization may conduct the inspection if equipped

and competent to perform such a service, and if approved by the

Engineer.

b. Acceptance Criteria: Defects found on the hook or hook nut shall result in

rejection of these items for use on furnished hoist. For this inspection, a

defect is defined as a linear or nonlinear indication for which the largest

dimension is greater than 1/8 inch. Weld repairs or defects on hook or

hook nut will not be permitted.

c. Test Report: A certified test report of the magnetic particle inspection of

each hook and hook nut finished shall be submitted to and approved by

the Engineer prior to final inspection of hoist installation.

2. An equivalent quality control procedure, in lieu of magnetic particle

testing, may be used with the permission of the Engineer.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-


October 2016 10525-4

stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location.

B. Provide labels showing rated capacity for each piece of applicable equipment.

C. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Prepare and prime coat in accordance with manufacturer’s standard.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Inspections: Inspect equipment for required construction and

intended function.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: No-load run test all equipment furnished.

C. Factory test report shall include Test Data Sheets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Provide lubrication and lubrication fittings.

3.2 FIELD FINISHING

A. Equipment as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coatings.


A. Provide Owner with a two week notice prior to functional and performance

testing.

B. Functional Tests: Conduct on each hoist and monorail system.

1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment and

connection, and quiet operation.

C. Performance Test:

1. Conduct on each hoist and monorail system.

2. Load tests in compliance with OSHA, ASME B30.11, and ANSI

MH27.1


October 2016 10525-5

3.4 NO CONSTRUCTION USE

A. The Contractor shall not use the trolley hoist or any of its components during

construction.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 11330-1

HORIZONTAL SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMP

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. The pump manufacturer must be ISO 9001:2000 revision certified, with scope of registration including design control and service after sales activities.

B. Pumps must be designed to handle raw, unscreened, domestic sanitary sewage. Pumps

shall have 6” suction connection, and 4” discharge connection. Each pump shall be selected to perform under following operating conditions:

1. Capacity (GPM) ____397_____ 2. Total Dynamic Head (FT) ____28______ 3. Total Dynamic Suction Lift (FT) ____25______ 4. Minimum Submergence Depth (FT) ____2_______

C. Pump Performance Certifications

1. Solids Handling Capability

a. All internal passages, impeller vanes, and recirculation ports shall pass a 3"

spherical solid. Smaller internal passages that create a maintenance nuisance or interfere with priming and pump performance shall not be permitted. Upon request from the engineer, manufacturer’s certified drawings showing size and location of the recirculation port(s) shall be submitted for approval.

D. Reprime Performance

1. Consideration shall be given to the sanitary sewage service anticipated, in which debris

is expected to lodge between the suction check valve and its seat, resulting in the loss of the pump suction leg, and siphoning of liquid from the pump casing to the approximate center line of the impeller. Such occurrence shall be considered normal, and the pump must be capable of automatic, unattended operation with an air release line installed.

2. During unattended operation, the pump shall retain adequate liquid in the casing to

insure automatic repriming while operating at its rated speed in a completely open system. The need for a suction check valve or external priming device shall not be required.

3. Pump must reprime 18.5 vertical ft. at the specified speed and impeller diameter.

Reprime lift is defined as the static height of the pump suction above the liquid, while operating with only one-half of the liquid remaining in the pump casing. The pump must reprime and deliver full capacity within five minutes after the pump is energized in the reprime condition. Reprime performance must be confirmed with the following test set-up:

a. A check valve to be installed down stream from the pump discharge flange. The

check valve size shall be equal (or greater than) the pump discharge diameter.

b. A length of air release pipe shall be installed between pump and the discharge check valve. This line shall be open to atmosphere at all times duplicating the air


October 2016 11330-2

displacement rate anticipated at a typical pump station fitted with an air release valve.

c. The pump suction check valve shall be removed. No restrictions in the pump or

suction piping will prevent the siphon drop of the suction leg. Suction pipe configuration for reprime test shall incorporate a 2 feet minimum horizontal run, a 90o elbow and vertical run at the specified lift. Pipe size shall be equal to the pump suction diameter.

d. Impeller clearances shall be set as recommended in the pump service manual.

e. Repeatability of performance shall be demonstrated by testing five consecutive

reprime cycles. Full pump capacity (flow) shall be achieved within five minutes during each cycle.

f. Liquid to be used for reprime test shall be water.

g. Upon request from the engineer, certified reprime performance test results, prepared

by the manufacturer, and certified by a registered professional engineer, shall be submitted for approval prior to shipment.

E. Manufacturer's Warranty

1. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pump equipment to be of quality

construction, free of defects in material and workmanship. A written warranty shall include specific details described below.

2. All equipment, apparatus, and parts furnished shall be warranted for five (5) years,

excepting only those items that are normally consumed in service, such as oils, grease, packing, gaskets, O-rings, etc. The pump manufacturer shall be solely responsible for warranty of the pump equipment and all components.

3. Components failing to perform as specified by the engineer, or as represented by the

manufacturer, or as proven defective in service during the warranty period, shall be replaced, repaired, or satisfactorily modified by the manufacturer without cost of parts or labor to the owner.

4. It is not intended that the pump manufacturer assume liability for consequential damages

or contingent liabilities arising from failure of any vendor supplied product or part which fails to properly operate, however caused. Consequential damages resulting from defects in design, or delays in delivery are also beyond the manufacturer's scope of liability.

5. The warranty shall become effective upon the acceptance by the purchaser or the

purchaser's authorized agent, or sixty (60) days after installation, or ninety (90) days after shipment, whichever occurs first.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following Shop Drawings for the pumps in accordance with Section 01330, entitled SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

1. Predicted performance curves showing total dynamic head (TDH) versus capacity;

NPSHR versus capacity; efficiency versus capacity and brake horsepower versus capacity for the minimum and maximum speeds as specified herein.


October 2016 11330-3

2. Materials lists, including material specification references.

3. Dimensioned outline/assembly drawing of the pump with weights indicated. Shop

drawings shall include a Bill of Material which shall be keyed by numbers to all components of the pump identifying them by name and part or catalog number. The drawings shall, in all respects, provide clear, detailed information which shall facilitate the ordering of spare or replacement parts.

B. Submit the following Shop Drawings for the pump motors in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Cross section of the motor with individual components identified and positions and

sizes of pipe taps indicated. This shop drawing shall be, minimum 11" x 17", and shall include all required exploded views. Drawing shall include a bill of material which shall be keyed by numbers to all components of the motor identifying them by name and part or catalog number. Drawing shall, in all respects, provide clear, detailed information which shall facilitate the ordering of spare or replacement parts. Large scale, minimum 22" x 34", drawings shall be provided as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual, as specified herein.

2. Motor nameplate data submitted in accordance with NEMA Standard MG-1 and

including the following:

a. manufacturer's name and machine serial number b. output c. time rating d. temperature rise e. rpm at full load f. voltage, frequency, number of phases g. full load current h. code letter i. service factor j. power factor

3. Predicted motor performance data to be submitted:

a. inrush kVA

b. locked rotor amperes

c. locked rotor, minimum and breakdown torques

d. temperature rise at 1.0 and 1.15 service factor

e. maximum no load vibrational level (peak to peak, in.)


October 2016 11330-4

f. guaranteed efficiency at: full, 3/4 and ½ load as described in latest revision of IEEE

Standard No. 112 and NEMA Standard MG-1.

g. power factor at ½ , 3/4 and full load

h. motor performance curves, computed over the entire range from zero to full load, shall be prepared and shall provide the following information

(1) speed vs. torque (2) efficiency vs. load (3) saturation

i. Sound pressure levels for the eight octave bands.

j. Limitations for starting motor.

4. Motor Construction Details

a. Motor outline drawing(s) showing all principal overall dimensions and construction notes.

b. Motor cross-section and assembly drawings showing the construction of the

following:

(1) Stator and frame with windings (2) Rotor. (3) Bearing assemblies including details of oil lubrication systems; bearing

temperature location; shaft current insulation at bearing assemblies. Bearing babbitt composition, alloy numbers and characteristics.

(4) Space heater wattage and connection details. (5) Embedded temperature detectors, quantity and connection details. (6) Access covers, if supplied, for bearings and space heaters.

C. Submit the pump factory performance test procedure and dimensioned test stand outline

drawing, prior to pump factory performance testing. Factory test procedure shall state all data to be recorded and all equations to be used in determining pump performance.3

D. Prior to pumping unit shipment to the site, submit six copies of certified drawings and certified factory pump and motor test reports including test data and certified performance curves which include Head, Pump Efficiency and Brake Horsepower versus Capacity curves. Provide the Head versus NPSHA curve showing determination of the NPSHR value as indicated in this section. For the motors, include all test data and certified curves of motor test performances. Provide results of all required factory noise testing. A registered Professional Engineer shall witness and certify the test results prior to shipment.

E. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the pump and motor in accordance with Section 01330.


October 2016 11330-5

PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. The specifications and project drawings depict equipment and materials manufactured by The Gorman-Rupp Company which are deemed most suitable for the service anticipated. It is not intended, however, to eliminate other products of equal quality and performance. The contractor shall prepare his bid based on the specified equipment for purposes of determining low bid. Award of a contract shall constitute an obligation to furnish the specified equipment and materials.

B. After execution of the contract, the contractor may offer substitutions to the specified

equipment for consideration. The equipment proposed for substitution must be superior in construction and performance to that specified in the contract, and the higher quality must be demonstrated by a list of current users of the proposed equipment in similar installations.

C. In event the contractor obtains engineer's approval for equipment substitution, the contractor

shall, at his own expense, make all resulting changes to the enclosures, buildings, piping or electrical systems as required to accommodate the proposed equipment. Revised detail drawings illustrating the substituted equipment shall be submitted to the engineer prior to acceptance.

D. It will be assumed that if the cost to the contractor is less for the proposed substitution, then

the contract price shall be reduced by an amount equal to the savings. 2.02 PUMP DESIGN

A. Pumps shall be horizontal, self-priming centrifugal type, designed specifically for handling raw, unscreened, domestic sanitary sewage. Pump solids handling capability and performance criteria shall be in accordance with requirements listed under PART 1 - GENERAL of this section.

B. The pump manufacturer must be ISO 9001:2000 revision certified, with scope of registration

including design control and service after sales activities.

C. Materials and Construction Features

1. Pump casing shall be cast iron Class 30 with integral volute scroll. Casing shall incorporate following features:

a. Mounting feet sized to prevent tipping or binding when pump is completely

disassembled for maintenance.

b. Fill port coverplate, 3 1/2" diameter, shall be opened after loosening a hand nut/clamp bar assembly. In consideration for safety, hand nut threads must provide slow release of pressure, and the clamp bar shall be retained by detente lugs. A Teflon gasket shall prevent adhesion of the fill port cover to the casing.

c. Casing drain plug shall be at least 1 1/4" NPT to insure complete and rapid draining.

d. Liquid volume and recirculation port design shall be consistent with performance

criteria listed under PART 1 - GENERAL of this section.

2. Coverplate shall be cast iron Class 30. Design must incorporate following maintenance features:


October 2016 11330-6

a. Retained by hand nuts for complete access to pump interior. Coverplate removal

must provide ample clearance for removal of stoppages, and allow service to the impeller, seal, wearplate or check valve without removing suction or discharge piping.

b. A replaceable wearplate secured to the coverplate by weld studs and nuts shall be

AISI 1015 HRS.

c. In consideration for safety, a pressure relief valve shall be supplied in the coverplate. Relief valve shall open at 75-200 PSI.

d. Two O-rings of Buna-N material shall seal coverplate to pump casing.

e. Pusher bolt capability to assist in removal of coverplate. Pusher bolt threaded holes

shall be sized to accept same retaining capscrews as used in rotating assembly.

f. Easy-grip handle shall be mounted to face of coverplate.

3. Rotating assembly, which includes impeller, shaft, mechanical shaft seal, lip seals, bearings, sealplate and bearing housing, must be removable as a single unit without disturbing the pump casing or piping. Design shall incorporate following features:

a. Sealplate and bearing housing shall be cast iron Class 30. Separate oil filled

cavities, vented to atmosphere, shall be provided for shaft seal and bearings. Cavities must be cooled by the liquid pumped. Three lip seals will prevent leakage of oil.

1) The bearing cavity shall have an oil level sight gauge and fill plug check valve.

The clear sight gauge shall provide easy monitoring of the bearing cavity oil level and condition of oil without removal of the fill plug check valve. The check valve shall vent the cavity but prevent introduction of moist air to the bearings.

2) The seal cavity shall have an oil level sight gauge and fill/vent plug. The clear

sight gauge shall provide easy monitoring of the seal cavity oil level and condition of oil without removal of the fill/vent plug.

3) Double lip seal shall provide an atmospheric path providing positive protection of

bearings, with capability for external drainage monitoring.

b. Impeller shall be austempered ductile iron, two-vane, semi-open, non-clog, with integral pump out vanes on the back shroud. Impeller shall thread onto the pump shaft and be secured with a lockscrew and conical washer. Contractor to furnish one spare austempered ductile iron impeller per pump.

c. Shaft shall be AISI 4140 alloy steel unless otherwise specified by the engineer, in

which case AISI 17-4 pH stainless steel shall be supplied.

d. Bearings shall be anti-friction ball type of proper size and design to withstand all radial and thrust loads expected during normal operation. Bearings shall be oil lubricated from a dedicated reservoir. Pump designs which use the same oil to lubricate the bearings and shaft seal shall not be acceptable.

e. Shaft seal shall be cartridge oil lubricated mechanical type. The stationary and

rotating seal faces shall be tungsten titanium carbide alloy. Each mating surface


October 2016 11330-7

shall be lapped to within three light bands flatness (35 millionths of an inch), as measured by an optical flat under monochromatic light. The stationary seal seat shall be double floating by virtue of a dual O-ring design; an external O-ring secures the stationary seat to the sealplate, and an internal O-ring holds the faces in alignment during periods of mechanical or hydraulic shock (loads which cause shaft deflection, vibration, and axial/radial movement). Elastomers shall be viton; cage and spring to be stainless steel. Seal shall be oil lubricated from a dedicated reservoir. The same oil shall not lubricate both shaft seal and shaft bearings. Seal shall be warranted in accordance with requirements listed under PART 1 - GENERAL of this section.

f. Pusher bolt capability to assist in removal of rotating assembly. Pusher bolt threaded

holes shall be sized to accept same capscrews as used for retaining rotating assembly.

4. Adjustment of the impeller face clearance (distance between impeller and wearplate)

shall be accomplished by external means.

a. Clearances shall be maintained by external shimless coverplate adjustment, utilizing collar and adjusting screw design for incremental adjustment of clearances by hand. Requirement of realignment of belts, couplings, etc., shall not be acceptable. Coverplate shall be capable of being removed without disturbing clearance settings. (Note: This paragraph does not apply to the 10” pump.)

b. There shall be provisions for additional clearance adjustment in the event that

adjustment tolerances have been depleted from the coverplate side of the pump. The removal of stainless steel shims from the rotating assembly side of the pump shall allow for further adjustment as described above

c. Clearance adjustment which requires movement of the shaft only, thereby adversely

affecting seal working length or impeller back clearance, shall not be acceptable.

5. Suction check valve shall be molded Neoprene with integral steel and nylon reinforcement. A blow-out center shall protect pump casing from hydraulic shock or excessive pressure. Removal or installation of the check valve must be accomplished through the coverplate opening, without disturbing the suction piping. Sole function of check valve shall be to save energy by eliminating need to reprime after each pumping cycle. Pumps requiring a suction check valve to assist reprime will not be acceptable.

6. Spool flanges shall be one-piece cast iron, class 30 fitted to suction and/or discharge

ports. Each spool shall have one 1-1/4" NPT and one 1/4" NPT tapped hole with pipe plugs for mounting gauges or other equipment.

D. Serviceability

1. The pump manufacturer shall demonstrate to the engineer's satisfaction that

consideration has been given to reducing maintenance costs.

2. No special tools shall be required for replacement of any components within the pump.

2.03 DRIVE UNIT

A. Motors (Note: Maximum motor frame size is 326T open drip-proof.).

1. Pump motors shall be 15 HP, horizontal ODP, 1,500 RPM, NEMA design B with cast iron frame with copper windings, induction type, with class F insulation and 1.15 Service


October 2016 11330-8

Factor for normal starting torque and low starting current characteristics, suitable for continuous service. The motors shall not overload at the design condition or at any head in the operating range as specified.

2. Motors shall be tested in accordance with provisions of ANSI/IEEE Std. 112, Method B. 3. Motor shall be inverter duty suitable for use with variable frequency drives. 4. Voltage: 230V, 3-phase, 60 Hz. 5. Power factor: 0.8 minimum.

B. Drive Transmission

1. Power to pumps transmitted V-belt drive assemblies. The sheave/belt combination shall provide the speed ratio needed to achieve the specified pump operating conditions.

2. Each drive assembly shall utilize at least two V-belts providing minimum a combined

safety factor of 1.5. Single belt drives or systems with a safety factor of less than 1.5 are not acceptable. Computation of safety factors shall be based on performance data published by the drive manufacturer.

3. Precise alignment tolerances of the drive assemblies shall be achieved by means of a

belt/sheave laser alignment system resulting in the reduction of vibration, accelerated wear, and premature failure.

4. The pump manufacturer shall submit power transmission calculations which document

the following:

a. Ratio of pump/motor speed. b. Pitch diameter of driver and driven sheaves. c. Number of belts required per drive. d. Theoretical horsepower transmitted per belt, based on vendor's data. e. Center distance between pump and motor shafts. f. Arc-length correction factor applied to theoretical horsepower transmitted. g. Service factor applied to established design horsepower. h. Safety factor ratio of power transmitted/brake horsepower required.

5. Pump drives to be enclosed on all sides by a guard constructed of fabricated steel or combination of materials including expanded, perforated, or solid sheet metal. No opening to a rotating member shall exceed 1/2 inch.

a. Guards must be completely removal without interference from any unit component,

and shall be securely fastened and braced to the unit base.

b. Metal to be free from burrs and sharp edges. Structural joints shall be continuously welded. Rivet spacing on panels shall not exceed five inches. Tack welds shall not exceed four inch spacing.

c. The guard shall be finished with one coat of gray W.R. non-lift primer and one coat

of orange acrylic alkyd W.R. enamel in accordance with section 3, Color Definitions of ANSI 253.1; Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


October 2016 11330-9

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall off-load equipment at installation site using equipment of sufficient size and design to prevent injury or damage. Immediately after off-loading, contractor shall inspect complete pump and appurtenances for shipping damage or missing parts. Any damage or discrepancy shall be noted in written claim with shipper prior to accepting delivery. Validate all pump serial numbers and parts lists with shipping documentation. Notify the manufacturer’s representative of any unacceptable conditions noted with shipper.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install, level, align, and lubricate pump(s) as indicated on project drawings. Installation must be in accordance with written instructions supplied by the manufacturer at time of delivery.

B. Suction pipe connections are vacuum tight. Fasteners at all pipe connections must be tight.

Install pipe with supports and thrust blocks to prevent strain and vibration on pump piping. Install and secure all service lines (level control, air release valve or pump drain lines) as required in wet well.

C. Check motor and control data plates for compatibility to site voltage. Install and test the

station ground prior to connecting line voltage to control panel.

D. Prior to applying electrical power to any motors or control equipment, check all wiring for tight connection. Verify that protective devices (fuses and circuit breakers) conform to project design documents. Manually operate circuit breakers and switches to ensure operation without binding. Open all circuit breakers and disconnects before connecting utility power. Verify line voltage, phase sequence and ground before actual start-up.

E. After all anchor bolts, piping and control connections are installed, completely fill the grout

dam in the pump station base with non-shrink grout. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operational Test

1. Prior to acceptance by owner, an operational test of all pumps, drives, and control systems shall be conducted to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the specifications. Tests shall demonstrate that all equipment is electrically, mechanically, structurally, and otherwise acceptable; it is safe and in optimum working condition; and conforms to the specified operating characteristics.

2. After construction debris and foreign material has been removed form the wet well,

contractor shall supply clear water volume adequate to operate station through several pumping cycles. Observe and record operation of pumps, suction and discharge gage readings, ampere draw, pump controls, and liquid level controls. Check calibration of all instrumentation equipment, test manual control devices, and automatic control systems. Be alert to any undue noise, vibration or other operational problems.


October 2016 15050-1

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM B 117 (2009) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to all sections of Division 15, "Mechanical" of this project

specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.


1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly

engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design, and

workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial

use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of

equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product

shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified

record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6,000 hours, exclusive of the

manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.3.3 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list

of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes

their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably

convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the

equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


October 2016 15050-2

1.3.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address,

model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate

of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.3.5 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be

mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it

appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction,”

or words of similar meaning, to mean the Owner.

1.3.5.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents,

advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted

as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Owner." For

leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor."

References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during

installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by

the Owner. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of

equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have

electrical connections provided in accordance with requirements of DIVISION 16

"Electrical." Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an

integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted.

Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall

have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment

furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and

related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment.

Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and

conform to the requirements of DIVISION 16 "Electrical."

1.6 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full

instruction to the Owner's designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and

maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or


October 2016 15050-3

system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall

be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or

system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The

number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the

individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use

approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction

with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under

the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating

personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.7 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and

repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls,

dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access

doors.

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as

specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification

that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test,

except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.

Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the

acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint

shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the

specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the

scratch mark.


October 2016 15050-4

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be

less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory

painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120

degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pre-treat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be

painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt,

rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint,

except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned

to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding

coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the

succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal

surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of

pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of

primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel

applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees

F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures

greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting

paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 15060-1

SECTION 15060 - INTERIOR PROCESS PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM A53/A53M (2007) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless

ASTM A126 (2004, rev. 2009) Standard Specification for Gray Iron

Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

ASTM A536 (1984, rev. 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron

Castings

ASTM D 1784 (2008) Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products

in Automotive Applications


(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)


(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

ASTM D 2564 (2004; rev. 2009) Standard Specification for Solvent

Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping

Systems

ASTM D 3139 (1998; rev. 2005) Standard Specification for Joints for

Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals


October 2016 15060-2

ASTM F 1866 (2007) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Schedule 40 Drainage and DWV Fabricated

Fittings

ASTM F 1970 (2005) Standard Specification for Special Engineered

Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for use in Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Systems


ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1 (2005) Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings

ASME B16.3/ANSI B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings


AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and

Fittings for Water

AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through

48 in. (75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other

Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 (2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe

and Fittings

AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15 (2006) Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or

Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or

Other Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 (2006) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 24 in.

(76 mm through 610 mm) and 54 in. through 64 in. (1,400

mm through 1,600 mm), for Water Service

AWWA C507 (2005) Ball Valves 6 in. through 48 in. (150 mm through

1200 mm)

AWWA C508 (2009) Swing-Check Valves For Waterworks Service, 2 In.

(50 mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm)


October 2016 15060-3

AWWA C509 (2009) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply

Service

AWWA C600 (2005) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Pipe and fittings

Valves

Pipe hangers, supports, guides, and anchors

Pipe wall sleeves and seals

SD-07 Certificates

Submit each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings, pipe wall

sleeves and seals, pipe coupling and adapters, valves, joints, joint gaskets and lubricants

meet or exceed specification requirements.


Installation


Valves, Data Package 2S

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01781, "Operation and Maintenance

Data."

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.3.1 Pipe

During loading, transporting, unloading, and storage on-site, exercise care to prevent damage

to piping materials. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Store materials on site in enclosures or

under protective coverings. Assure that materials are kept clean and dry. Do not store

materials directly on the ground.


October 2016 15060-4

1.3.2 Valves and appurtenances

Deliver valves and accessories to the job site in the manufacturer's boxes or crates. Mark

each valve as to size, type, and installation location. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of

foreign matter into valve body. Store valves and accessories in areas protected from weather,

moisture, and possible damage. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Handle valves

and accessories to prevent damage to interior and exterior surfaces.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

Investigate conditions affecting this work and coordinate with other contractors to prevent

interference between architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical features. The

Contract Drawings for small diameter pipe are generally diagrammatic and it is not possible to

indicate all fittings, valves, and other items required for a complete operating system. Provide

all such valves, fittings, and specialties to complete the systems as intended.

1.4.1 Loose Parts

Provide necessary valve wheels, keys, wrenches, levers and stem extensions. Locate to assure

accessibility and operability throughout the operating range without interference. Install valve

stem supports, guides and operators. For buried valves, provide valve boxes and stem

extensions to grade. Provide valve accessories of the same manufacturer as the valve, unless

specified otherwise.


Install piping to meet the requirements of state and local building codes. Materials

contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuels, aromatic compounds,

paint solvent, paint thinner or acid solder will be rejected. Products shall be new, the latest

standard product of reputable manufacturers, and shall have replacement parts available.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS

2.1.1 3-inch and Larger Pressure Piping

Flanged Ductile Iron, AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, Thickness Class 52. Cement mortar

lining, AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 double thickness. Ductile iron force main shall be flanged

inside the station and mechanical joint with retainer glands outside of the station. Mechanical

joint pipe and retainer glands are specified in Section 02610, “Underground Utility Pipe."


October 2016 15060-5

2.1.1.1 Fittings

Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron, AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.

Cement mortar lining, AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 double thickness.

2.1.1.2 Gaskets

Styrene Butadiene Rubber, 80 Durameter hardness, conforming to ASTM D2000, Class AA

or BA, smooth finish.

2.1.2 Metal Pressure Piping Smaller than 3-inches

ASTM A53/A53M, Seamless, hot-dip galvanized. Schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated on

the Contract Drawings. ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125# Class flanges as applicable.

2.1.2.1 Fittings

2.1.2.1.1 Threaded

Malleable Iron, ASME B16.3/ANSI B16.3, 150# Class

2.1.2.1.2 Flanged

Cast Iron, ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125# Class

2.1.2.1.3 Unions

Threaded Malleable Iron, FS WW-U-531, Class 1

2.1.3 Plastic Pressure Piping Smaller than 3-inches

ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC piping. Solvent welded joints per ASTM D 2564. Fittings

shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM F 1970.

2.1.4 Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping

ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC piping. Solvent welded joints per ASTM D 2564. Fittings

shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM F 1866.


October 2016 15060-6

2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES

2.2.1 Wall and Floor Sleeves and Pipes

Cast Iron per ASTM A126, Class B or Ductile Iron per ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18.

2.2.2 Wall and Floor Seals

2.2.2.1 Perpendicular Penetration Seals

Seals constructed of an assembly of synthetic rubber links connected with corrosion resistant

stainless steel bolts shall be used to seal the space between wall sleeve and carrier pipe for

pipes entering perpendicular to the concrete surface. When the bolts are tightened, Delrin

plastic pressure plates compress the rubber links to fill the annular space between the pipe and

the wall sleeve to form a watertight seal. Seals shall be manufactured by Link Seal or

approved equal.

2.2.2.2 Non-Perpendicular and Below Grade Penetration Seals

Rubber boot connectors with stainless steel bands meeting ASTM C 923, ASTM C 1478, and

ASTM F 2510, as applicable for the application, by Kor-N-Seal, PSX, or approved equal shall

be used for conduits and pipes passing through non-perpendicular penetrations or where

entering structures below grade. Place non-shrink grout in annular space (inside and outside,

as applicable) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

2.2.3 Flange Adapters

For joining plain-end pipe to flanged valves, fittings, and pumps. Flanged per ASME

B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125# Class.

2.2.4 Transition Couplings

To connect pipes of different outside diameters. High-grade cast-iron sleeves with ductile-

iron follower flanges. Flanged per ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125# Class or Mechanical

Joint per AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.

2.2.5 Pipe Hangers

Figure 260 as manufactured by Grinnell Corp. or equal.

2.2.6 Pipe Supports

Figure 199 as manufactured by Grinnell Corp. or equal.


October 2016 15060-7

2.3 GATE VALVES

AWWA C509, resilient seated, non-rising stem, 200 psi working pressure, open left

(counterclockwise), flanged per ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125# Class, unless otherwise

noted. One valve wrench shall be provided for every three valves installed in the project.

Provide extension stems (nut operated) where shown on the drawings, otherwise valves shall

be hand wheel operated. Gate valves shall be as manufactured by Mueller, Kennedy, Clow or

approved equal.

2.4 CHECK VALVES

AWWA C508, cast-iron body, outside lever and weight, stainless steel hinge pin, non-shock

working pressure 200 psi, flanged per ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125# Class, unless

otherwise noted. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Mueller, Kennedy, Clow or

approved equal.

2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES (LIQUID SERVICE)

Compound pressure and vacuum gauge shall be carbon steel body, carbon steel flanges,

neoprene sleeve, ethylene glycol and water filled, minimum 4 inch dial size, stainless steel dial,

black lines and numbers. Pressure range shall be 0-200 feet water column positive pressure

and 0 to 30 inches mercury for vacuum, graduations and figure intervals proportioned to

range, accuracy to 1% of full scale range. Gauge nipple size shall be 1/2 inch minimum.

Provide for each pump discharge.

2.6 VACUUM GAUGES

Carbon steel body, carbon steel flanges, neoprene sleeve, glycerin filled, minimum 4 inch dial

size, stainless steel dial, black lines and numbers. Pressure range shall be 0-30 inches mercury

vacuum, 1 inch graduations and 5 inch figure intervals, accuracy to 1% of full scale range.

Gauge nipple size shall be 1/2 inch minimum. Provide on suction side of pumps for suction

lift pump installations.

2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS

Piping within the wet well (conduits, exhaust ducts, vent pipe, etc.) shall be supported with

aluminum or stainless steel supports securely anchored to the wall with stainless steel

fasteners. Galvanized components will not be accepted.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INTERIOR PROCESS PIPING INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Pipe Layout in Buildings


October 2016 15060-8

Coordinate work to prevent interference between architectural, structural, electrical and

mechanical features; the Contract Drawings are generally diagrammatic due to their small

scale. Provide such offsets, fittings and other items as may be required to suit conditions. Do

not place joints or fittings over switchboards, panels, motors or other electrical equipment.

The completed installation shall present a neat, orderly appearance; do not block openings or

passageways; run piping parallel to the walls of buildings or structures. Provide clearance

between piping, walls, floors, machinery and equipment to prevent the transmission of noise

and vibration. Orient handwheels, levers, valve operators and other valve actuators for

convenience of operation; set gate valves with the stem above the horizontal. Cut pipe to

measurements established at the site and install without springing or forcing; make changes in

direction with fittings. Connect ferrous piping to non-ferrous piping with dielectric couplings.

3.1.2 Equipment Connections

Make connections to pumps and other equipment in a manner to eliminate strains on piping

and equipment. Install unions or flanges adjacent to equipment and wherever their use will

facilitate removal of equipment.

3.1.3 Wall Sleeves and Wall Pipes

Provide pipes passing through concrete construction with wall sleeves or wall pipes, as

indicated on the Contract Drawings. Set wall sleeves and wall pipes of the required size

during construction of the wall, foundation, or slab.

3.1.4 Wall Seals

Provide watertight wall seals between pipe and wall sleeve where pipes penetrate building

walls, foundations, or slabs. Install seal in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

After installation of carrier pipe and pipe seal, place non-shrink grout in annular space (both

faces) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

3.1.5 Flanged Joints

Tighten flange bolts so that the gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed; do not distort

flanges; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum torque. Leave flange bolts

with ends projecting 1/8" to 1/4" beyond the face of the nut after tightening.

3.1.6 Threaded Joints

Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies; ream ends of pipe after threading and before

assembly to remove burrs; leave not more than three pipe threads exposed at each connection;

use joint compound or thread tape on the male thread only.

3.1.7 Solvent Welded Joints


October 2016 15060-9

Make joints in pipe and fittings in accordance with the procedures and techniques in ASTM

D2855.

3.1.8 Drain Pipe

Floor and hatch drains shall discharge into the wet well through check valves. Slope at

minimum 1/8 inch per foot as indicated on the drawings.

3.2 PIPE SUPPORTS

Support piping from structural construction using pipe hangers, pipe riser clamps and pipe

clamp hangers in conjunction with beam clamps, brackets or other equipment as dictated by

structure construction. Trapeze hangers approved by the Engineer may be used where several

horizontal pipes run closely parallel; secure pipes on trapeze hangers to prevent sideway

motion. Install supports for piping as specified herein.

3.2.1 Vertical Piping

Secure at sufficiently close intervals to keep pipe in alignment and to support weight of pipe

and its contents. Support vertical iron and steel pipe on maximum 5'-0" centers with stainless

steel pipe riser clamps. Support vertical copper tubing at no more than 10'-0" spacing, using

stainless steel pipe riser clamps or pipe clamp hangers at end of runs and at intermediate

points as installation dictates. Support vertical plastic pipe at 4'-0" centers, using pipe riser

clamps or pipe clamp hangers at end of runs and at intermediate points as installation dictates.

3.2.2 Horizontal Piping

Support at sufficiently close intervals to prevent sagging, thrust restraint, and vibration.

Install hangers or supports at ends of runs or branches and at each change of direction or

alignment. Install stainless steel clevis-type pipe hangers for horizontal iron and steel pipe on

maximum 10'-0" centers. Install stainless steel clevis-type pipe hangers for copper tubing on

6'-0" centers for 1-1/4" size and smaller, and on 10'-0" centers for copper tubing larger than

1-1/4" size. Install ring-type pipe hangers for horizontal plastic pipe on maximum 4'-0"

centers, close to every joint, at ends of each branch, and at each change in direction of

elevation; hangers shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade plastic piping and shall permit

free movement of the pipe.

3.3 VALVES

Install valves and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Inspect joint

surfaces for structural soundness and thoroughly clean before installation. Check and adjust

valves and accessories for smooth operation.

3.4 GAUGES


October 2016 15060-10

Install gauges in accordance with the details on the drawings and manufacturer’s

recommendations.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 15190-1

SECTION 15190 – HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their

Appurtenances

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures"

SD-06 Test Reports

Test procedures

List of test equipment

Testing sequence schedule

Hydrostatic Test Results

SD-07 Certificates

Certification of test pressure gauge calibration and accuracy


A. Test Acceptance:

1. No test will be accepted until leakage rate is below specified maximum limits.

2. The contractor shall determine and correct the cause of test failures and retest

until successful test results are achieved.


October 2016 15190-2

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST EQUIPMENT

Contractor shall supply all equipment necessary for pipeline testing including:

A. Hydro pump

B. Pressure hoses

C. Test connections

D. Pressure relief valve(s)

E. Pressure gauge(s) calibrated to 0.1 lb./sq. inch

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Install pipe supports in accordance with the plans and specifications. Flush pipeline to remove

debris. Collect and dispose of flushing water and debris in a manner conforming to regulatory

agency requirements.

3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Comply with Section 5 of AWWA C600. Fill entire systems with water and vent air from the

system at least 24 hours before the actual test pressure is applied. Apply the required test

pressure when the water and average ambient temperatures are approximately equal and

constant. Test piping at 1 1/2 times the working pressure (pump discharge pressure) or as

directed by Engineer; avoid excessive pressure on safety devices and mechanical seals.

Maintain test pressure as directed or minimum of 2 hours after the force pump has been

disconnected. Supply makeup water as directed. Visually inspect joints, fittings, and valves

while pipe is under test pressure. Correct all visible leaks and retest as often as necessary

until satisfactory results are achieved.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 15200-1

SECTION 15200 - HEATING AND VENTILATING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: Fans, electric heaters,

ductwork, louvers, dampers, dehumidifier, and accessories for heating and

ventilating the well facility.

B. Related Work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 16 - Electrical


A. Design and Performance Criteria:

1. Control room exhaust fan (EF-1)

a. CFM: 1150 (min.)

b. HP: 3/4

c. Static pressure: 0.375

d. RPM: 1725

e. Thermostatically controlled

f. 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hz

g. Model: Greenheck SEI-16-436-VG

h. Gravity type back-draft damper w/ bird screen

i. Factory furnished starter/disconnect, Greenheck MS-1P

2. Wet Well exhaust fan (EF-2)

a. CFM: 1250 (min.)

b. HP: 1/4

c. Static pressure: 0.375”

d. RPM: 1140

e. Corrosion resistant construction, stainless steel fasteners

f. Switch controlled

g. 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hz

h. Model: Greenheck CW-141-B

i. Fan construction and motor shall be explosion proof

j. Gravity type back-draft damper w/ bird screen

k. Factory furnished starter/disconnect, Greenheck MS-1P

3. Control room unit heater (UH-1)


October 2016 15200-2

a. 10 KW

b. 32,121 BTU/HR

c. 240 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz

d. Model: Reznor EGHB

4. Wet well gravity supply air/vent (GV-1)

a. Aluminum housing and curb cap

b. 12” roof curb to match roof pitch

c. Corrosion resistant construction

d. Model: Greenheck GRSI-15

5. One manufacturer shall provide all damper, louvers, and actuators to

assure system compatibility.

6. All electrical equipment shall be UL approved and be labeled as such.

7. Manufacturer: Ventilating and heating equipment shall be as manufactured

by Greenheck, Reznor, or equal.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit (5) five copies of detailed certified

dimensional shop drawings and manufacturer's product data for materials and

equipment, 30-days after date of notice to proceed; show complete information

concerning materials of construction, fabrication, protective coatings, installation

and anchoring requirements, fasteners, and other details. Submit electrical wiring

diagrams for all electrical equipment.

B. Submit copies of an Operations and Maintenance Manual in accordance with

Section 01781.

C. Maintenance Material: (Spare Parts)

1. Provide one complete set of the manufacturer's recommended spare

parts.

2. Package each part individually or in sets in moisture-proof

containers or wrappings, clearly labeled with part name and

manufacturer's part/stock number; submit, in writing, storage

procedures for spare parts to ensure adequate protection after

delivery.


October 2016 15200-3

3. Provide any special tools required for equipment maintenance;

provide a list of all equipment and tools needed to maintain and

calibrate equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DIRECT DRIVE EXHAUST FANS

A. Panel Assembly:

1. One-piece aluminum construction.

2. Motor/Bearing plate support structure of aluminum.

3. Complete panel assembly of all welded construction.

4. Pre-punched mounting holes.

5. Adjustable slide base.

B. Propeller:

1. Aluminum.

2. Blades bolted to hub plate.

3. Statically and dynamically tested for balance.

C. Drives:

1. Direct drive.

D. Bearings:

1. Bearings designed for minimum 200,000-hour life.

2. Self-aligning pillow block ball bearings.

3. Bearings are double sealed, pre-lubricated with relube fittings.

E. Motors:

1. Permanently lubricated sealed ball bearing type.

2. Open drip-proof construction is standard.

3. Explosion proof for wet well application.

F. Automatic (Gravity) Shutter:

1. Open in direction of airflow only, close by gravity when fan is not in

operation.

G. Guards:


October 2016 15200-4

1. Provide OSHA approved guards where indicated on the Drawings.

H. Mounting Collar:

1. Provide wall collar to allow fan to be mounted flush with the exterior wall

with the housing extending into the interior of the building.

2.02 DUCTWORK

A. Metal Ductwork:

1. All aspects of metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and

components, shall comply with SMACNA-06 HVAC Duct Construction

Standards and the latest publication of the ASHRAE Equipment Handbook

unless otherwise specified. Elbows shall be radius type with a centerline radius

of 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct where space permits.

Otherwise, elbows having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of

the duct or square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes may be used.

Static pressure Class 1/2, 1, and 2 inch w.g. ductwork shall meet the

requirements of Seal Class C. Class 3 through 10 inch shall meet the

requirements of Seal Class A. Sealant shall conform to fire hazard

classifications. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a sealant.

B. All ductwork in the Wet Well shall be schedule 80 PVC.

C. Plenums and Casings for Field-fabricated Units:

1. Plenums and casings shall be fabricated and erected as shown in

SMACNA-06, as applicable. Unless otherwise indicated, system casing

shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel.

D. Frames shall be removable type of stainless or extruded aluminum.

E. All back draft dampers shall be gravity type.

2.03 UNIT HEATERS

A. Horizontal fan forced electric unit heaters with adjustable discharge louvers, finned

electric heating coil. Single speed, resilient mounted, totally enclosed motor with

automatic reset thermal overload switch, and aluminum propeller fan. Provide

with wall mounted thermostat. 240 Volt, 3-Ph, 60 Hz, UL listed.

2.04 THERMOSTATS


October 2016 15200-5

A. Electrical heater thermostats shall be bimetal operated mercury switch on/off type

with an adjustable universal anticipation. Thermostats shall be suitable for use on a

24-volt control circuit.

B. Ventilation thermostats shall be bimetal actuated open contact or bellows actuated

enclosed snap switch on/off type with an adjustable universal anticipation.

Thermostats shall be suitable for use on a 120 volt, single phase control circuit.

C. All thermostats shall have a rugged corrosion resistant cover.

2.05 LOUVERS

A. Stationary drainable type fabricated from aluminum extrusion of .081” nominal

thickness with integral caulking slot. Blades shall be positioned 37 and 45 degree

angles approximately 6” on centers. Each louver shall be equipped with a framed,

removable, rear mounted screen of 3/4” x 0.51” expanded, flattened aluminum bird

screen having 80% free area with concealed vertical mullions and blade braces.

Weather-stripped frame. Anodized and lacquered finish. Sizes as indicated on

Drawings.

B. Louver finish shall be bronze anodized aluminum to match exterior door finish.

C. Provide gravity type back draft dampers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the equipment as indicated on the Contract Drawings and in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide and connect accessories and power as required to ensure a complete

operable unit.

C. Install backer rod and caulk around exterior perimeter of louver between louver

frame and wall opening. Seal watertight. Caulking material and sealant color shall

match louver color.

3.02 MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Place the equipment into initial operation to demonstrate correct alignment,

smooth operation, freedom from noise, vibration, overheating, and all controls and

mechanical functions.

3.03 EQUIPMENT ACCEPTANCE


October 2016 15200-6

A. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace any components, which fail to perform as

specified and rerun the tests; make final adjustments to the equipment under the

direction of the manufacturer's representative and to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 15210-1

SECTION 15210 - DOMESTIC WATER AND WASTE PIPING

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM B88 (2009) Seamless Copper Water Tube


ASME B1.20.1 (1983, rev.2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.18 (2001) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings


AWWA C800 (2005) Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Pipe and fittings

Valves

Reduced Pressure Zone (RPZ) Backflow Preventer

Hose bibb with vacuum breaker

SD-07 Certificates

Submit each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings, pipe

coupling and adapters, hose bibbs, vacuum breakers and valves meet or exceed

specification requirements.

1.3 WATER CONNECTION


October 2016 15210-2

Contractor shall install water service connections as indicated on the drawings up to the meter

box.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and of the best quality of their

respective kinds, and shall conform to the requirements and ordinances of local and insurance

authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 EXTERIOR PIPE, FITTINGS, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES

Comply with local building code requirements. ASTM B88. Type "K" soft copper.

2.3 PIPE

ASTM B88. Hard temper Type "K". Provide dielectric fittings between steel and copper.

2.3.1 Fittings

ASME B16.18. Solder type wrought copper - 95 -5 solder.

2.3.2 Drain Waste and Vent Piping

ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 with fittings conforming to ASTM D2466.

2.4 GATE VALVES

Bronze solder end, solid wedge, rising stem, 300 lb. w.o.g. non-shock. However, use brass

valves only on all copper pipe.

2.5 UNIONS

Unions in copper pipe shall be seat fittings with bronze seats designed for a working pressure

of 125 psig.

2.6 CHECK VALVES

Threaded and solder joint check valves for use with copper water piping. Horizontal swing

check type. Bronze body, renewable bronze disc. 200 psi working pressure.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS


October 2016 15210-3

All hangers for metallic piping shall be adjustable, wrought clevis type, or adjustable malleable

split ring swivel type, having rods with machine threads. Hangers shall be Grinnell Company's

Figure 260 for pipe 3/4" and larger, and Figure 107R for pipe 1/2" and smaller, or approved

equal. Hangers for copper piping shall be copper clad. Hanger spacing and rod sizes for steel

and copper pipe shall not be less than the following:

Nominal Pipe Maximum Minimum Rod

Size in. Ft. Diameter in.

3/4 & 1 7 3/8

1-1/2 9 3/8

2 10 3/8

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

Provide chromium plated escutcheons properly fitted and secured with spring clamp on all

exposed piping which passes through walls, floors, or ceiling of finished spaces.

2.9 SLEEVES

Sleeves shall be provided around all pipes through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, structure

members or other building parts. Sleeves shall be PVC or standard weight galvanized iron

pipe two sizes larger than the pipe or insulation so that pipe or insulation shall pass through

masonry or concrete walls or floors, unless otherwise noted on the plans. Provide Schedule

80 PVC or 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet or galvanized pipe sleeves for all piping passing

through frame walls. Space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a waterproof

epoxy caulking compound. Escutcheon plates shall be constructed to conceal the ends of

sleeves. Sleeves through floors shall extend 3 inches above the floor. Each trade shall be

responsible for drilling existing floors and walls for necessary sleeve holes. Copper piping

passing through galvanized sleeves shall be insulated through sleeve length and 3 inches each

side.

2.10 REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE (RPZ) BACKFLOW PREVENTER

Model No 909QT as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company or approved equal. Provide

a Watts Air Gap Model No 909AG beneath the backflow preventer and drain to the building

floor drain plumbing or the exterior above grade. Drainage across the floor to floor drain will

not be accepted. Insulate RPZ as detailed on the drawings.

2.11 HOSE BIBB WITH VACUUM BREAKER

Cast brass with integral wall plate, replaceable valve set, stainless steel shaft, nylon washer,

3/4-inch NPT outlet with Model No. 8A vacuum breaker as manufactured by Watts Regulator

Company or approved equal. Fixed operating wheel.


October 2016 15210-4

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING

All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building, and shall be

worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all doors and other

openings. Excessive cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping

installation will not be permitted. All pipes shall be so installed as to permit free expansion

and contraction without causing damage. All horizontal mains shall pitch down in the

direction of flow with a grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet. All open ends of pipe lines,

equipment, etc., shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or other

foreign material out of the system. All pipes shall be run parallel with the lines of the building

and as close to walls, columns, and ceilings as may be practical, with proper pitch. All piping

shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal of other equipment on devices not to

block access to doors, windows, or other access openings. Flanges or unions, as applicable

for the type of piping specified, shall be provided in the piping at connections to all items of

equipment, coils, etc., and installed so that there will be no interference with the installation of

the equipment, ducts, etc. All valves and specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation

and access in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All valves shall be regulated,

packed and glands adjusted at the completion of the work before final acceptance. All piping

shall be installed so at to avoid air or liquid pockets throughout the work.

3.1.1 Solder Joints

Ream or file pipe to remove burrs. Clean and polish contact surfaces of joints. Apply flux to

both male and female end; insert end of tube into fittings full depth of socket. Bring joint to

soldering temperature, in as short a time as possible, forming continuous solder bead around

entire circumference of joint.

3.1.2 Solvent Cemented Joints (PVC)

Make joints in pipe and fittings in accordance with the procedures and techniques in

ASTM D2855.

3.1.3 Flanged Joints

Tighten flange bolts so that the gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed; do not distort

flanges; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum torque. Leave flange bolts

with ends projecting 1/8" to 1/4" beyond the face of the nut after tightening.

3.1.4 Threaded Joints

ANSI B2.1, NPT. Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies; ream ends of pipe after

threading and before assembly to remove burrs; leave not more than three pipe threads

exposed at each connection; use joint compound or thread tape on the male thread only.


October 2016 15210-5

3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, GUIDES

General: All hangers shall be of an approved type arranged to maintain the required grading

and pitching of lines to prevent vibration and to provide for expansion and contraction.

Provide saddles between hangers and insulation on insulated pipe. Provide approved spacers

between saddles and pipe where flexible insulation is specified. Regardless of spacing,

hangers shall be provided at or near all changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal, for

all piping.

3.2.1 Vertical Lines

Shall be supported at their bases, using either a suitable hanger placed in a horizontal line near

the riser, or a base type fitting set on a pedestal, foundation, or support.

3.2.2 Racks and Brackets

All horizontal piping on vertical walls shall be properly supported by suitable racks securely

anchored into the wall construction. Where not practical to obtain ceiling anchorage, all

piping near walls shall be supported by approved brackets securely anchored into the wall

construction.

3.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

Install backflow preventer where indicated on the drawings and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Provide minimum 1 inch air gap between RPZ and drain piping.

Drain piping shall exit to building exterior a minimum of 6 inches above grade.

3.4 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND TESTING

All domestic water and waste piping shall be flushed clean with fresh water, disinfected and

tested in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 15210-6



October 2016 16010-1

SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of electrical work covered by this Section is specified in all other

sections of Division 16, the drawings, schedules and by requirements of this

Section.

B. Refer to the Contract and Division 16 sections for additional electrical

requirements including:

1. Summary of the work.

2. Project Coordination.

3. Definitions and Standards.

4. Submittals.

5. Schedules and Reports.

6. Temporary Facilities.

7. Products.

8. Testing and Final Acceptance.

9. Project Closeout.

C. The word provide, as used hereinafter, shall be defined to mean the furnishing of

all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the work described.


A. Labels and Listings: Materials, appliances and equipment provided shall meet the

requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Electrical Testing

Laboratories (ETL) and other standards organizations.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): All work provided under this

Contract shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code",

latest edition.

C. Current Models:

1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the

manufacturer. No more than 12 months old.

2. Replacement parts shall be available.

D. There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the

manufacturer to provide satisfactory service.


October 2016 16010-2

E. Experience: Manufactured items shall have been installed and used without

modifications, renovation, or repair, on other projects for not less than three (3)

years prior to the date of bid opening for this project.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA

A. Submit (5) five copies of complete shop drawings and engineering data on all

equipment and materials to be used in the work of this project shall be submitted

for the Owner's approval in accordance with the General Provisions. Shop

drawings shall be submitted 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

B. The submittals shall be properly identified and referenced as to the applicable

specification paragraph heading or drawing number which applies, and shall

establish that each item meets the requirements of the specifications with regard to

dimension, arrangement and other pertinent characteristics. Individual items within

each submittal shall be marked accordingly.

C. Submittal data shall be in the form of shop drawings for major and specially

constructed equipment and catalog or other engineering data on items normally

considered as stock items.

D. Submittals shall include complete wiring diagrams, performance curves, installation

instructions and all other applicable information necessary to the proper installation

of the equipment.

E. The shop drawings and submittal data will be reviewed only for conformance with

the project design concept and compliance with information in the Contract

Documents. The checking of dimensions and quantity of materials shall remain the

responsibility of the Contractor.

F. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of any deviations from the requirements of

the contract or intent of the contract documents in accordance with the General

Provisions.

G. If variations and/or deviations are not marked on submittal, the Contractor will not

be relieved of responsibility for furnishing equipment and executing work in strict

accordance with Contract Documents, even though shop drawings have been

approved.

H. In checking shop drawings, the Owner will make every effort to detect and correct

errors, omissions and inaccuracies; the reviewer’s failure to detect errors,

omissions and inaccuracies shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for

proper and complete installation in accordance with intent Contract Documents.

I. As a minimum the following shall be submitted for approval:


October 2016 16010-3

1. Panelboards and Circuit Breakers,

2. Light Fixtures, Lenses, and Mounting Equipment,

3. Wiring Devices and Plates,

4. Safety Switches,

5. Pump Control Panel

6. Control and Monitoring Equipment

7. Manual Transfer Switches

8. RTU

9. Variable Frequency Drives

10. Programmable Logic Controller

11. Name Plates

12. Others as required by the respective specification section

J. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage: Materials stored at the project site, which become soiled with

construction dirt, concrete, paint, etc. shall be washed, cleaned and dried or

removed from the project site and replaced with new. Do not install soiled

material.

B. Cleaning: Clean and wipe the interior of conduit, pullboxes, and panelboard

backboxes, soiled by masonry trades, before proceeding with wiring.

C. Do not install damaged, broken or marred material or products, replace with new,

unless otherwise approved by the Owner in writing.

1.05 LABELS AND NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum

or type 304 stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG, secured to the

manufactured item, with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non-

erasable record of equipment data.

B. Field Installation: Field-installed nameplates shall be as per Section 16195,

"Electrical Identification".

1.06 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. The Contractor is responsible for all temporary facilities as required during

construction as set forth in Section 107 of the General Provisions.


October 2016 16010-4

1.07 SIZING

A. Capacity: Provide equipment and material of sizes, capacities, horsepowers,

power ratings and dimensions indicated on the drawings, in the schedules and as

specified.

B. Fit and Clearance: Equipment and material of greater or larger power dimensions,

capacity and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is

approved in writing and feeders, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases and

equipment spaces are increased by the Contractor at no additional cost, to the

contract cost.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate electrical work with that of other trades so that:

1. Interference between general construction, mechanical, electrical, structural

and other specialty trades is avoided.

2. Maintain clearances and advise other trades of clearance requirements for

operation, repair, removal, and testing of electrical equipment.

3. All electrical materials and equipment shall be kept as close as possible to

ceiling, walls, and columns to occupy the minimum amount of space.

4. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings, and similar items necessary to

accomplish the requirements of coordination, without additional expense.

5. Coordinate electrical requirements for equipment provided by Mechanical

Contractors to assure proper compatibility with equipment provided.

B. Other divisions of these specifications and drawings shall be carefully examined to

determine the requirements of the project as a whole and to determine

interconnecting points between the various trades. All such interconnections shall

be properly made and with due regard for correct arrangements suited to the

equipment or material concerned.

C. Provide power wiring and final power connections to equipment installed by other

trades, which requires electrical power. Other trades will supply power

characteristics and roughing-in data to ensure the proper power wiring of their

equipment.

D. Provide disconnect switches for equipment of other trades when required, and

specifically for motors, which are out of sight of their controllers, unless switches

are provided integrally mounted on the equipment.


October 2016 16010-5

E. All control wiring for other trades will be performed under another division of

these specifications unless otherwise noted. Control wiring shall be considered as

that wiring, low or high voltage, which is required for devices such as pushbuttons,

thermostats, valves, control switches for starters, interlocking of starters, and any

other wiring required by similar control devices and is not included in this division,

except as noted.

1.09 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

All work performed and all material installed under this Division shall conform to the

latest editions of BOCA including the latest edition of NFPA No. 70 (NEC) and other

applicable standards of the NFPA and all laws, ordinances and all governing authorities.

The Contractor shall procure and pay for all licenses, permits, fees, etc., necessary to

install and complete the work.

1.10 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to

installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received.

Failure to furnish recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or

material.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish quality standards for all material

and equipment incorporated in the work of this division. All materials and

equipment installed hereunder shall be new and shall be the best of each respective

kind and type. Proper care shall be exercised in handling all materials and

equipment herein specified so as not to injure or mar finished surfaces and to

insure that the work is acceptable in every respect upon completion.

B. The installation shall be as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner. The installation shall

be accomplished by workmen skilled in their respective trades.

C. No products shall contain asbestos or other hazardous substances.

D. As far as practicable, use a common manufacturer for similar products. These

products are to be selected to maximize component interchange ability.


October 2016 16010-6

E. Provide all necessary accessories and appurtenances required for a complete

installation even if not called out specifically on the drawings or indicated herein.


3.01 INTENT OF DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are diagrammatic, intending to show general runs and locations of

equipment and specialties, and not necessarily showing all required offsets, etc.

Carefully study the various runs of conduit and make such adjustments in exact

routing as may be necessary to fit conduits into space available and to avoid

conflict with other trades.

B. Arrange equipment substantially as shown on the Drawings. Make deviations only

where necessary to avoid interference. Check equipment size against available

space prior to shipment to avoid interference.

3.02 PAINTING AND FINISHING

Damage and Touch-Up: Repair all marred or damaged factory painted finishes with

materials and procedures to match original factory finish and as specified in Section

09910.

3.03 WIRING FOR SPECIAL EQUIPMENT

Provide all wiring, outlets, and connections for connecting all equipment. All outlets and

connections shall be verified and coordinated with equipment manufacturer's roughing-in

drawings before installation and all adjustments shall be made to satisfy the manufacturer's

requirements. All equipment shall be connected and ready for use.

3.04 MOTOR, EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS CONNECTIONS

A. Provide all necessary electric power connections and disconnect switches as

required for all equipment requiring such connections. This Contractor shall

coordinate his work with roughing-in drawings provided by manufacturer or Party

furnishing equipment.

B. All motors shall conform to the latest applicable NEMA standards for type, size,

and duty, as specifically applied. All motors shall be suitable for operation on 60

cycle a.c. and with voltage and other characteristics as specified in other Divisions

of these Specifications.

C. Motor controller furnished shall conform to the latest applicable NEMA standards

for type, size, and duty as specifically applied. Magnetic controllers shall provide


October 2016 16010-7

thermal overload protection in each line not to exceed 125 percent of the motor

full load current rating and shall be provided with a manual reset type pushbutton

on outside of housing. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with 115 volt holding

coils, control transformers having 115 volt fused secondaries and necessary

number of auxiliary contacts.

D. Magnetic controllers shall provide under voltage protection when used with

momentary contact control devices and under voltage released when used with

maintained-contact control devices. Manual type controllers shall provide thermal

overload protection not to exceed values listed above, plus the actual current

drawn by auxiliary controls and shall be approved for group fusing when more

than one motor is served by the same branch circuit.

E. Provide disconnect switches as required conforming to the latest applicable NEMA

standards for Type HD safety switches enclosed in NEMA Type 1 or 3R

enclosures or as indicated and as required. Where fusible switches are required,

they shall be equipped with dual element fuses. Any motor out of sight of its

controller and any controller out of sight of its branch circuit breaker shall be

provided with disconnecting switch in accordance with Article 430 of NEC.

F. Install control and alarm wiring for all equipment, mechanical and electrical, in

accordance with Division 16 Specification Sections. Before installing control

circuits, ensure that controls and wiring diagrams are in accordance with those

furnished with the equipment. Make any changes required due to different

equipment, more up-to-date controls or safety devices, so that the equipment

operates as required. Control voltage shall not exceed 120 volts unless indicated

otherwise on the Drawings.

G. When equipment is supplied with electrical requirements other than those specified

or shown on the Drawings, associated electrical devices and circuitry of the correct

sizes and ratings shall be provided.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting: Provide cutting, channeling, chasing, and drilling of floors, walls,

partitions, ceilings and other surfaces necessary for installation of electrical work.

All cutting shall be performed by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.

B. Patching: Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.06 CLOSING OF OPENINGS

A. Firestopping: Unused slots, sleeves and other penetrations in floors, walls or other

general construction shall be closed and sealed with an approved firestopping

material per UL 1479.


October 2016 16010-8

B. Conduit: The annulus between exposed conduit and walls or floors in finished

spaces shall be filled, sealed, and painted to match adjacent surfaces.

C. Future Slots: Identify unused sleeves and slots for future use by permanently

anchored brass nameplates identifying size and purpose of the covered slot.

3.07 SYSTEM TEST

A. Prior to final site visitation, field testing and acceptance testing, the Contractor

shall conduct an operating test of the complete electrical system. System shall test

free from grounds, shorts and other faults. All connections as possible shall be

thoroughly checked for positive mechanical and electrical connection and

continuity. All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the

requirements set forth in these specifications and shown on the drawings.

B. Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner or his duly authorized

representative. The Contractor shall furnish all personnel and test instruments for

use in the test.

3.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of the operation and

maintenance manuals for all electrical equipment 30 days prior to project closeout

for approval. After approval from the Owner, the Contractor shall deliver five

corrected copies bound in a loose leaf binder to the owner in accordance with

Section 01781. In addition to the requirements of Section 01781, the binder shall

be labeled and indexed as follows:

B. The material included in the operation and maintenance manual tabs shall have

included:

1. Approved shop drawings with model numbers including:

a. Light fixtures

b. Receptacles

c. Switches

d. Panelboards

e. Variable Frequency Drives

f. Programmable Logic Controller

g. Disconnect Switches

h. Motor Starters

i. Wires and cables

j. Conduit, raceways, and pathways


October 2016 16010-9

k. All Test Reports

l. All warranty information

C. Separate operation and maintenance manuals including shop drawings and

diagrams to be included shall be as follows:

1. Pump Control Panel

3.09 RECORD DRAWINGS (AS-BUILTS)

A. The Contractor shall maintain and deliver Record Drawings in accordance with the

requirements of the General Provisions.

B. The Contractor shall maintain at the job site one set of blue line or black line prints

of the drawings approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall record thereon all

changes in the location, sizing, and arrangement that may be made for any reason

in the work during the course of construction including Addenda and Change

Orders work so as to reflect the installation “as-built”. Upon completion of the

project, “as-built” drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner in

accordance with the requirements of the General Provisions.

3.10 FINAL SITE VISITATION

When the work on the entire project has been completed and is ready for final review, a

visit will be made by the Owner or his duly authorized representative, at which time the

Contractor shall demonstrate that the requirements of the Contract have been carried out

and that the system has been adjusted and operates in accordance therewith.

3.11 GUARANTEE

Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work in accordance with the General Provisions

and as may be further specified herein.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32

Replacement Sewage Pump Station

Gravity Sewer and Force Main 16020-1

SECTION 16020 - UTILITY SERVICE AND SERVICE ENTRANCE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work required under this heading covers the equipment necessary to provide

power for all loads for a complete working installation.

1.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Electrical service shall be as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. All service work shall be coordinated with the local Power Company and National

Electrical Code.

C. Electrical service shall be 120/240V, hi-leg delta, three phase, 4-wire.

D. Verify complete electrical service installation with Power Company before start

up.

E. If required, the Contractor shall coordinate with Dominion Virginia Power

regarding the location of the pad mounted transformer and prefabricated bases.

The Contractor shall provide finish grade for power company work.

F. Make application with electrical utility company for electric service in a manner

to permit utility company to provide service prior to completion of work under

this contract.

G. Complete and file all forms required by the electric utility company in connection

with application for electric service. Pay for all required licenses, permits, fees,

etc. necessary to obtain electric service. Power Company charges required to

perform work to provide service to the facility will be paid directly by the Owner

and will not be part of this contract.

H. Provide underground raceways and conductors from utility company transformer

to main service equipment.

I. Install sealable meter compartment furnished by Dominion Virginia Power.

J. Furnish and install interconnecting raceway between metering transformers and

revenue meter. Install all equipment in conformity with utility company’s

requirements.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Pump Station 32



Not applicable.


Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16035-1

SECTION 16035 - ELECTRICAL TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall perform electrical testing in the presence of the Owner prior

to Initial Field Testing and Final Acceptance Testing.

B. Provide all material, equipment, labor, and technical supervision to perform and

complete the electrical acceptance test in accordance with the requirements of this

Section for equipment furnished by the Contractor. Notify Owner at least seven

days in advance of tests.

C. Perform tests on the following equipment:

1. Grounding.

2. Power cables, 600 volts and lower.

3. Rotating equipment.

4. Panelboards

5. Motor Control Center

6. As required by other specification sections

D. Perform electrical testing as required by other Divisions 16 specifications for

specific equipment including:

1. Section 11330 – Suction Lift Sewage Pumps

2. Section 16120 – Wire and Cables

3. Section 16135 – Wiring Devices

4. Section 16410 – Pump Control Panel

5. Section 16450 – Grounding

6. Section 16461 – Dry Type Transformers

7. Section 16470 – Panelboards

8. Section 16842 – Motor Starters

9. Section 16690 – Variable Frequency Drives

10. Section 16900 – Remote Terminal Unit

11. Section 16920 – Programmable Logic Controller


A. Final acceptance will depend upon successful completion of specified testing.


October 2016 16035-2

B. Perform all tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Should

manufacturer's recommendations conflict with these specifications, notify Owner.

Do not proceed with tests until directed by the Owner.

C. Material or equipment failing tests shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's

expense.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all test and test records. Testing shall be

performed by or under the immediate supervision of the Contractor, and in the

presence of the Owner or Owner’s representative.

E. Inspect the equipment prior to energizing.

F. The Contractor shall coordinate with certified manufacturer’s representatives for

those items specified as requiring representation during start up and testing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following:

A. Electrical Testing Reports

Results of testing shall be fully documented including dates of testing, equipment

utilized, person performing tests, tests made, comparative acceptable test results

and reference standards, actual test results, corrections made and results of

retesting for each piece of equipment or component tested. Submit test results

neatly bound and organized in three ring binders with divider pages separating

each set of tests, a complete table of contents, and listing of testing equipment

including calibration certifications.

B. Certificates

The contractor shall provide a written certification that the electrical testing was

completed successfully, all deficiencies corrected, and initially deficient equipment

and or components were retested successfully.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with one copy of the building regulation

certificate of inspections, including any failing inspections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 TESTING DEVICES

The Contractor shall employ all testing devices and personnel trained in their use, required

for testing as specified herein.


October 2016 16035-3


3.01 TESTING AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Measure and record voltages, at all service equipment, manual transfer switch,

panelboards motor control panel.

B. Each power and convenience outlet shall be subjected to tests for polarity, open

wiring, and continuous ground.

3.02 GROUND SYSTEM TESTING

Upon completion of installation of the electrical grounding and bonding systems, test the

existing ground resistance with a ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-

to-ground is over 10 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce the resistance to 10 ohms, or

less, by driving additional ground rods. Then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.03 CABLE CONTINUITY AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION

Check cable continuity and phase identification.

3.04 FEEDER INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

A. All current carrying phase conductors and neutrals shall be tested as installed, and

before connections are made, for insulation resistance and accidental grounds.

This shall be done with a 500 volt megger. The procedures listed below shall be

followed:

B. Minimum readings shall be one million (1,000,000) or more ohms between

conductors and between conductor and the grounding conductor.

C. After all fixtures, devices and equipment are installed and all connections are

installed and all connections completed to each panel, the contractor shall

disconnect the neutral feeder conductor from the neutral bar and take a megger

reading between the neutral bar and the grounded enclosure. If this reading is less

than 250,000 ohms, the Contractor shall disconnect the branch circuit neutral wires

from this neutral bar. The Contractor shall then test each one separately to the

panel until the low readings are found. The Contractor shall correct troubles,

reconnect, and retest until at least 250,000 ohms from the neutral bar the grounded

panel can be achieved with only the neutral feeder disconnected.


October 2016 16035-4

D. The Contractor shall send a letter to the Owner certifying that the above has been

done and tabulating the megger readings for each panel. This shall be submitted at

least four (4) days prior to final inspection.

E. At final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish a megger and show the Owner that

the panels comply with the above requirements. He shall also furnish a hook-on

type ammeter and voltage readings as directed by the representatives.

3.05 DOCUMENTATION

A. All tests specified shall be completely documented indicating time of day, date,

temperature and all pertinent test information.

B. All required documentation of readings indicated above shall be submitted to the

Owner prior to, and as one of the pre-requisites for, Initial Field Testing and Final

Acceptance Testing.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32



SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of raceway work is indicated on the drawings, by the requirements of

this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of raceways in this Section include the following:

1. Flexible steel conduit.

2. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit

3. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.

4. Rigid metal conduit.

5. Wireway.

6. Plastic / PVC


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", for application, size, location, and installation of each type of

raceway used.

B. Provide products specified in conformance with the indicated standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each type of raceway. Submit shop drawings 30-

days after date of notice to proceed.

1.4. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Raceway in designated hazardous or explosion proof locations shall conform to NFPA 70

requirements for installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Each length of conduit shall bear the manufacturer’s stamp and UL label.

2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid conduit shall be mild steel piping, hot-dipped, zinc-coated or sherardized, and of

Pump Station 32



sufficient weight and toughness to withstand cracking and peeling during bending.

Each piece of rigid conduit to be straight, free from blisters and defects, cut square

and taper reamed, finished in 10’ lengths and threaded at each end. Couplings shall be

supplied at one end and a protective sleeve for the other end. All threads to be clearly

cut. Each length to bear UL label.

B. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall have a permanent plastic coating factory applied

to a minimum thickness of 40 mils and a urethane internal coating. PVC coated shall

be Plasti-Bond Red as manufactured by Robroy Industries or approved equal.

C. Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized, continuous spiral, single strip type and shall

be used in accordance with NEC Article 350. In areas subject to moisture, or where

indicated, liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in accordance with NEC Article

351. Fittings shall be standard UL approved with ground connector. Watertight

connectors shall be used with liquid tight flexible conduit.

2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS

A. Electrical plastic conduit, PVC Type, shall conform to NEMA TC 2, “Conduit (EPC-

40 and EPC-80)”.

B. Provide in conformance with ANSI 870, “Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and

Associated Fittings”.

2.04 METAL AND PLASTIC CONDUIT AND RACEWAY FITTINGS

A. Fittings for conduit and outlet boxes shall conform to UL 514B, “Fittings for Conduit

and Outlet Boxes”.

B. PVC fittings for use with rigid PVC conduit and tubing shall conform to NEMA TC

3, “PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing”.

C. Nonmetallic conduits and raceways.

D. Raceway seals.


3.01 MINIMUM SIZE

Size conduit and raceway in accordance with NFPA 70 unless otherwise specified or shown

on the drawings. Minimum size 3/4-inch for interior work and 1-inch for exterior work.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR

Pump Station 32



Raceways sizes shall be adequate to include the circuit conductors, an equipment ground

conductor, and a neutral conductor in accordance with percentage of fill requirements by

NFPA 70. Size all conduits supplying motors and associated control equipment to include

grounding conductor sized per NFPA 70 whether or not shown on the drawings or specified.

3.03 CONDUIT

A. All exterior conduit shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.

B. All conduit installed in the wet well shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

C. All conduit in slab, transitions, through slab, and penetrations through walls and floors

shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

D. All interior conduit shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

E. Conduit for power and control circuits shall be color coded. Conduit for power

circuits shall be red; conduits for control circuits shall be orange

3.04 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Sizes 1-1/4-inch and smaller, provide with continuous copper bonding conductor

wound spirally between convolutions.

B. Sizes 1-1/2-inch and larger, provide with an internal grounding conductor and

grounding bushings.

C. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduits for connections to motors and other

electrical equipment when it is subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped

quarters, or where noise transmission is to be eliminated or reduced.

3.06 WIREWAYS, AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. May be used to facilitate installation and future changes in wiring between

panelboards, safety switches in close proximity to each other on same or adjacent

walls or in same electrical equipment room or area.

B. Provide weatherproof enclosure where outdoors or subject to moisture and similar

elements.

C. Use where shown on drawings or specified.

D. Shall be completely accessible.

3.07 RACEWAY FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS

Pump Station 32



A. Use fittings listed and approved for specific conduit or raceway system used.

B. For threaded rigid steel conduit do not use threadless or compression type fittings.

C. Bushing and connector shall be insulated type, which maintain continuity of conduit

grounding system. Insulating material shall be molded or locked into metallic body of

the fitting. Bushing made entirely of nonmetallic material will not be allowed. Where

concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts are encountered, a grounding-type

insulated bushing shall be provided.

D. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a

steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Fitting shall

be steel or malleable iron with insulated throat, with male thread and locknut or male

bushing with or without "O" ring seal.

E. Provide expansion fittings for all rigidly fastened conduits spanning a building

expansion joint and if not otherwise provided, for all runs 1-1/2-inch or larger,

exceeding 150 feet in length. Fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron

with a packing ring to prevent entrance of water, a pressure ring, a grounding ring,

and a separate external copper bonding jumper.

F. Inferior material such as "pot metal" shall not be used for any type of fitting.

G. All locknuts shall be the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall

of an enclosure.

H. The use of "LB's" shall be limited where possible. Where necessary to use "LB's"

sized above 2-inch, mogul units shall be installed.

3.08 GENERAL

A. Run conduits exposed. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of not more than 8'.

Run exposed conduit parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or

intersections of vertical planes and ceiling. Changes in direction of runs shall be made

with symmetrical bends or fittings to match conduit type. Avoid field made bends and

offsets where possible, but where necessary they shall be made with an approved

hickey or conduit bending machine. No bend shall have less than 3-1/2" radius. No

bend shall be more than 90 degrees. There shall not be more than four right angle

bends or the equivalent in one run. Conduit shall have clean, sharp threads carefully

reamed ends and tight joints. Crushed or deformed conduits shall not be installed.

Avoid trapped conduits where possible. Take care to prevent the lodgment of dirt or

trash in conduit, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of construction.

Clogged conduits shall be entirely cleared of obstructions or shall be replaced. Fasten

conduit to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by

Pump Station 32



NEC, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into

firm contact with the box; otherwise a single locknut and bushing are acceptable.

B. Support conduits by pipe straps, wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze,

fastened by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and bolts and expansion shields on

concrete or brick. Unless otherwise indicated, nail type nylon anchors provided with

lock washers and nuts or threaded steel studs driven in by powder charge and

provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields or

machine screws. Wires twisted around structural members as a support for conduits

will not be acceptable. Wooden plugs inserted in concrete on masonry are not

acceptable as a base for conduit fastening, nor shall conduit or pipe straps be welded

to steel structures.

C. All floor penetrations through floor slabs for the transition from one floor to the

next shall be provided with PVC sleeves.

3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways at all

outlet, junction, and pull boxes, remove burrs and obstructions.

B. Run a swab or mandrel to remove dirt and blockages. Raceways, which are deformed

and prevent the passage of a mandrel, shall be replaced.

C. Remove dirt and construction debris from outlet, junction, and pull boxes.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16120-1

SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated on the drawings and

schedules, by the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical

Basic Requirements" and Section 16035, “Testing and Placing in Service”.

B. Types: Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this Section

include the following:

1. Copper conductors.

2. Tap type connectors.

3. Split-bolt connectors.

4. Wire nut connectors.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Comply with requirements

of the following:

1. B 1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

2. B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, MediumHard, or Soft

B. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL): Provide wiring, cabling, and connector

products, which are ETL, listed and labeled.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Comply with the

following standards, which apply to wiring systems:

1. 82 Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors

2. 241 Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Systems in Commercial

Buildings

D. NFPA: Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for construction, installation, and

color coding of electrical wire, cable, and connections.

E. UL: Provide material conforming to the following standards:

1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables

2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors


October 2016 16120-2

4. 854 Service-Entrance Cables

F. UL Labels: Provide wiring, cabling, and connector products, which are UL, listed

and labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wire, cables, conductors, connectors, and

connector crimping tools. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.


A. Delivery: Deliver wire and cable packaged in factory-sealed containers, or wound

on NEMA wire and cable reels.

B. Storage: Store wire and cable in a clean dry space in original containers. Protect

products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handling: Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and

tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that resistance integrity of

wires/cables is maintained.

1.05 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER WIRE

A. Conductors:

1. Provide wire rated 600 V minimum of the single conductor annealed

copper, 900 C, type THHN/THWN.

2. Conductors shall be Class B stranded.

3. Control wiring shall have stranded conductors.

4. The minimum conductor size for all power and lighting circuits shall be #12

AWG.

5. The maximum conductor size allowed shall be #500 kcmil.

6. Control wiring shall be #16 AWG minimum, type MTW.

B. Insulation:

1. The insulation for the wiring from the VFD to the motor shall be type


October 2016 16120-3

XLP-E.

2.02 CABLE

Provide UL listed cables of sizes, ampacity, temperature ratings, and insulating materials

indicated on the drawings or in other sections of this specification.

2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. General: Provide UL listed metal connectors of sizes, ampacity, temperature

ratings, materials, and classes required by NFPA 70 and NEMA standards for

applications and services indicated.

B. Branch Circuits: For wires No. 10 AWG and smaller, provide solderless, insulated

pressure cable type connectors, 600 V, of the compression or indent type or wire

nut connectors. Temperature rating of connectors shall be at least equal to that of

the wire on which they are used.

C. Copper Conductors: For No. 8 AWG and larger wire, provide socket head cap,

hex screw, or bolt clamp type connectors, manufactured of high conductivity

copper alloy or bronze castings. Select proper connector for each wire size. Cable

sizes 250 kcmil and larger shall be retained in the connector by twin clamping

elements.

2.04 INSULATING TAPE, PUTTY, RESIN AND SUPPORTS

A. Tape:

Provide plastic electrical insulating tape, which is flame retardant, cold, and

weather resistant. Tape for use in areas subject to temperatures 30 degrees C. to

105 degrees C., or where the tape will be subjected to an oil splash, shall have a

minimum thickness of 8.5 mils, and shall consist of an oil-resistant vinyl backing

with an oil-resistant acrylic adhesive.

B. Materials:

1. Provide all insulating materials for splices and connections such as glass

and synthetic tapes, putties, resins, splice cases, or compositions of the

type approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature,

and apply and install in an approved manner, all in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Supports: Provide cable supports of the wedge type, which firmly clamp

each individual cable and tighten due to the cable weight.

2.05 PROHIBITED PRODUCTS


October 2016 16120-4

The use of non-metallic sheathed cable Types NM to NMC, Metal Clad Cable (MC),

armored bushed cable (BX) and armor-clad cable (AC) is prohibited.


3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical wires, cables and wiring connectors in compliance with

applicable requirements of NFPA 70, NEMA, UL, and National Electrical

Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation".

B. Conduit: Unless otherwise noted, install all wiring in rigid metal conduit, flexible

metal conduit, and non-metallic conduit as indicated on the drawings or in the

specifications, in conformance with NFPA 70.

C. Complete System: Provide wire, cables, and connectors necessary for a complete

installation from point of service connection to all receptacles, lighting fixtures,

devices, utilization equipment, and outlets for future extensions as indicated on the

drawings, in schedules, and in the specification. Provide ample slack wire for

connections.

D. Voltage Rating: Wire and cables for general wiring shall be rated for 600 volts

minimum.

E. Minimum Size: Minimum branch circuit conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG.

Where the length of a branch circuit homerun exceeds 50 feet for a 120 V circuit,

or 125 feet for 277 V, the conductor size shall be No. 10 AWG.

F. Shelf Life: Wire and Cable manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of

delivery to the site shall not be used.

G. Bundling: Neatly train all conductors located in branch circuit panelboards, signal

cabinets, signal control boards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

H. Feeder Identification: Securely fasten nonferrous identifying tags or pressure

sensitive labels to all cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes,

manholes, switchboard rooms and at termination of cables.

I. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to correspond with markings on

drawings or marked so that feeder or cable may be readily identified.

J. If suspended type tags are provided, they shall be attached by approximately 55

pound test monofilament line or slip free plastic cable lacing units.

3.02 WIRE PULLING AND CABLE INSTALLATION


October 2016 16120-5

A. Raceways: Refer to Section 16110, "Raceways", for the preparation of raceways

for wire and cables.

B. Equipment: Provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting and

abrasion of conduits during the pulling of wires and cables.

C. Ropes used for pulling of conductors shall be made of polyethylene or other

suitable nonmetallic material.

D. Metallic ropes shall not be used.

E. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same

raceway.

F. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound shall not

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Where polyethylene insulation is used and a

pulling lubricant is required, the lubricant shall be certified by the manufacturer to

be non-injurious to such insulation.

G. Lubricants shall conform to UL requirements applicable.

H. Pulling lines shall be attached to conductor cables by means of either woven basket

grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors. Rope hitches shall not be

used.

I. Supports: Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the

applicable sections of the NFPA 70.

J. Splices: Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Splice wires and cables only in

outlet boxes, junction boxes, pullboxes, manholes, and handholes.

K. In the making of a splice, connectors shall be brought up securely upon the

conductors such that all conductors are equally engaged, the insulation is not

ruptured, no bare wires are exposed or have "backed off" due to the application of

pressure, and the connection will not loosen due to cycling or vibration, in order to

insure an efficient splice.

L. The number, size, and combinations of conductors permitted as listed on

manufacturer's packaging of connector shall be strictly followed.

M. Connectors shall be fully insulated by a skirt, or taped to provide an insulation

value at least equal to rating of wires being connected.

N. Connectors: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and

bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or

comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 486B.

O. Color Coding: Color code all secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit


October 2016 16120-6

conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:


October 2016 16120-7

120/240 Volts Phase

Black A

Red B

Blue C

White Neutral

Green Ground

P. The colors shall be factory-applied entire length of the conductors by one of the

following methods except as noted and limited below:

1. Solid color compound.

2. Solid color coating.

3. Surface printing every 12 inches, maximum spacing of 18 inches.

Q. All branch circuit conductors Nos. 12 AWG and 10 AWG shall be solid color

compound or solid color coating.

R. All sizes of conductors used for neutrals and equipment grounds shall be solid

compound or solid color coating white, gray, or green, respectively.

S. All phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger color coded with pressure sensitive

tape shall have a background color other than white or green.

T. Color pressure-sensitive plastic tape shall be applied in half overlapping turns for a

distance of six inches on all terminal points and in all boxes in which splices or taps

are made. The last two laps of tape shall be applied with no tension to prevent

possible unwinding.

U. Tape shall be 3/4-inch wide and colors shall be as specified.

V. Cable identification markings shall not be obliterated by taping and tape locations

may be adjusted slightly to prevent obliteration of cable marking.

W. Power and control wiring shall be run in separate conduits. AC and DC control

circuits shall be run in separate conduits.


A. Tests: Feeders and branch circuit insulation shall be tested after installation, and

before connection to fixtures and appliances.

1. Tests shall be performed with a 600-volt megger, and conductors shall test

free from short-circuits and grounds.


October 2016 16120-8

2. Conductors shall be tested phase-to-phase and phase-to ground.

3. Furnish the instruments, materials, and labor required. Perform the tests in

the presence of the Owner.

4. Test readings shall be recorded and delivered to the Owner.

B. Demonstration: Subsequent to wire and cable hookups, energize circuit and

demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary,

correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32



SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: This section covers electrical box and electrical fitting work for power,

lighting, signal, communication, protection, and auxiliary systems.

B. Types: Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this Section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes.

2. Junction boxes.

3. Pull boxes.

4. Splice Boxes.

5. Conduit bodies.

6. Bushings.

7. Locknuts.

8. Knockout closures.


A. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA): Conform to NEMA OS 1

"Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports", for sheet-steel

outlet boxes, device boxes cover, and box supports. Conform to NEMA FB 1,

"Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies";

for fittings, cast metal boxes and conduit bodies.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", for construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and

fittings.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are

UL-listed and labeled, and conform to UL 50, "Cabinets and Boxes", UL 514A,

"Metallic Outlet Boxes", UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes", and UL

514C, "Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings. Submit shop

drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1.04 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Pump Station 32





PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Product Selection: Select boxes of types appropriate for each use and location.

1. Select covers for boxes of types appropriate for each use and location.

2. All switch plates and receptacle covers shall match the box that the plate or

cover are to be installed on.

3. Provide gaskets for covers of boxes in damp locations or where immersion

may occur.

2.02 FABRICATED MATERIALS

A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide PVC/Fiberglass enclosures, NEMA 12, outlet boxes.

1. Masonry Walls: 4-inch tall x 2 1/8 – inch wide x 2 ½ - inch deep

2. General use: 4 – inch square by 2 1/8 – inch deep

3. Hung devices: 4 – inch square by 2 1/8 – inch deep rated for the load

supported.

4. Two or More Ganged devices: 4 – inch tall x 2 ½ - inch deep by width as

required.

5. Exposed: 4 inch square by 2 1/8 – inch deep square.

B. Provide boxes of increased depth where required by the project. Coordinate spacing

of outlet boxes in fire rated walls.

C. Construction with stamped knockouts in the back and sides.

D. Provide threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers

and wiring devices. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories

as required for each installation, including covers, mounting brackets, hangers,

extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet

boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements

of individual wiring situations. Interior accessories may be galvanized.

E. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant PVC/Fiberglass

weatherproof outlet boxes, of types, shapes, and sizes, including depth of boxes, with

threaded conduit ends.

Pump Station 32



F. Interior Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide PVC/Fiberglass junction and pull boxes,

NEMA 12, with screw-on covers and of types, shapes, and sizes, to suit each

respective location and installation.

1. Conform to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and to UL 50 for boxes

over 100 cubic inches volume, except as modified below.

2. Where necessary for boxes to provide a rigid assembly, provide integral

structural bracing.

G. Junction and Pull Boxes, Below Grade: Provide junction and pull boxes, NEMA

6/3R, with screw-on covers and of types, shapes, and sizes, to suit each respective

location and installation.

H. Conduit Bodies: Interior conduit bodies shall be PVC/Fiberglass construction.

Exterior conduit bodies shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel.

I. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide knockout closures, conduit

locknuts, conduit bushings, and offset connectors of types and sizes to suit respective

uses and installation.

J. All hardware to be corrosion-resistant. Interior hardware may be galvanized. All

exterior hardware shall be stainless steel.


3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS, GENERAL

A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with

wire/cable and raceway installation work, and with the work of other trades.

B. Knockout Caps: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where

blanks have been removed.

C. Anchoring: Support and fasten boxes securely.

D. Sizes: Provide boxes of sizes adequate to meet NFPA 70 volume requirements, but in

no case smaller than sizes indicated.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES

A. Coordination: Verify location of outlet boxes with other equipment.

B. Grounding: Provide each box to which a device is to be attached with a grounding

terminal, consisting of either a green-colored washer-in-head machine screw, not

smaller than No. 10-32, screwed into a tapped hole or a grounding bushing attached

Pump Station 32



to one of the conduits.

C. Mounting Height: The "mounting height" of a wall-mounted outlet box is defined as

the height from the finished floor to the horizontal centerline of the cover plate for

receptacles and top of the outlet box for switches.

D. Where mounting heights are not indicated or where heights and locations interfere

with mechanical, architectural or structural features, install outlet boxes in an

approved location, without additional cost.

E. Where mounting heights for switches mounted in masonry walls shall be 46 inches or

top of coursing not to exceed 48 inches. Do not mount outlet box in the mortar joint.

F. Vertical Axis: Except as otherwise indicated, mount outlet boxes for switches with

the long axis vertical.

1. Mount boxes for receptacles vertically.

2. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal.

I. Prohibited Work:

1. Do not use sectional (gangable) boxes.

2. Do not use device plates as covers for boxes in exposed locations.

3. Do not use round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box,

which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with

locknut or bushing on rounded surface.

K. Protection: Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of debris. Thoroughly clean

foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed.

L. Threaded Hubs: At the following locations use threaded hub type boxes with

gasketed weatherproof covers:

1. Exterior locations.

2. Where installed on unfinished walls. Cover gaskets may be omitted in dry

locations.

3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere.

3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Installation: For installation of junction and pull boxes, conform to NFPA 70 and the

following:

1. For boxes exposed to rain or installed in wet locations use weatherproof type.

Pump Station 32



2. Do not exceed 6 conductors entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box.

B. Number of conductors in any pull or junction box including equipment grounding

conductors shall not exceed the maximum allowed by NEC 314.

C. Supports: Provide in each box, sufficient clamps, grids, or devices to which cables

are secured in neat and orderly fashion permitting ready identification.

D. Adjacent Boxes: Locate adjacent boxes a minimum of 2 feet from any other pull or

junction box.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16135-1

SECTION 16135 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of wiring device work is indicated on drawings and schedules, by

requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of electrical wiring devices specified in this Section include the

following:

1. Receptacles.

2. Ground-fault circuit interrupters.

3. Switches.

4. Wallplates.

5. Plugs and connectors.

C. Related Sections: Refer to other sections of Division 16 for the following:

1. Wire and Cables.

2 Boxes.


Codes: Provide wiring devices conforming to the following:

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Provide plugs and receptacle

devices constructed in accordance with ANSI C73, "Attachment Plugs and

Receptacles, Dimensions of".

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Construct and install

wiring devices in accordance with requirements of IEEE 241, "Recommended

Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings".

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide wiring devices

constructed and configured in accordance with the requirements of:

1. WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

2. WD 2 Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps.

3. WD 6 Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring

devices.


October 2016 16135-2

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide wiring devices, which are UL

listed, and comply with the requirements of:

1. 20 General- Use Snap Switches.

2. 49 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.

3. 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes.

4. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes.

5. 514C Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.

6. 943 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. Submit shop drawings 30-days

after date of notice to proceed.


A. Delivery and Handling: Handle wiring devices carefully to prevent damage. Do

not install damaged wiring devices, replace with new.

B. Storage: Store wiring devices in a clean and dry place. Protect from dirt,

construction debris, and physical damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRING DEVICES

Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for

applications indicated and which comply with NEMA WD 1.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide specification grade duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-

wire a grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground

terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20 A, 125 V, with

metal plaster ears, design for side wiring with four captively held binding screws

and provisions for back wiring from eight separate metal wiring clamps, with

spring loaded, screw activated pressure plate, with NEMA configuration 5-20R

unless otherwise indicated. Self-grounding or automatic type grounding

receptacles are not acceptable in lieu of receptacles with separate grounding screw

lugs and a direct, green insulated conductor connection to the equipment

grounding system.

B. Single Receptacles: Provide specification grade single receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire,

grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20 A, 125 V, with


October 2016 16135-3

metal plaster ears, design for side and back wiring with spring loaded, screw

activated pressure plate, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Ground Fault Interrupter: Provide termination type ground fault circuit

interrupters, with duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected receptacles

on single circuit, and installed in an outlet box without adaptor. Provide

grounding type UL rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20 A, 125 V, 60 Hz; solid-state

ground fault sensing and signaling with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level,

equip with NEMA configuration 5-20R.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof

PVC cover plate and shall be listed as "raintight while in use".

2.03 SWITCHES

A. General: Provide specification grade switches with green hexagonal equipment

ground screw, as indicated on the drawings conforming to NEMA WD 1 and to

the following:

B. Snap Switches: Provide specification grade, general duty flush single pole toggle

AC quiet switches, 20 A, 120-277 V, with mounting yoke insulated from

mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle and back or side-wired screw

terminals. Provide captive or terminal type terminal screws not smaller than No. 8.

Provide back-wired devices with separate access holes for wiring.

2.04 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wallplates: Provide wall plate for each switch, receptacle, and special purpose

outlet. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide multi-gang outlet plates for

multi-gang boxes. Wall plates shall be in accordance with UL 514A, UL 514B,

UL 514C, and as follows unless otherwise noted.

B. Cover plates for flush mounted wiring devices shall be stainless steel, standard

size, single or ganged as shown on the drawings. Cover plate mounting screws

shall be slotted head oval screws and shall match the finish and material of the

plate, and shall be furnished with the plate by the plate manufacturer.

C. Switch and receptacle cover plates on exposed work shall be galvanized cast

ferrous metal or Feraloy, standard size, and shall be single or ganged as indicated

on the drawings.

D. Exterior mounted switch and receptacle plates, and those noted to be

weatherproof, shall be gasketed weatherproof PVC cover plates, standard size,

single or ganged as indicated on the drawings, and shall be listed as "raintight while


October 2016 16135-4

in use".


3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and NEMA "Standard of

Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project

requirements. Where not indicated, mount switch adjacent to latch jamb of door.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes

and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with

other work.

C. Boxes: Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes, which are clean; free from

excess building materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Receptacles: Install receptacles with centerline located 18-inches above the

finished floor, unless otherwise noted or specified.

E. Work Sequence: Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

F. Switches: Install switches with centerline located 48 inches above finished floor

unless otherwise noted or specified.

3.02 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES

Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Owner's representative regarding

proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of substantial completion, replace

those items, which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.

3.03 GROUNDING

Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 TESTING

Test wiring devices for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits prior to energizing

circuitry. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to

energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16190-1

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Provide support for all electrical items using supports, anchors, sleeves,

seals, fastenings, and other components. The extent of supporting devices is

covered by this Section, the drawings and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic

Requirements".

B. Types: Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, seals and fastenings specified in this

Section include the following:

1. Clevis hangers.

2. Riser clamps.

3. C-clamps.

4. I-beam clamps.

5. One-hole conduit straps.

6. Two-hole conduit straps.

7. Round steel rods.

8. Lead expansion anchors.

9. Toggle bolts.

10. Wall and floor seals.

C. Equipment: Supports, sleeves, seals and fasteners furnished as part of factory-

fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other

sections.


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70 as

applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Conform to UL listings and labeling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. PRODUCTS

B. General: Provide supporting devices with manufacturer's standard materials,

designed and constructed in accordance with published product information, for a

complete installation and as herein specified.


October 2016 16190-2

C. Corrosion Resistance: Provide all supports, support hardware, and fasteners hot-

dipped galvanized or cadmium plated.

D. For Raceway Supports: Provide manufacturer's standard supports including clevis

hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling

trapeze, wall brackets and spring steel clamps.

E. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types, sizes, and materials indicated with the

following construction features:

1. 1/2-inch lead expansion anchors approximately 38 pounds weight per 100

units.

2. 3/16-inch by 4-inch springhead toggle bolts approximately 5 pounds weight

per 100 units.

F. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and materials

indicated with the following features:

1. Smoke and fire stop seals shall have a UL fire rating of where installed in

fire rated construction or as indicated.

2. Seal between sleeve and pipe where a fire rated seal is not required or

specified. Weatherproof seals required for penetrations thru exterior walls.

Seals capable of withstanding a corrosive environment and sulfide gases are

required for penetrations into the wet well.

3. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for mounting

and supporting electrical equipment. Fabricate strut from 16-gauge hot-dip

galvanized steel sheet, 9/16-inch diameter holes, and 8-inches on center on

top surface. Fittings shall mate with the U-channel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Compliance: Install hangers, sleeves, seals, U-channel supports and fasteners as

indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with

requirements of NFPA 70 and American National Standards Institute

(ANSI)/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) for installation of

supporting devices.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and

wiring work.

C. Raceway Supports:

1. Provide raceway support meeting the requirements of these specifications


October 2016 16190-3

and NFPA 70. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations. For each

support provide strength equal to the maximum weight of the present load

and all future raceways for which the support provides space, times a safety

factor. Except as otherwise indicated, use a safety factor greater than four

where necessary to provide a minimum safety allowance of 200 pounds.

Provide additional support strength where required to prevent distortion of

raceway during wire pulling.

2. Provide individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers, and riser clamps

as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments,

and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly, and for securing hanger

rods and conduits.

3. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal raceways to be

supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible.

D. Exposed conduits installed on the interior surface of exterior building walls shall be

spaced off the wall surface a minimum of 1/4-inch using "clamp-backs" or strut.

E. Support individual horizontal conduits and EMT 1-1/2-inch size and smaller by

either one-hole pipe straps or separate pipe hangers, use separate pipe hangers for

larger sizes. Use steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single

conduits or EMT. Unless otherwise indicated, do not use wire as a means of

support.

F. Except as otherwise indicated, space supports for metallic and non-metallic

raceways in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the requirements

of the NFPA 70.

G. Provide support for exposed or concealed raceway as close as practical to and not

exceeding one foot from an unsupported box or access fitting. In horizontal runs,

a support at a box or access fitting may be omitted when the box or access fitting

is independently supported and the raceway termination is not made with a close

nipple or threadless box connector.

H. In vertical runs, provide such support that the load produced by the weight of the

raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports,

with no weight load on raceway terminations or conductor terminals.

I. Miscellaneous Supports:

1. Provide supports for all miscellaneous electrical components as required to

produce the same safety allowances as specified for raceway supports

above. Provide metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards,

disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc.

2. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be

separately supported except where used for fixture support and to the


October 2016 16190-4

extent necessary to prevent movement during wire installation; support

sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers.

Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides

of the box and support the raceway with an approved type fastener not

more than 24-inches from the box. When penetrating reinforced-concrete

members, avoid cutting any reinforcing steel.

J. Cable Supports:

1. Install in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Spacing not to exceed NFPA 70 tabulation for spacing of conductor

supports.

3. Allow adequate slack in conductors to prevent any stress on terminations.

Take into consideration conductor thermal contraction.

K. Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated securely fasten all electrical items and their

supporting hardware including, but not limited to, conduits, raceways,

cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, wall-mounted

transformers, boxes, disconnect switches and control components to the

building structure.

2. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; by toggle

bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on

concrete or brick; by machine screws; welded threaded studs, or spring-

tension clamps on steel work. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge

and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion

bolts or machine or wood screws in special circumstances. Do not weld

conduits or pipe straps to steel structures.

3. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1-1/2-inches in reinforced concrete

beams or to a depth of more than 3/4-inch in concrete joints shall not cut

the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

4. Loads applied to any fastener shall not exceed one-fifth of the proof test

load. Use vibration and shock-resistant fasteners.

L. Sleeve Seals:

1. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form

watertight and smoketight seal.

2. Sleeves: Where installed in slabs or partitions completely fill the void

between the sleeve and masonry with expanding cement grout.


October 2016 16190-5

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16195-1

SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of electrical identification work required by this Section is indicated

in this section, on the drawings or where specified in other sections of Division 16.

B. Types: Types of electrical identification work specified in this section include the

following:

1. Identification of electrical power, control and communication raceways,

cables, and conductors.

2. Equipment labels and signs.

C. Related Sections: Refer to other sections for the following:

1. Electrical Basic Requirements.


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code" requirements for identification and for provision of warning and

caution signs for wiring and equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and

products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products

of categories and types required for each application.


October 2016 16195-2

B. Furnish and install engraved laminated phenolic nameplates for all safety switches,

panelboards, starters, and other electrical equipment supplied for the project for

identification of equipment, controlled, served, phase, voltage, etc. Nameplates

shall be securely attached to equipment with self-tapping stainless steel screws,

riveted or bolted and shall identify equipment controlled, attached, etc. Letters

shall be approximately 1/2-inch high minimum for identification and 1/4-inch high

minimum for other descriptions. Embossed, self-adhesive plastic tape is not

acceptable for marking equipment. Nameplate material colors shall be:

1. Blue surface with white core for 120/208 volt equipment.

C. All empty conduit runs and conduit with conductors for future use shall be

identified for use and shall indicate where they terminate. Identification shall be by

tags with wire attached to conduit or outlet.

D. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Provide vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive

wrap-around cable/conductor markers with pre-printed numbers and letters for

designation purposes.

E. Cable Ties: Provide fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self locking nylon

cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50 pounds minimum tensile strength and

suitable for a temperature range from -50 degrees F. to +350 degrees F. Provide

ties in specified colors when used for color coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical

identification work, with corresponding designations, specified or indicated

on drawings. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as approved in

submittals, as required by code, or as recommended by manufacturers.

2. Install products covered by this section where indicated on drawings or

specified. Install products covered by this section where required by NFPA

70, whether or not otherwise indicated. Install products in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NFPA 70.

3. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require finish,

install identification after completion of finish work.

B. Panel Identification


October 2016 16195-3

1. All electrical and instrumentation panels shall have legend plates that denote

the following information:

a. EQUIPMENT NAME (ex. WATER PUMP CONTROL #1)

b. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (ex. FP-50-10-1)

c. SOURCE BREAKER IDENTIFICATION (ex. FED FROM MCC-4)

2. All devices that have more than one source of voltage will have a similar

plastic laminate label, red w/white lettering that clearly states the presence of

additional voltage sources. It also shall be secured to the panel in a similar

fashion as the previously mentioned legend plates.

3. All terminal devices such as solenoids, limit switches, level probes,

thermostats, etc. shall have labels made of material identical to that previously

mentioned. They also shall be black w/white lettering and secured with 30#

stainless steel beaded chain or attached with an appropriate adhesive.

4. All lettering shall be engraved block font, 3/8” high.

C. Panel Items

1. Lens colors shall be “green” for run, open, or on; “red” for stopped, off or

alarms for vfd’s, pumps, motors; “amber” for high and low liquid level

alarms.

2. Pilot lights shall be full voltage LED cluster style.

3. The local stop pushbutton will be a red head maintained type device and

local start button will be black head momentary type devices.

4. Terminal strips shall be provided for all panels and shall be of the flanged

fork or ring lug type suitable for No.12 AWG stranded wire minimum.

Provide 25 percent spare terminals in each panel

D. Tagging or Labeling Conductors: Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards, shop

drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established

identification schemes for the facility electrical work.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32



SECTION 16410 - PUMP CONTROL PANEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope

1. Furnish and install a complete Pump Control Panel (PCP) and related

auxiliary control components for the sewage pump station to provide for

control of the two (2) raw sewage pumps and other equipment. The PCP

shall be complete and include all components and wiring as shown on the

Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Sections:

1. 16010 – Electrical Basic Requirements

2. 16120 – Wires and Cables

3. 16450 – Grounding

4. 16470 – Panelboards

5. 16475 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers (PCPB)

6. 16690 – Variable Frequency Drives

7. 16920 – Programmabel Logic Controller

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The most current edition in effect for the publications listed below form a part of

this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the

text by the basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

a. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code

b. ANSI C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering

c. ANSI C12.4 - Mechanical Demand Registers

d. ANSI C12.10 - Electromechanical Watthour Meters

e. ANSI C39.1 - Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating

Instruments

Pump Station 32



2. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a. ASTM B 8 - Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft

b. ASTM D 709 - Laminated Thermosetting Materials

3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

a. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Industrial, Scientific,

and Medical Equipment

4. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS,

INC. (IEEE)

a. IEEE 100 - Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms

b. IEEE ANSI/IEEE C57.13 - Instrument Transformers

5. INSTRUMENTATION, SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATION SOCIETY

(ISA)

a. ANSI/ISA 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification

6. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION

(NEMA)

a. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case

Switches

b. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

c. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems: General

Requirements

d. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers,

Contactors, Overload Relays Rated Not More Than 2,000 Volts

AC or 750 DC

e. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Control and Systems Factory Built

Assemblies

f. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks

g. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures

h. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators

Pump Station 32



i. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)

7. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

8. UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES (UL)

a. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

b. UL 83 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables

c. UL 198B - Class H Fuses

d. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment

e. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors

f. UL 486E - Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum

and/or Copper Conductors

g. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches,

and Circuit Breaker Enclosures

h. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment

i. UL 510 - Insulating Tape

j. UL 512 - Fuseholders

k. UL 854 - Service Entrance Cables

l. UL 1004 - Electric Motors


A. All PCP components shall be of the most current and proven design.

Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features but do not purport to

cover all details entering into the design of the PCP. The components provided

by the Panel Supplier shall be compatible with the functions required and shall

form a complete working system. The PCP shall be UL listed as a complete

assembly in accordance with UL-508.

B. Workmanship

1. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70,

recommendations of the manufacturer, and as shown.

Pump Station 32



1.04 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, unless more

stringent requirements are indicated herein or shown.

B. Coordination:

1. The drawings indicate the extent and the general location and arrangement

of equipment. The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the

work and verify all dimensions in the field so that the equipment shall be

properly located and readily accessible. Equipment and materials shall be

located to avoid interference with mechanical or structural features. If any

conflicts occur necessitating departures from the drawings, details of and

reasons for departures shall be submitted to the Owner and approved prior

to implementing any change.

C. Standard Products

1. Material and equipment shall be new and of the minimum quality

specified and shall be a standard product of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of the product and shall essentially duplicate

items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 5 years prior to bid

opening. Used, recycled or rehabilitated material or equipment will not be

acceptable.

D. Identification Nameplates

1. Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be

permanently marked with an identification name to identify the equipment

by type or function and specific unit number as indicated. Unless

otherwise specified, identification nameplates shall be made of laminated

phenolic in accordance with ASTM D 709 with black outer layers and a

white core. Edges shall be chamfered. Plates shall be fastened with black

finished round head drive screws or approved nonadhesive metal

fasteners. When the nameplate is to be installed on an irregular shaped

object, the Contractor shall devise an approved support suitable for the

application and ensure the proper installation of the supports and

nameplates. In all instances, the nameplate shall be installed in a

conspicuous location. At the option of the Contractor, the equipment

manufacturer's standard embossed nameplate material with black paint

filled letters may be furnished in lieu of laminated phenolic. The

following equipment, as a minimum, shall be provided with identification

nameplates:

Minimum 1/4 inch Minimum 1/8 inch

High Letters High Letters

Starters Control Power Transformers

Equipment Enclosures Control and Pilot Devices

Pump Station 32



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals”. Submit

shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog data, shop drawings,

certifications and installation instructions for the following:

a. Pump Control Panel and its Associated Components

b. Circuit Breakers

c. Switches

d. Relays

e. Fuses

f. Instruments

g. Enclosures

h. Starters, Automatic Control Devices

i. Programmable Logic Controller

j. Meters

k. Variable Frequency Drives

l. Float Switches

m. Gauges

n. Wet Well Level Sensing System

o. 24v backup power supplies

p. Discharge Pressure Transducer

q. Flow Meter

r. Proximity Switches

2. Shop Drawings

a. Contractor to submit full drawings containing complete wiring and

schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate

Pump Station 32



that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as

a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of

equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other

parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and

operation.

b. Submit detail drawings consisting of equipment drawings,

illustrations, schedules, instructions, diagrams, and other

information necessary to define the installation. Detail drawings

shall show the rating of items and systems and how the

components of an item and system are assembled, function

together, and how they will be installed on the project. Data and

drawings for component parts of an item or system shall be

coordinated and submitted as a unit. Data and drawings shall be

coordinated and included in a single submission. Multiple

submissions for the same equipment or system are not acceptable

except where prior approval has been obtained from the Owner. In

such cases, a list of data to be submitted later shall be included

with the first submission. Detail drawings shall show physical

arrangement, construction details, connections, finishes, materials

used in fabrication, provisions for conduit entrance, access

requirements for installation and maintenance, physical size,

electrical characteristics, foundation and support details, and

equipment weight. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and/or

dimensioned. Optional items shall be clearly identified as included

or excluded. Detail drawings shall as a minimum include:

i. Pump control panel layout.

ii. Single line electrical diagrams including primary, metering,

sensing, and relaying, control wiring, and control logic.

iii. Electrical drawings including single line diagrams, and

schematics or elementary diagrams of each electrical

system; internal wiring and field connection diagrams of

each electrical device when published by the manufacturer;

wiring diagrams of cabinets, panels, units, or separate

mountings; interconnection diagrams that show the wiring

between separate components of assemblies; field

connection diagrams that show the termination of wiring

routed between separate items of equipment; internal

wiring diagrams of equipment showing wiring as actually

provided for this project. Field wiring connections shall be

clearly identified.

c. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by

the Contractor, complete details of such departures, including

Pump Station 32



changes in related portions of the project and the reasons why,

shall be submitted with the detail drawings. Approved departures

shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Test Reports

a. Factory Test Reports.

i. Contractor to provide six copies of the information

described below in 8 1/2 x 11 inch binders having a

minimum of 5 rings from which material may readily be

removed and replaced, including a separate section for each

test. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers

with tabs.

(1) A list of equipment used, with calibration

certifications.

(2) A copy of measurements taken.

(3) The dates of testing.

(4) The equipment and values to be verified.

(5) The conditions specified for the test.

(6) The test results, signed and dated.

(7) A description of adjustments made.

b. Operational Testing Plan

i. Detailed testing protocol at least 30 days prior to scheduled

operational tests to demonstrate pumping system

operational tests. The protocol shall describe all tests to be

conducted and the inter-relationships thereof. Operational

testing will not be scheduled or performed until the

contractors test plan is approved.

c. Operational Testing Report

i. A detailed operational testing and equipment adjustment

report within 30 days of completion of successful

operational tests and prior to final acceptance testing.

Performance test reports in booklet form showing all

operational tests performed to adjust each component and

all operational tests performed to prove compliance with

the specified performance criteria, upon completion and

Pump Station 32



testing of the installed systems. Each test report shall

indicate the final position of all control functions.

ii. Submit the information described below in 8 1/2 x 11 inch

binders, including a separate section for each test. Sections

shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs.

(1) Contractor’s certification that the operational tests

were satisfactorily completed, all deficiencies were

corrected and successfully retested, and that the

pump station is ready for Final Acceptance Testing.


certifications.



(5) The equipment and values to be verified including

acceptable reference values.




(9) Final position of controls and device settings.

d. Final Acceptance Test Plan

i. Detailed testing protocol at least 14 days prior to scheduled

final acceptance testing to demonstrate pumping system

operations and compliance with the project requirements.

The protocol shall describe all tests to be conducted and the

inter-relationships thereof. The final acceptance testing

will not be scheduled or performed until the contractors test

plan is approved.

e. Final Acceptance Testing Report

i. A detailed final acceptance testing and equipment

adjustment report within 30 days of completion of

successful final acceptance tests and prior to final

acceptance. Performance test reports in booklet form

showing all field tests performed to adjust each component

and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the

Pump Station 32



specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing

of the installed systems. Each test report shall indicate the

final position of all control functions.

ii. Submit the information described below in 8 1/2 x 11 inch

binders, including a separate section for each test. Sections

shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs.

(1) Contractor’s certification that the Final Acceptance

Testing was satisfactorily completed, all

deficiencies were corrected and successfully

retested, and that the pump station is ready for

conveyance to the Owner and operation.


certifications.



(5) The equipment and values to be verified including

acceptable reference values.




(9) Final position of controls and device settings.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data

a. Data Package

i. Submit five (5) copies of an Operation and Maintenance

(O&M) Manual for the PCP in accordance with Section

01300. The O&M manual shall be complete in all respects

and shall include all information provided in the shop

drawings plus O&M literature, Warranty, As-built wiring

diagrams, and copies of the final PLC program.

5. Closeout Submittals

a. As Built Drawings.

i. The as built drawings shall be a record of the construction

as installed. The drawings shall include all the information

Pump Station 32



shown on the contract drawings, deviations, modifications,

and changes from the contract drawings and corrected

wiring diagrams of the control panel submitted under the

shop drawing phase; however minor. The as built drawings

shall be kept at the job site and updated daily. The as built

drawings shall be a full sized set of prints marked to reflect

all deviations, changes, and modifications. The as built

drawings shall be complete and show the location, size,

dimensions, part identification, and other information.

Additional sheets may be added. The as built drawings

shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by

the Contractor and the Owner prior to the submission of

each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work,

the Contractor shall submit three full sized sets of the

marked prints to the City of Portsmouth for approval. If

upon review, the as built drawings are found to contain

errors and/or omissions, they will be returned to the

Contractor for correction. The Contractor shall correct and

return the as built drawings to the Owner for approval

within ten calendar days from the time the drawings are

returned to the Contractor. Submit the following items

with the “As-Built”:

ii. Electronic copy of PLC program and programming

software on compact disk.

iii. Three hard copies of PLC program.

1.06 WARRANTY AND FULL SERVICE CONTRACT

A. The controls manufacturer shall warrant the control system being provided to the

Owner against defects in workmanship and materials for five (5) years beginning

with final acceptance of the equipment under normal use, operation, and service.

The warranty shall be in printed form and shall apply to all units, and shall

complement the 5 year full service contract. The 5-year full service contract with

warranty shall include preventative maintenance, all parts and labor, and training

(minimum 12 hours: 4 hours at installation, 4 hours at start-up, and 4 hours after

start-up to check operation) of City field operations personnel on proper usage of

equipment.

B. The warranty shall be in printed form and submitted with the O&M Manuals.

C. All standard manufacturer warranties of control panel components shall be

provided in writing with a summary of each component’s warranty information.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL: (SPARE PARTS)

A. Provide to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts:

Pump Station 32



1. Two spare sets of control power fuses.

2. One spare of each type of indicating light lamps.

3. One spare of each type of relays.

4. One spare cooling fan.

5. One spare of each type of float.

6. One spare level transducer.

7. One spare proximity switch.

8. One spare pressure transducer.

B. Package each part individually or in sets in moisture-proof containers or

wrappings, clearly labeled with part name and manufacturer's part/stock number;

submit, in writing, storage procedures for spare parts to ensure adequate

protection after delivery.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CABLES AND WIRES

A. Conductors for control, alarm, and signal circuits, shall be stranded. All

conductors shall be copper. Power and control wiring shall be run in separate

conduits.

1. Insulation

a. Unless indicated otherwise, or required by NFPA 70, power wires

shall be 600 volt, Type THWN, THHN, or THW conforming to

UL 83 control and signal circuits shall be Type MTW STR,

conforming to UL 83.

2. Bonding Conductors

a. ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire.

2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded case circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. Circuit

breakers may be installed in control centers.

Pump Station 32



B. Construction

1. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any

position. Lug shall be listed for copper conductors only in accordance

with UL 486E. Multi pole circuit breakers shall be of the common trip

type having a single operating handle such that an overload or short circuit

on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. All circuit

breakers shall have a quick make, quick break overcenter toggle type

mechanism, and the handle mechanism shall be trip free to prevent

holding the contacts closed against a short circuit or sustained overload.

All circuit breaker handles shall assume a position between "ON" and

"OFF" when tripped automatically. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

Circuit breakers shall be bolted type.

C. Ratings

1. Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. The

interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the

available short circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit breaker

and correspond to the UL listed integrated short circuit current rating

specified for the control center. Molded case circuit breakers shall have

nominal voltage ratings, maximum continuous current ratings, and

maximum short circuit interrupting ratings in accordance with NEMA AB

1.

D. Thermal Magnetic Trip Elements

1. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers shall be provided as shown. Automatic

operation shall be obtained by means of thermal magnetic tripping devices

located in each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit

protection. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and

accessible from the front of all circuit breakers.

2.03 CONNECTORS, WIRE PRESSURE

A. UL 486A, for use with copper conductors.

2.04 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

A. UL 467.

2.05 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 12 gasketed unless otherwise specified. Cabinet shall be formed 12 gauge

steel with smooth, continuously welded seams without knockouts, cutouts or

holes. Doors shall supported with heavy gauge continuous hinges, secured with a

three point latch and operated with a key locking automotive type handle. Latch

rods shall be provided equipped with rollers for easier door closing. Finish shall

Pump Station 32



be smooth ANSI 61 gray powder coating on the outside, with white powder

coating on the inside. Maximum enclosure dimension shall be 72”H x 54”W x

18”D with two 26” doors. Enclosure shall be a manufactured by Hammond

Manufacturing, P/N 1418ZW18 or approved equal

2.06 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES AND FUSEHOLDERS

A. Fuses, Low Voltage Cartridge Type

1. NEMA FU 1.

B. Fuses, Class H

1. UL 198B.

C. Fuseholders

1. UL 512.

2.07 INSTRUMENTS, ELECTRICAL INDICATING

A. ANSI C39.1.

2.08 AUXILIARY CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Level Sensing System, Solid State (4-20mA)

1. The liquid level sensing system shall consist of one (1) KPSI Series 750

industrial submersible pressure transducer. Device shall utilize a 4-20mA

DC process signal to communicate with the programmable logic controller

(PLC) and RTU. Device shall be approved and listed for use in Class 1,

Division 1 hazardous locations. Device shall be capable of supporting a

minimum of seven (7) setpoint levels as shown on the contract drawings.

Device shall be provided complete with waterproof shielded cabling from

mounting location back to PLC location without splices and vapor filtering

system. Device shall be provided with one (1) conduit fitting adapter for

installation in conduit within the wet well. Coordinate with specified unit.

2. A 4-20ma signal shall be sent to the SCADA system for remote

monitoring of the wet well level at the master SCADA system location at

550 North Backriver Road.

3. Wet well level shall be displayed on the operator interface terminal.

B. Float Switches

1. Float type liquid level sensors shall be provided as shown on the drawings.

The float switches shall be Connery 2902-B3-S2-C1or approved equal.

Pump Station 32



2. Furnish and install one (1) non-mercury float switch in the valve vault to

detect high water level alarm.

3. Furnish and install one (1) non-mercury float switch in the motor room to

detect high water level alarm.

4. Furnish and install three (3) non-mercury float switch in the wet well to

detect a high wet well level and low wet well level condition. The high

water alarm float switch shall serve as the back-up pumps start signal in

the event the level transducer fails. The third float switch shall serve as the

back-up pumps stop signal.

C. Discharge Pressure Sensor

1. Provide discharge pressure sensor, gauge, and transducer mounted on the

discharge force main to continuously monitor discharge pressure

conditions. The force main pressure sensing system shall consist of a

Dwyer or KPSI Series 28, (0-125 psi range) industrial pressure transducer,

and a 0-125 psi range liquid filled pressure gauge measuring in increments

of 5 psi, set on a Red Valve.

2. A 4-20ma signal shall be sent to the SCADA system for remote

monitoring of the discharge line pressure at the master SCADA system

location at North Backriver Road.

3. Force main pressure shall be displayed on the operator interface terminal.

D. Proximity Switches: Furnish and install a proximity switch on each pump check

valve to indicate whether the check valve has lifted off its seat. The check valve

proximity switches shall be wired to the programmable controller and used for

flow fail monitoring. Flow fail shall be displayed on the operator interface

terminal. The check valve proximity switches shall be the inductive type, stainless

steel, cylinder shielded, vibration and shock resistant, 12-24 VDC. Provide

stainless steel mounting brackets, jam nuts and washers. The check valve

proximity switches shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. The check

valve proximity switches shall be Omron #E2BS08KS02WPB12, or approved

equal.

E. Lock-Out Stop Push Button Stations:

1, Furnish and install a lock-out stop push button station at each pump. The

lock-out stop push button stations shall consist of a stop push button with

padlocking attachment mounted in a corrosion resistant NEMA 4X non-metallic

enclosure. The lock-out stop push buttons shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800H-

1HA4RLW, or approved equal.

2. Each stop push button shall be furnished with two contacts. One contact

shall be wired to the VFD control panel and the other contact shall be a logic level

Pump Station 32



contact wired to the programmable controller. Pressing the stop push button for

the lead pump will index the lag pump to become the lead pump and start if called

for.

F. Magnetic Door Switch: Furnish and install a magnetic door switch at the station

entry door to detect that someone has entered the pumping station. The magnetic

door switch shall be hermetically sealed and shall be Sentrol, or approved equal.

G. Flow Meter

1. Magnetic Type Flow Meter:

a. Provide magnetic type flow meter on the discharge force main to

continuously monitor discharge flow rate. Meter shall be capable

of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04

and 40.0 ft/s. Full scale continuously adjustable between -30 to 30

ft/s. Output shall include two 4-20 mA signal for instantaneous

flow (gallons per minute) and a frequency output for totalized

flow.

b. Provide flow meter signal converter to operate on 120-volt single

phase AC power source. Provide digital output card for

connection of station flow to the SCADA system. Meter shall be

Rosemount 8712/8700 series, Krohne IFC 4000 or approved equal.

Provide signal to the SCADA system for totalized flow and

instantaneous flow (gpm).

c. The flow meter sensor in the valve shall be furnished with

corrosion resistant coating and rated for IP68 submersible use.

Submersible type cable shall be factory furnished with the flow

meter, continuous from the valve vault to the flow meter signal

converter.

2. Influent and station flow measurements shall be displayed on the operator

interface terminal.

3. Connect to an analog output to the SCADA system.

H. Timer: Furnish and install a timer to switch pumps in the case the flow is such

that one pump can keep up with the flow. The timer shall cycle the second pump

“on” and the working pump “off” when the maximum run time of the working

pump is reached.

Pump Station 32



2.09 PUMP CONTROLS PANEL COMPONENTS

A. General

1. NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 3 and NEMA ICS 6, and UL

508 and UL 845.

B. Automatic Control Devices

1. Direct Control

a. Automatic control devices (such as float or pressure switches)

which control the starting and stopping of motors directly shall be

designed for that purpose.

2. Pilot Relay Control

a. Where the automatic control device (such as float or pressure

switches) does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be

used, with the automatic control device actuating the pilot control

circuit.

3. Manual/Automatic Selection

a. Where combination manual and automatic control is specified and

the automatic control device actuates the pilot control circuit of a

starter, the starter shall be provided with a three position selector

switch marked HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC.

C. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the normal automatic

regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the HAND

position; all safety control devices, such as low or high pressure cutouts, loss of

prime, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor

control circuit in both the HAND and the Automatic positions of the selector

switch. Control circuit connections to any HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch or

to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance

with wiring diagram approved by the Owner unless as shown on the drawings.

All controls shall be 120 volts or less unless otherwise indicated.

D. Variable frequency drive system for motors shall be as specified in Section

16690.

E. Programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be as specified in Section 16920.

1. The PLC shall perform automatic control and monitoring functions for the

pump station. The PLC shall be Allen Bradley Micrologix 1400 or

approved equal, with input and output modules as required to perform all

Pump Station 32



specified process control and monitoring functions with at least four of

each type of I/O available as spares.

2. Liquid level control of the station’s pumps and pump motors shall be

normally controlled via the station’s solid-state, liquid level sensing

transducer (4-20mA). Should this transducer fail and the liquid level rises

to the high level float switch, a high water alarm shall be transmitted by

the float switch to the RTU.

a. The PLC shall be programmed to utilize the high level and

intermediate wet well float switches to start and stop the pumps in

the event the level transducer fails.

3. The PLC shall be programmed to calculate the influent flow and displayed

on the operator interface terminal.

F. Provide a 10” minimum VGA color touch screen operator interface terminal. The

operator interface terminal shall be powered from 24vdc. Connection to PLC shall

be Ethernet based. Memory shall be large enough to contain at least 10 pages of

pump control modes with operator entered set points. The VGA color screen shall

display individual pump flow, combined flow, wet well level, discharge line

pressure, and all alarms and supervisory points. The operator interface terminal

shall be Allen-Bradley Panel-view Plus 600 or approved equal. Provide licensed

copy of the program and programming software on CD to the City’s Public

Works, Wastewater Operations Department.

2.10 LAPTOP COMPUTER

A. Provide a laptop computer with interface connections allowing connections to be

compatible with the pump control panel PLC, VFD, RTU, in-house computer,

data terminal, or modem.

1. The laptop shall be furnished with the following:

a. 8GB RAM.

b. 1TB SATA hard drive.

c. 15.6” FHD (1920 x 1080) anti-glare LED-backlit display.

d. Tray load DVD/CD drive.

e. Wireless 802.11ac + Bluetooth 4.2, Dual Band 2.4&5 GHz.

f. 7th Generation Intel® Core™ i7-7500U Processor (4M Cache, up

to 3.50 GHz).

g. Windows 10 Pro operating system to include Office Pro and Visio.

2. The laptop shall be provided with all cables, connections and adapters.

3. The PLC ladder logic program and programming software shall be

downloaded to the laptop prior to turning over to the Owner.

Pump Station 32



4. The laptop shall be Inspiron 15 5000 as manufactured by Dell.

5. Provide 4-hours of training to the Owner’s designated staff on the

operation of the pump control panel program and programming software

and all components of the pump control panel.

2.11 TAPES

A. Plastic Tape

1. UL 510, Scotch brand or approved equal.

B. Rubber Tape

1. UL 510, Scotch brand or approved equal.

2.12 PUMP CONTROL PANEL ARRANGEMENT

A. Enclosure

1. The enclosure shall be constructed as one piece or in sections, shall be

NEMA 12 in design, free standing style suitable for pad mounting with a

housekeeping pad (6” clearance on front and sides of panel). It shall be

provided with an epoxy powder coat finish, grey on the outside, and white

on the inside. Each enclosure door shall be provided with a 3 point

latching mechanism operated by a single handle on the door.

B. Panel Components

1. Wires shall be identified at both ends by adhesive wire labels and all wire

numbers shall appear on drawings. No two wires shall have the same

number. All motor wiring and line wiring in the pump control panel shall

be copper type THHN or THWN. All controls and control voltage shall be

120 volts. All wiring shall be completely connected, requiring only

connection for service.

2. All equipment in the pump control panel shall be identified by black

laminated phenolic nameplates with engraved white lettering. The size of

the plates shall be such that the lettering for major designations such as

pump numbers shall be a minimum height of 1/2 inch. Secondary

descriptions shall have lettering, selector switches, etc., may be provided

with standard nameplates.

3. Control relays shall be 10 ampere multi pole "machine tool" type. Each

contact shall be housed in a clear plastic enclosure to permit visual contact

inspection. Contact shall be easily convertible from normally open to

normally closed and vice versa. The relays shall hold up to eight

Pump Station 32



convertible contacts and four fixed contacts for a total of 12 pole

capability. Relay magnet shall have a double wound molded epoxy

magnet coil. Relays shall have a concealed but accessible operator for

manual operation with provisions for holding the relay in the energized

position for circuitry testing. Provide relays as required for system

operation.

C. Panel Arrangement

1. The pump control panel shall be provided as shown on contract drawings.

All components shall be wired and tubed to terminal strips for wiring and

quick disconnect bulkhead. The pump control panel shall house the

following:

2. Current transformers, voltmeter and ammeter with selector switch.

3. A programmable logic controller (PLC) for receiving level signals from

the wet well level sensing system and transmitting those signals in the

proper sequence to the variable frequency drives for start, stop and speed

control of the sewage pumps; sequencing of the VFDs and pumps;

generation of alarm signals; and, other system operation and data

management functions.

4. A solid-state (4-20 mA) wet well sensing system to sense wet well liquid

level and transmit it to the PLC.

5. A solid-state (4-20 mA) discharge line pressure sensing system to sense

discharge line pressure and transmit it to the PLC.

6. A solid-state (4-20 mA) liquid flow measuring system to measure station

flow and transmit it to the PLC.

7. A voltage monitor shall continuously monitor incoming voltage to the

control center. The voltage monitor shall provide protection for single

phase under voltage, voltage spike, power loss, voltage unbalance, and

phase reversal. The monitor shall have separately adjustable pickup and

dropout ranges from 0 to 6 second time delay on drop out. Activation of

the voltage monitor shall disconnect power to the pumps. The voltage

monitor shall automatically reset upon restoration of voltage. The monitor

shall have one set of normally open contacts with a minimum 3 ampere

continuous current rating for remote alarm function. Plug in style monitor

will not be acceptable.

8. Provide a pump motor overtemperature alarm system embedded in the

pump motor winding for each pump motor. The overtemperature sensor

and switch shall be supplied by the pump motor manufacturer. The system

shall detect an overtemperature condition in the pump motor windings.

Operation of the system on a pump motor shall cause an overtemperature

Pump Station 32



signal to be sent to the alarm transmitter and shall cause a pump motor

over temperature to be reported and displayed in the VGA color

touchscreen and remain until the system resets. Operation of a motor

overtemperature system shall lock out the respective pump motor until the

system resets itself. The function of this system shall be performed by the

PLC.

9. A failure-to-pump system for each pump which shall consist of a

proximity switch mounted on the discharge check valve at the pump and

necessary relays, timers, pilot light and control switches in the control

center. When a pump is called upon to run, a 0-30 second adjustable time

delay shall be energized to allow enough time for the pump to establish

flow. If after this set time elapses, and the check valve proximity switch

has not detected flow, the pump shall stop, the respective failure-to-pump

light on the face of the control center shall be illuminated, and a failure-to-

pump signal shall be sent to the alarm transmitter. A failure-to-pump

condition shall not lock out the pump. The system failure-to-pump light

shall remain illuminated until the system is reset manually. The function

of these systems shall be performed by the PLC.

10. Interposing relays, as required, between PLC outputs and other system

components.

11. Alarm contacts and circuitry wired to a terminal strip for the following

station output signals to the RTU:

a. VFD 1 – fail

b. VFD 2 – fail

c. Wet well high level (float switch)

d. Wet well low level (float switch)

e. Valve vault high water (float switch)

f. Flow fail

g. Door open

h. Influent flow measurement

i. Station flow measurement

j. Discharge line pressure

k. Wet well level

l. Pump No. 1 motor over-temperature

m. Pump No. 2 motor over-temperature

n. Utility power fail

o. PLC fault

12. The annunciator and VFD section of the pump control panel shall contain

the following (pilot lights, control switches, pushbuttons and meters shall

be mounted in the door of the section):

Pump Station 32



a. Running time meter reading in hours and tenths, total of 6 digits,

nonsetting type, one for each motor.

b. Hand-Off-Auto switches. Handle shall be illuminated by long life

LED white lamp.

c. Pilot lights with long life LED lamp. All pilot lights shall have this

type lamp.

d. Green pilot light to indicate pump running condition.

e. Red pilot light to indicate a motor overload trip condition.

f. Pushbutton for motor overload reset.

g. Three position pump sequence selector (1, Alternate, 2).

h. Pump motor circuit breaker, properly sized for the load rated for

the available fault current.

i. White "control power normal" pilot light.

j. White "station power normal" pilot light.

k. 10” VGA color touch screen operator interface terminal.

l. Pushbutton for lead pump start.

m. Pushbutton for lamp test.

n. Provide with flange mounted operating mechanism interlocked

with the section door.

o. Isolation contactors, all rated for the horsepower of the motor load

served. VFD output and bypass contactors shall be both

mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent both from

being closed at the same time.

p. EMI/RFI filters and line reactors.

q. Variable frequency drive system touch pad.

r. VFD-bypass switch. Handle shall be illuminated by long life LED

white lamp.

s. All pilot lights, push buttons, and selector switches shall to be 1.25

inch NEMA type 12.

Pump Station 32



a. Manual speed setting potentiometers for VFD input reference, to

be housed in a 1.25 inch NEMA 12 operator body.

2.13 CONNECTION TO THE SCADA SYSTEM

B. The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be connected to the City’s

SCADA system as shown on the contract drawings.

C. The PLC shall send computed influent flow rate in GPM as a 4-20mA signal to

the RTU.

D. In addition to required alarm function, the RTU shall transmit discharge pressure,

influent flow, station flow, and wet well level data to the master SCADA at North

Backriver Road. Contractor shall coordinate all RTU programming requirements

with the City.

2.14 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. When the sewage level in the wet well rises to the level of the “Lead Pump Start”

elevation, the lead pump shall be started at a preset minimum speed. When the

lead pump is started, it will run with its speed being varied in response to wet well

level. If the lead pump is running and the wet well level increases, the lead pump

speed shall increase by 5-percent over a 15-second ramp-up time. If the level

continues to rise, the speed shall again be increased incrementally. The speed

shall never exceed the preset maximum speed programmed into the controls. As

the wet well level decreases, the speed shall decrease incrementally until the wet

well level reaches the “Pump Off” elevation, at which time the lead pump shall be

stopped.

B If the influent flow rate is greater than the maximum pumping rate of the lead

pump and the wet well level rises to the “Lag Pump Start” elevation, the lag pump

shall be started. The lag pump shall be started to match the equivalent speed of

the lead pump. If wet well level continues to rise and the pumps are not running at

maximum speed, the speeds shall increase up to the preset maximum speed

programmed into the controls. As wet well level drops, both pump speeds will be

decreased by 5-percent over a 15-second ramp-down time. If wet well level

begins to rise again, speeds shall be increased incrementally as before. The lead

and lag pumps shall run until the wet well level reaches the “Pump Off” elevation,

at which time both pumps shall be stopped.

C. Automatic alternating control circuitry shall switch the operating sequence of the

pumps on a preset time schedule selected by the pumping station operator.

2.15 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

E. Digital Inputs (24 VDC)

Pump Station 32



DESCRIPTION TAG NO. ORIGINATION POINT

(1) Pump No. 1 H/O/A/ Switch on PCP

In “Hand” mode


In “Auto” mode


“By-pass” mode

(4) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 VFD in PCP

Run Status

(5) Pump No. 1 Overload Relay in PCP

Fault/Overload

(6) Pump No. 1 Proximity Sw. on Pump

Check Valve Limit Check Valve

(7) Pump No. 1 Temperature Switch

High Temperature In Motor Winding


VFD Fault

(9) Lead Pump No. 1/Alternate/No. 2

Selector Switch Selector Switch on PCP

“No. 1” Position


In “Hand” mode


In “Auto” mode


“By-pass” mode


Run Status

(14) Pump No. 2 Overload Relay in PCP

Fault/Overload

(15) Pump No. 2 Proximity Sw. on Pump

Pump Station 32



Check Valve Limit Check Valve

(16) Pump No. 2 Temperature Switch

High Temperature In Motor Winding


VFD Fault

(18) Lead Pump No. 1/Alternate/No. 2

Selector Switch Selector Switch on PCP

“No. 2” Position

(18A) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

High/Back-up Pump

Start (Float)

in PCP

(18B) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

High (Transducer) in PCP

(19A) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

Lo (Transducer) in PCP

(19B) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

Lo (Float) in PCP

(21) Lamp Test Lamp Test Pushbutton

in PCP

(22) Alarm Reset Reset Pushbutton

in PCP

(23) Station Door Open Pump Station Security

Door Switch

(24) 24VDC Power 24VDC Power Supply

Supply Failure in PCP/PLC

(25) DC Power Normal 24DC Power Supply

in PCP

(26) 3-Phase Power 3-Phase Monitor in

Available Transfer Switch

(27) Utility 3-Phase Monitor in

Power Fail Transfer Switch

Pump Station 32



(28) On Emergency Emergency Position

Power Contact in Transfer

Switch

(29) Lead Pump Start Push Button on Pump

Control Panel

(30) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 Run Time

Run-Event Meter

(31) Pump No. 2 Pump No. 2 Run Time

Run-Event Meter

(32) Back-up Pump Stop Intrinsically Safe Relay

(Float) in PCP

F. Analog Inputs (4-20mA)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. ORIGINATION POINT

(1) Wet Well Level Wet Well Level

Transducer

(2) Force Main Pressure Force Main Pressure

Transducer

(3) Station Flow Flow Meter

(4) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 VFD in

VFD Speed Feedback PCP

(5) Pump No. 2 Pump No. 2 VFD in

VFD Speed Feedback PCP

G. Digital Outputs (120 VAC)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. DESTINATION POINT

(1) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 Start Relay

Start / Stop in PCP

(2) Pump No. 1 Run Status Light on PCP

Running

(3) Pump No. 1 Operator Interface

Pump Station 32



Fault/Overload Terminal


Check Valve Fail Terminal

(5) Pump Motor No. 1 Operator Interface Term

High Temperature and SCADA System


VFD Fault Terminal

(7) Pump No. 2 Pump No. 2 Start Relay

Start / Stop in PCP

(8) Pump No. 2 Run Status Light on PCP

Running


Fault/Overload Terminal


Check Valve Fail Terminal

(11) Pump Motor No. 2 Operator Interface Term

High Temperature and SCADA System


VFD Fault Terminal

(13) Wet Well Level Operator Interface Term

High and SCADA System


Lo and SCADA System

(15) PLC Failure Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System

(16) Utility Power SCADA System

Failure

(17) Lead Pump Start Push Button on Pump

Control Panel

(18) Pump No. 1 SCADA System

Run-Event

Pump Station 32



(19) Pump No. 2 SCADA System

Run-Event

H. Analog Outputs (4-20mA)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. DESTINATION POINT

(1) Station Flow Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System


and SCADA System

(3) Force Main Pressure Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System

(4) Computed Influent

Flow Rate

Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System

(5) Pump No. 1 VFD Pump No. 1 VFD in

Speed Reference PCP

(6) Pump No. 2 VFD Pump No. 2 VFD in

Speed Reference PCP

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GROUNDING

A. Grounding shall be in conformance with NFPA 70 and the contract drawings.

3.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING

A. Control and signal circuit conductor identification shall be provided within each

enclosure.

B. Control and signal circuit conductor identification shall be made by color coded

insulated conductors, plastic coated self sticking printed markers, permanently

attached stamped metal foil markers, or equivalent means as approved. Control

circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and

conductor identification shall match that shown on approved detail drawings.

Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable.

Pump Station 32



3.03 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. The Contractor shall calibrate, adjust, set, and test each new adjustable circuit

protective device to ensure that they will function properly prior to the initial

energization of the new power system under actual operating conditions.

3.04 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Field applied paint on exposed surfaces shall be as specified in Section 09900 -

Painting.

3.05 ELECTRICAL TESTING

A. Electrical testing shall be performed in the presence of the Owner in accordance

with these specifications. Contractor shall perform all coordination and

scheduling for electrical testing. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the

Owner five (5) working days prior to conducting tests. The Contractor shall

furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. The

Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection recommended by the

manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Owner. The Contractor shall

maintain a written record of all tests, which includes date, test performed,

personnel involved, devices tested, serial number, and name of test equipment,

and test results. All field test reports will be signed and dated by the Contractor.

B. Safety

1. The Contractor shall provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves,

protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the

test vicinity. The Contractor shall replace any equipment or devices,

which are damaged during testing or handling.

3.06 OPERATIONAL TESTING

A. After the installation is completed, electrical testing is successfully completed in

accordance with the specifications, and at such time as the Owner may direct, the

Contractor shall conduct operational testing for approval. Contractor shall

perform all coordination and scheduling for the operational tests. The equipment

shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the specified requirements.

Operational testing report shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01650.

3.07 FIELD SERVICE

A. Onsite Training

1. The Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as

designated by the Owner. Contractor shall perform all coordination and

scheduling for training. The training period shall consist of a total of 12

hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is

Pump Station 32



functionally completed but prior to acceptance. Training shall include two

sessions to train the City’s operating staff. The course instruction shall

cover pertinent points involved in operating, starting, stopping, servicing

the equipment, as well as all major elements of the operation and

maintenance manuals. Additionally, the course instructions shall

demonstrate all routine maintenance operations.

B. Installation Engineer

1. After delivery of the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish one or more

field engineers, regularly employed by the equipment manufacturer to

supervise the installation of equipment, assist in the performance of the

onsite tests, oversee initial operations, and instruct personnel as to the

operational and maintenance features of the equipment.

C. Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate visits from representatives for the

sewage pump and motors, VFD, Odor Control, Pump Controls, SCADA, and

Generator/ATS systems to ensure that all the systems will work properly in

concert. Visits from all these representatives shall be coordinated twice; once at

startup (operational testing), and a second time to check operation after startup

(final acceptance testing).

3.08 ACCEPTANCE

A. Final acceptance of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 01650.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16440-1

SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of disconnect switch work is indicated on the drawings and

schedules, by the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical

Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of disconnect switches covered by this Section include the

following:

1. Enclosed, heavy duty non-fused switches.

2. Enclosed, heavy duty fusible switches.


A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide switches

conforming to NEMA KS 1, "Enclosed Switches".

B. NEMA: Construct enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, "Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)".

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Conform to NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", for installation and minimum fusing requirements.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Manufacture switches conforming to the

requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches".

1. Provide switches listed and labeled by UL.

2. Provide fuse holders conforming to UL 512, "Fuseholders".

3. Provide cabinets conforming to UL 50, "Cabinets and Boxes".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each switch provided on this project, furnish the manufacturer's

published technical data, drawings, dimensions, and capacities.

B. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


October 2016 16440-2

Square D, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, or approved equal.

2.02 SWITCHES

A. General: Provide individually enclosed air-break switches as indicated and

scheduled on the drawings, with all current-carrying parts enclosed and manually

operable by means of external handles. Switches shall be heavy duty (HD) type,

ampere and horsepower rated.

Provide cartridge enclosed fuses and rejection fuse holders when fused switches

are indicated.

Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors, NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoors, or as

indicated on the drawings.

B. Ratings: Conform to NEMA KS 1 for voltage and horsepower ratings.

1. Voltages shall be 240 or 600 determined by the circuit voltage.

C. Switching Action: Provide quick-make, quick-break type switch action.

D. Construction: All current carrying parts shall be high conductivity copper, with

heating ratings conforming to UL 98.

1. Provide silver tungsten or silver-plated copper contacts.

2. Provide fuse holders of the rejection type, sized for fuses scheduled.

3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from

opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position.

4. Switches shall have handles whose positions are easily recognizable and are

padlockable in the "on" or "off" position.

2.03 FUSES

A. General: Provide fuses that conform to UL 198C, 198D, and 198E. Provide fuses

of the sizes noted on the drawings.

1. Current-limiting fuses shall be installed in lieu of regular fuses where the

fault current exceeds 10,000 RMS amperes.

2. Unless otherwise specified, fuses for use with switches rated 600 amperes

and less shall be UL Class RK-5. Class RK-5 fuses shall be dual element

type with minimum time-delay of ten seconds at 500 percent of rating.

3. Provide one complete set of fuses installed for all switches requiring fuses.

Provide ten percent spare fuses or three (whichever is greater) of each size

and type installed. The spare fuses shall be delivered in the original boxes.


October 2016 16440-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES

A. General: Provide NEMA 1 disconnect switches for interior use and NEMA 3R for

exterior use.

B. Installation: Install switches in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements

and NFPA 70, paragraph, "Switches". Provide grounding in accordance with

NFPA 70.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16450-1

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of the grounding work required is indicated on drawings, by the


B. Provide grounding in accordance with NEC as a minimum. Additional grounding

requirements shall be as specified or indicated on drawings.

C. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 16 Sections for grounding and testing.


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the requirements of:

1. C2 National Electric Safety Code.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Comply with the

requirements of:

1. B 1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

2. B 2 Standard Specification for Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

3. B 3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

4. B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

5. B 228 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper-Clad

Steel Conductors

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Comply with the

following standards which apply to the grounding of electrical systems:

1. Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power

Systems

2. Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial

Buildings

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with the requirements of

NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code" for the grounding of electrical systems.

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide material and installation

conforming to the following standards:

1. Grounding and Bonding Equipment


October 2016 16450-2

2. Service Equipment

F. UL Labels: Provide grounding electrodes and connectors, which are UL, listed

and labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on conductors, grounding electrodes,

ground clamps, and exothermic welding devices.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel, 10 feet in length and ¾-inch in diameter.

2.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS

A. Grounding electrode conductors shall be bare copper sized in accordance with

NEC Table 250-66.

2.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors in raceways shall be copper with green

insulation, sized in accordance with NEC 250-122. Bare copper grounding

conductors will be acceptable in underground outside raceways.

2.04 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Ground connections shall be exothermic type cadweld or thermoweld, when direct

buried.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine all areas and conditions under which electrical grounding

connections are to be made. Do not proceed with the grounding work until such

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 GROUNDING BUILDING SERVICE

A. General: Supplement the grounded neutral of the distribution system with an

equipment grounding system to properly safeguard equipment and personnel. The


October 2016 16450-3

system shall, as a minimum, comply with NFPA 70. Where the drawings or

specifications exceed the requirements of NFPA 70, the drawings or specifications

take preference.

B. Building Steel: Ground the electrical service to the steel frame of the building.

C. Common Ground Bus: Connect the system neutral ground and the equipment

ground system to the common ground bus as indicated on the drawings. Where

the connection is not shown, provide connection as required by NFPA 70.

3.03 GENERAL

A. Install equipment grounding conductors in all raceways containing conductors

having 100 volts or more to ground.

B. Ground all metallic enclosures.

C. The ground resistance of any "made" electrode shall be measured by an earth

megger device and it shall be 25 ohms or less as per NEC 250.

D. A copy of the service ground resistance test shall be sent to the Owner and Owner

representative.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16470-1

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of panelboard work is indicated on the drawings and schedules, by

the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic

Requirements".

B. Types: Types of panelboards and enclosures covered under this Section include

the following:

1. Panelboards with automatic circuit breakers.


A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches

2. KS 1 Enclosed Switches

3. PB 1 Panelboards

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Conform to the requirements of

NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Construct panelboards in conformance with

the following UL publications:

1. UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes

2. UL 67 Panelboards

3. UL 310 Electrical Quick-Connect Terminals

4. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors

5. UL 486B Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors

6. UL 489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures

7. UL 512 Fuseholders

8. UL 943 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters

9. UL 1053 Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment


October 2016 16470-2

1.03 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards including:

1. Manufacturer's materials specifications.

2. Certification for compliance with referenced standards.

3. Enclosed type.

4. Breaker types.

5. Bus ampacity.

6. Voltage rating.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square D, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, or approved equal.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. Buses: Provide panelboards with buses constructed of solid copper, minimum

conductivity 98 percent and rectangular shape.

1. Mechanically mount and brace buses in conformance with UL 67.

2. Provide solderless lugs for copper or aluminum cable.

3. Provide ampacity as scheduled on the drawings.

B. Grounding Bus: Provide bare, uninsulated copper, factory installed grounding bus

with ampacity equal to the main bus.

1. Provide copper pressure connected terminations.

C. Bus sequencing: Provide bus bar connections to branch circuits of the sequenced

phased type.

1. Mount in accordance with UL 67.

2. Provide numbered terminals.

3. Provide pressure connectors, copper.

D. Service Equipment: Panelboards identified for use as service equipment shall be

labeled.


October 2016 16470-3

E. Spaces: Where words similar to "space", "space only", "future space" or similar

wording are used on the drawings and panel schedules, provide bus space for

future overcurrent devices.

1. Extend buses full size.

2. Brace and insulate bus in accordance with UL 67.

3. Provide bolted connections for future overcurrent devices.

F. Enclosures: Construct in accordance with UL 50 except modify as hereinafter

specified.

1. Construct of minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel.

2. Conform to UL 67 for additional enclosure requirements.

G. Knockouts: Provide multiple knockouts not fewer than 1.5 times the number of

bus circuits.

H. Painting: In addition to galvanizing or priming coat, all inside and outside surfaces

of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of gray paint. Recessed boxes

and surface boxes in transformer vaults, switchgear rooms and electrical closets

may be galvanized or painted as described above.

I. Directories: Provide waterproof, white cardboard stock, factory printed

directories with a clear plastic directory cover and metal frame attached to the

panel door. Directory information shall be typed.

J. Wiring Space: Conform to the requirements of UL 67. Feed-through gutters not

permitted.

K. Conform to NFPA 70 for maximum gutter fill.

L. Conform to UL 67 for minimum width of gutter and wire bending space.

M. Manufacturer: Panelboard, back-box and front plate shall be the product of one

manufacturer. Factory fit components before shipment.

N. Enclosure Type: Provide enclosure type in conformance with UL 50 and NEMA

PB 1.

O. Front Plates: Provide removable front plates of the dead-front type with

removable, adjustable cadmium plated trim clamps, and flush hinged enclosure

door.

2.03 LOAD CENTERS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS


October 2016 16470-4

A. Circuit Protective Devices: Provide molded case circuit breakers conforming to

UL 489 and NEMA AB 1; voltage and poles as scheduled:

1. Provide interrupting ratings as schedules.

2. Provide common trip mechanisms for multi-pole breakers.

3. Provide instantaneous automatic trips conforming to NEMA AB 1.

4. Provide breakers with adjustable trip settings as scheduled.

5. Breakers shall be bolt-on type, factory assembled.

6. Stab-in circuit breaker types are not acceptable.

7. Provide branch circuit arrangement as scheduled.

8. Provide quick-make and quick-break mechanism.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in conformance with NEMA PB 1, and NFPA 70.

B. Lug Torquing: Torque lug screws in accordance with UL 486A for copper

conductors. Install connectors, lugs, neutral bus, and other field installed

components in accordance with manufacturer's published literature.

C. Wiring: Refer to drawings for feeder and branch circuit wiring.

1. Verify gutter size conforms to wire bending space requirements of NFPA

70 and UL 67.

2. Wire wrap branch circuit in gutters after installation. Use approved wire

ties.

3. Verify maximum gutter fill to conform with NFPA 70 and UL 67.

4. Verify bolted circuit breaker connection lugs conforming to shop drawings.

5. Verify breaker size, trip setting, and breaker type in conformance with

schedules.

Complete typewritten panelboard circuit directory prior to project acceptance.

D. Only wires made of the conductor material for which the panelboard terminals

have been marked shall be used.

3.02 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated on

drawings or schedules.

1. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.


October 2016 16470-5

2. Install lugs and ground connectors in conformance with UL 486A and UL

486B.

3.03 ADJUSTABLE TRIP SETTINGS

A. Verify factory settings for adjustable trip breakers.

B. Field adjust in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, if necessary.

3.04 NAMEPLATES

A. Identification: Provide rigid engraved plastic nameplates conforming to the

requirements of Section 16195, "Electrical Identification", for each panelboard.

3.05 INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. Check circuit breakers and switches for proper mounting, conductor size, and

feeder designation.

B. Operate circuit breakers and switches to ensure smooth operation.

C. Inspect the cases of molded case circuit breakers for cracks or other defects.

D. Measure the insulation resistance of the panelboard bus system using a 500VDC

megohm-meter.

E. Measure both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground resistance. The minimum

acceptable resistance shall be two megohms.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16475-1

SECTION 16475 - MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

NEMA Publication AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

This section applies to all MCCB whether individually enclosed, group mounted, or part

of other equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Provide submittals in accordance 01300 – Submittals. Submit shop drawings 30-days

after date of notice to proceed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. MCCB shall be bolt-on type with ratings and special features as scheduled.

B. Trips

1. Trips shall be thermal magnetic with inverse time delay and instantaneous

time-current characteristics.

2. Motor circuit protectors (MCP) having magnetic only trips shall be

provided where indicated. MCP's used with high efficiency motors shall

be capable of carrying the transient inrush current without having to be set

at more than 13 times full load current.

3. When indicated on the drawings, trips shall be solid state. They shall be

field adjustable with characteristics as scheduled.

4. MCCB used outdoors shall have ambient compensating trips.

C. MCCB used for switching lights shall be rated for switching duty.

2.02 MCCB SUBMITTAL

Industrial grade MCCB data

2.03 VOLTAGE

MCCBs of 240 volts or less may be commercial grade MCCB (quick-lag, "q-line").

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturer shall be Square D, General Electric, or Cutler-Hammer.


October 2016 16475-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SPARE FUSES

For integrally fused MCCB, provide three spare fuses for each panelboard or individually

enclosed circuit breaker of each size and type used.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16482-1

SECTION 16482 - MOTOR STARTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of motor starter work is indicated on the drawings and schedules,

by the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic

Requirements".

B. Types: Types of motor starters specified in this Section include the following:

1. Manual.

2. Magnetic full voltage.

C. Other Divisions: Refer to Division 15 sections for the following work:

1. Starters furnished as an integral part of mechanical equipment.

D. Related Sections: Refer to the sections of Division 16 for the following:

1. Switches and Disconnects.


A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide starters and

controllers conforming to the following NEMA standards:

1. ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and

Assemblies.

2. Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide fuses conforming to the

following:

4. 198D Class K Fuses.

5. 198E Class R Fuses.

6. 198G Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protection.

7. Provide starters conforming to UL 508 "Industrial Control Equipment".

8. Provide motor starters and components UL listed and labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on all motor starters indicated or

scheduled. For each starter show the following:

1. Type.

2. NEMA size.

3. Enclosure.

4. Pilot lights.


October 2016 16482-2

5. Selector switches.

6. Disconnect switches.

7. Circuit breakers.

8. Instruments.

9. Control transformer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STARTERS: GENERAL

A. Starters: For each motor scheduled or indicated and not provided with integral

starter, install a motor starter, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

B. Types: Provide types indicated and coordinate each starter in motor

characteristics and control requirements.

C. Contacts: Equip each starter with contacts to break each ungrounded line to the

motor.

D. Overload Trips: Provide thermal overload devices, in each phase, to open all

contacts simultaneously. Equip starters with a manual thermal overload trip reset

button. Size overload trips to match motor nameplate amperes, in accordance

with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70,

"National Electrical Code".

E. Enclosures: Unless otherwise specified or indicated, provide each starter in a

NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure.

F. Construction: Design and construct starters as follows:

1. For each starter provide doors arranged for padlocking and with a

cardholder for starter identification. Provide an external reset mechanism,

"start-stop" pushbuttons for manually controlled motors and hand-off-

automatic ("H-O-A") switch for automatically started motors. Provide

green "stop", red "run" pilot lights of the heavy duty oil-tight diode or

resistor type.

2. Make connections to the selector switch such that only the manual

automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in

the "hand" position. Control safeties cannot be bypassed.

3. All safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high

temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors, shall be connected in

the motor control circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic" positions.

4. Control circuit connections to any "hand-off-automatic" selector switch or

to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in


October 2016 16482-3

accordance with an indicated, or a manufacturer's approved, wiring

diagram.

5. Provide the selector switch with means for locking in any position.

6. The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the

"open" position. For each motor not in sight of the controller, provide a

manually operated, nonfused switch which will disconnect the motor from

the source and which is placed within sight of the motor location.

7. Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor

windings, be of the thermal inverse-time-limit type, and include a manual-

reset type pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller case.

8. Provide each magnetic starter with a control transformer located within the

starter enclosure and with wiring extended to associated accessories and to

terminal boards for remotely located accessories.

2.02 MAGNETIC FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING STARTERS

A. General: Conform to the requirements of paragraph, "Starters: General".

B. Type: Provide starters of the full voltage magnetic across-the-line type, with

undervoltage release and auxiliary contacts indicated or specified, and of sizes

indicated on the drawings.

C. Single Phase Protection: Provide single phase protection in each magnetic starter.

2.03 MANUAL STARTERS

A. General: Conform to the requirements of "Starters: General", article, of this

Section.

B. Maximum Size: Use manual starters for motors less than 1/2 horsepower unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Type: Provide manual starters as follows:

1. Manually operated quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism.

2. One piece melting alloy thermal switch.

3. Double break silver alloy contacts.

4. Red run pilot light.

5. Arrange for padlocking "Off".

6. Horsepower rate per NEMA standards.

7. NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure unless otherwise indicated or

specified.


October 2016 16482-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS

A. Standard: Install motor starter where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and in conformance with NFPA 70 and NEMA standards.

B. Coordination: Coordinate starter accessories such as pushbutton switches or H-O-

A switches and auxiliary contacts with automatic control sequencing requirements.

C. Mounting: Bolt wall mounted panels to walls or mount on lightweight structural

steel bolted to the wall. Mount floor supported starters on structural steel welded

frames of 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 1/4-inch welded steel, two vertical posts

with crossarm, and bolt to the floor. Construct feet of 6-inch by 6-inch by 3/8-inch

thick steel plate bolted to the floor.

D. Location: Locate starters within sight of their associated motors. Where starter is

not within sight of the motor, provide a heavy duty disconnect switch at the motor.

E. Fuses: Install fuses in fused disconnect switches. Size fuses in conformance with

NFPA 70, and UL 198D, 198E, and 198G listed.

END OF SECTION

Pump Station 32

Replacement Pump Station


SECTION 16510 – LED LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of lighting fixture work is indicated on drawings and schedules, by



A. Manufacturers: Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

lighting fixtures of types and ratings required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than two (5) years.

B. The lighting fixtures have been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer and

catalog number. This information shall set the required fixture performance and level

of quality. Fixture performance and quality specified elsewhere in this specification

shall rule, if there is an implied conflict between the specification and the catalog

number used. Fixtures of equal performance and quality as judged by the Owner will

be accepted.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", as applicable to construction and installation of interior building

lighting fixtures and emergency lighting.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, inc. (UL): Provide interior and exterior lighting fixtures

which have been UL, listed, and labeled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


A. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated

on the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting

fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details, include information on housing and optics

system.

c. Physical dimensions and description.

d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.

e. Installation details.

f. Energy efficiency data.

Pump Station 32



g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES Lighting

Measurements testing and calculation guides.

h. US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life.

i. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each

fixture, assembled in order of luminaire "Type" designation with proposed

fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.

j. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Lighting Fixture Requirements: Provide fixtures, which meet the requirements of

these specifications and the project drawings.

B. General Requirements: Provide lighting fixtures of sizes, types, and ratings indicated.

2.02 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General:

a. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on

the drawings, and as specified.

b. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-

compliant.

c. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

i. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.

ii. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: Interior, -20˚ C. (-4˚

F.); Exterior, -40˚ C. (-40˚ F.)

iii. Input Voltage: 120V (±10%) at 60 Hz.

iv. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.

v. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

vi. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.

vii. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

d. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

i. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

ii. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 4000˚ K unless otherwise

specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

iii. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.

iv. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE

SCHEDULE.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Pump Station 32



Setting and Securing: Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in

alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers'

directions and approved shop drawings. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.

A. Mounting: Mounting heights specified are indicated to the bottom of the fixture for

suspended and ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted

fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before

installation is commenced and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type,

style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other trades as appropriate to properly interface

installation of lighting fixtures with other work.

C. Grounding: Ground non-current-carrying parts of electrical equipment. Where the

copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide

specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Clean: Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Protection: Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction

period.

C. Adjust: Adjust light fixtures as directed by the Owner.


A. Tests: Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits

have been energized, apply electric energy to demonstrate capacity and compliance

with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to

demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed

with retesting.

B. At completion of project, replace all defective components of the lighting fixtures

at no cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16690-1

SECTION 16690 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Scope of Work:

1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals

required to provide, install, test, and place in operation the Variable

Frequency Drives (VFD’s) shown on the drawings and specified.

2. The Systems House supplying the VFD’s and related equipment shall be

responsible for coordination of the VFD’s with the pump motors,

RTU/SCADA, and control system and as shown on the drawings and

specified in Division 16.

3. Overall system responsibility shall include programming, calibration, field

testing, startup training, and successful operation of the equipment.

4. The VFD shall be coordinated with the Pump System Manufacturer and

MCC provider to ensure compatibility and operation with the pump and

pump motor for sewage pumping application. The VFD shall be shipped to

the motor control center (mcc) manufacturer for installation in the mcc.

The VFD shall have a history of operating the pump motor and pumping

system.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 11330, Suction Lift Sewage Pumps

2. Section 16010, Electrical Basic Requirements

3. Section 16410, Pump Control Panel

C. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The VFD’s shall start, stop, and vary the speed of the pumps in response to the

control system.

B. The VFD’s shall be capable of automatic and manual operation. Automatic speed

setting shall be from a proportional 4-20mA signal, manual control shall be

accessible via a speed potentiometer installed on the VFD control panel door.

C. The VFD’s shall be capable of remote operation of all functions via terminal input

points. All normal operating functions, e.g., starting, stopping, manual/automatic

selection, speed control, and fault reset, shall be accessible from the control panel

door mounted operator interface controls and shall not require physical access to


October 2016 16690-2

the VFD itself.

D. Each VFD system shall include full-voltage non-reversing by-pass starter, surge

suppressor, line reactor, input and output isolation contactors, emi/rfi filters, forced

air cooling, filtered air inlets, keypad, indicating lights, HOA switch, run time

meter, and fuse. Selection of bypass operation shall be manual by-pass switch on

the face of the VFD control panel.

E. The by-pass starter shall be capable of automatic start/stop operation on by-pass

mode.

F. The VFD’s shall be furnished with a self diagnostic software that can be monitored,

modified and parameters stored on a compact disc. Provide a copy of the

programming software and configuration settings on a compact disc. Provide

cabling between drive diagnostic port and a laptop computer.

H. All VFD’s shall be rated 15 HP, 240V, 3-Phase, compatible with the selected

sewage pump motor, and heavy duty rated.

I. All VFD’s shall have a remote keypad or Human Interface Module mounted on the

exterior of the panel and connected with factory provided cables.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Square D

2. Yaskawa

3. Cerus Industrial

4. Toshiba

B. Acceptable Sources:

1. The VFD Distributor shall have been engaged in the business of sales and

service of the VFD Manufacturer’s products for a period of not less than 5

years.

2. The VFD Distributor shall have at least 2 factory trained engineers on staff

who are experienced in VFD selection, application, and start-up.

Combined experience of the engineering staff with the accepted

manufacturer's product line shall not be less than 10 years.

3. The VFD Distributor shall maintain a warranty and service facility that is

recognized and approved by the VFD Manufacturer. This facility shall be

staffed with factory trained service technicians competent in the start-up,

trouble-shooting, and repair of the approved VFD.


October 2016 16690-3

a. On site repair service shall be available 24 hours per day, 365 days

per year.

b. The repair facility shall be capable of providing a technician on the

owner’s site within two hours of a call for service.

c. The repair facility shall be located within a 100 miles radius of the

job site.

2.02 DRIVE CONSTRUCTION AND CAPACITIES

A. The VFD’s shall be Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulated AC Inverter type, shall

feature digital control of all functions and EEPROM storage of both factory default

and user selectable parameters.

B. The VFD’s shall contain a door mounted keypad/LED display that allows user

access to all stored parameters, and provides operator interface for control of all

drive functions. In addition, keypad control shall be deselectable, allowing control

of all operational functions of the VFD’s via terminal input points.

C. The VFD’s shall be applied at manufacturers nameplated and advertised rating.

Re-nameplating VFD’s to indicate any rating in excess of the original ratings will

not be allowed.

D. The VFD’s shall be suitable for operation of the pump motors provided.

E. The VFD converter section shall utilize a 3 phase, full wave, diode bridge rectifier

to minimize the generation of noise on the power line and provide near unity power

factor over the entire speed range.

F. VFD’s that do not contain a DC bus link reactor must be provided with a separate

3 phase line reactor connected to the input side of the VFD. Separate Line

Reactors shall be horsepower rated and provide 5.5% impedance.

G. The VFD inverter section shall incorporate Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors as

the power switching devices.

H. Overload Capability of the VFD’s shall not be less than 150% for 120 seconds, and

110% continuous.

I. The VFD’s shall be UL listed and labeled.


A. The VFD enclosure shall meet NEMA 12 standards.

C. The VFD’s shall be capable of operation under any combination of the following


October 2016 16690-4

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage:

1. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 40 C (14 to 104F).

2. Relative Humidity: Less than 90% non condensing.

3. Vibration: Acceleration <0.5G @ 20-50 Hz

Amplitude <0.1 mm @ 50-100 Hz.

4. Altitude: To 3300 feet without derating.

2.04 VFD CONTROLS

A. Control System, shall be Voltage Source Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulated

Waveform.

B. Output Voltage, 3 phase, 480V, RMS maximum.

C. Volts/Hertz Ratio, second order nonlinearity mode. V/Hz automatically

determined and set by the VFD microprocessor for maximum energy savings with

variable torque load.

D. The VFD’s shall have a selectable “Soft Stall” feature. The microprocessor shall

monitor the load and in the event of an overload it shall, based on the

microprocessor’s calculation of a true inverse time overload characteristic, either

phase back the output voltage and frequency or trip as selected by an internal

jumper.

E. PWM Carrier Frequency Switching, 1.5kHz to 10kHz, selectable.

F. The VFD’s shall be capable of PID setpoint control, and shall provide a means for

scaling output response to the process control signal using arbitrary values to set

zero and span points.

2.05 PROTECTION

A. Base drive signals to control firing of the power transistors shall be designed with

optically coupled isolators for maximum protection of the control circuits from

high voltage and noise.

B. The VFD’s shall contain the following protective functions:

1. Stall Prevention

2. Current Limit

3. Overcurrent

4. Overvoltage

5. Short Circuit at Load

6. Ground Fault

7. Undervoltage


October 2016 16690-5

8. Momentary Power Interrupt

9. Electronic Thermal Overload

10. Internal Overcurrent at Start-up

11. Load Overcurrent at Start-up

12. Regenerative Discharge Resistor Overcurrent

13. Internal Overtemperature

14. Emergency Stop.

C. Stall prevention and electronic thermal overload activation levels shall be adjustable

and set to match the characteristics of the drive motor.

2.06 DIGITAL INDICATION OF FAULT

A. Should a VFD shut down as the result of a fault condition, an alphanumeric LED

display on the VFD shall indicate the cause of the failure. Display of the failure

shall include and differentiate between the following:

1. Overcurrent: Also indicates inverter status at time of fault, and

further determines if the failure is internal or external

if occurring at start-up.

2. Overvoltage: Includes separate indication if the condition is

detected during deceleration.

3. Overload: Indication of Motor Overload.

4. Ground Fault: Detects Ground Fault Current in the VFD loadside

circuit.

5. Emergency Stop: Executed from VFD keypad, separate indications for

manual and automatic function at time of E Stop.

6. Command Error: Indicates frequency setting signal error.

7. Memory Failure: Includes separate indications for main CPU and

keypad CPU, and further indicates whether failure

was found in RAM or ROM.

8. EEPROM Error: Separate indications for data and set value

abnormalities.

9. Comm. Error: Abnormality in data transmission.

10. Undervoltage: Separate indications for input power and DC main

circuit undervoltage.

2.07 AUTO RESTART

A. The VFD’s shall have a selectable automatic restart upon fault feature that will

automatically cause the VFD to attempt to resume operation after the following

faults.

1. Undervoltage: Restart will be attempted when voltage rises to an

acceptable level following detection of an

undervoltage condition.


October 2016 16690-6

2. Overvoltage: Restart will be attempted when voltage falls to an

acceptable level following detection of an

overvoltage condition.

3. Overcurrent: Five attempts to restart will be made within 30

seconds following detection of the fault. If the

condition remains after the fifth attempt. The fault

will latch in and the VFD will trip.

B. A restart will not be attempted for any other type of fault and upon detection of

such, the VFD shall immediately trip out and activate the fault relay and display the

appropriate fault indication.

2.08 RIDE THROUGH

An undervoltage condition of less than 30mS duration shall not effect drive operation. If

main power falls below 85% of rated voltage for longer than 30mS while control power is

retained, the drive will forcibly decelerate the load in an attempt to raise the DC bus

voltage through regeneration. This feature can possibly allow the drive to ride through the

undervoltage condition for 70mS, but is dependent on the connected inertia.

2.09 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS

A. Acceleration and Deceleration: Independently adjustable 0.1 to 6000

seconds.

B. Volts: Hertz Ratio: Selectable, either constant V:Hz or second

order non-linearity mode, both with base

frequency, torque boost, and start-up

frequency adjustments.

C. Signal Follower: 0-5 VDC

0-10 VDC

0-20 mADC

4-20 mADC

3 kOHM Potentiometer

D. Min. And Max. Speeds: Selectable 0.5 to 400 Hz

E. Min. And Max. Speed

Indication: Open collector outputs activated at speed set

points.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS


October 2016 16690-7

Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the

manufacturer of the variable frequency drive units.

3.02 FIELD TEST

The equipment shall be tested in operation and in the presence of the Engineer to

demonstrate compliance with specification requirements.

3.03 STARTUP ASSISTANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained representative of the

VFD manufacturer to assist in installation, startup, and testing of the VFD.

Provision shall be made for a minimum of three visits of not less than four (4)

hours each on site. The firs visit shall be to assist the Contractor in proper

installation. The second shall be to assist in startup of the VFD. The third shall be

to check the installation after startup.

B. Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate visits from representatives for the

sewage pump and motors, VFD, Motor Control Center, RTU/SCADA, and

Generator/ATS systems to ensure that all the systems will work properly in

concert. Visits from all these representatives shall be coordinated twice; once at

startup (operational testing), and a second time to check operation after startup

(final acceptance testing).

3.04 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts:

a. One spare set of control and power fuses.

b. One of each spare power and control board.

c. One spare keypad

d. One spare set of power component transistor.

e. One spare cooling fan.

B. Package each part individually or in sets in moisture-proof containers or

wrappings, clearly labeled with part name and manufacturer's part/stock number;

submit, in writing, storage procedures for spare parts to ensure adequate protection

after delivery.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Prior to the completion of the Work, submit operation and maintenance manuals for the

variable frequency drives in accordance with Section 01300.

3.06 WARRANTY AND FULL SERVICE CONTRACT


October 2016 16690-8

All equipment shall be guaranteed against defective materials, design, and workmanship

for a period of five years from date of final acceptance. Upon receipt of notice from the

Owner of failure of any part during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be

replaced promptly with new parts by and at the expense of the manufacturer. The defective

part or parts shall be returned to the manufacturer.

The Manufacturer shall provide a 5-year full service contract with warranty on the variable

frequency drives. The warranty shall be in printed form and shall apply to all units, and

shall complement the 5-year full service contract. The 5-year full service contract with

warranty shall include preventative maintenance, all parts and labor, and training (minimum

12 hours: 4 hours at installation, 4 hours at start-up, and 4 hours after start-up to check

operation) of City field operations personnel on proper usage of equipment.

END OF SECTION


October 2016 16920-1

SECTION 16920 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER

PART 1 – General

1.01 General

A. This specification has been developed to establish minimum requirements for a

solid-state programmable logic controller (PLC) designed to provide high

reliability in industrial applications. The internal wiring of the controller is to be

fixed with the logic functions it must perform in a given application to be

programmed into its memory. The controller shall be supplied with the CPU,

input/output scanner, input/output modules, replaceable battery which shall supply

power necessary to maintain the memory for a minimum of 1 year when AC power

is not available, EEPROM backup memory, power supply, and all power and

interface cables necessary to function as a complete and operable programmable

controller system. PLC to be Micrologix 1400 as manufactured by Allen Bradley.

No exception.

B. The PLC shall perform control and monitoring functions for the well facility. The

PLC shall be furnished with input and output modules as required to perform all

specified process control and monitoring functions with at least 25% of each type

of I/O available as spares.

C. The PLC panel fitting to the terminal adapter line surge protector.

D. PLC shall be installed to meet all requirements of manufacturer and in strict

adherence to Rockwell Automation Document #9655 most current edition.

E. The objective of the programmable controller will be to improve reliability,

maintainability, and efficiency by reducing operating costs and downtime.

F. The specification shall be followed in controller with the contract and all areas of

questions or noncompliance shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and

approval.

G. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings of the PLC, ladder logic program and

programming software as part of the submittal package to the Owner and

Engineer. Submit (4) hard copies of the PLC and ladder logic program; and a

licensed copy of the programming software on compact disc.

1.02 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

A. Submit copies of an Operations and Maintenance Manual in accordance with

Section 01300.


October 2016 16920-2

1.03 The systems control shop/programmer shall provide a licensed copy of all working

programs and programming software on compact disk as well as a printed program listing.

The compact disk of PLC program shall be approved by the City with regard to ladder

logic descriptions and labeling. This information shall be submitted with the Operation

and Maintenance Manual.

1.04 The system control shop/supplier shall provide a network of field sales and support

personnel located within 75-mile radius of the well facilities with 2-hour response time to

provide telephone consultation, prompt on-site service, and field replacement stock.

1.05 The supplier shall provide product application assistance by trained and experienced

engineers to assist the customer with program and system development through telephone

consultation and on-site checkout, debug, start-up assistance.

1.06 The supplier shall provide a customer training program designed to teach the customer’s

personnel in the understanding and application of the programmable controller. The

training program shall include training manuals and “hands-on” programming experience,

and factory PLC training and troubleshooting and maintenance of the PLC for two

employees (16 hours).

PART 2 - Assembled Systems

2.01 A supplier shall assume single source responsibility for system assembly. An assembled

system may include mounting and wiring of relays, motor starters, transformers, and

disconnecting means, or other control devices as specified by customer-supplied

documentation.

2.02 The supplier shall provide mounting, wiring, and programming of the programmable

controller system in a NEMA type 4 or other enclosure that may be specified.

2.03 If specified, the enclosure shall be able to accommodate an electrical service of 460 volt, 3

phase, 60 Hz. The enclosure shall have sufficient room for a 460 VAC (primary) to 115 V

AC (secondary) control transformer to service the processor, inputs, and outputs.

2.04 The supplier shall be able to provide a sealed plastic window in the NEMA 4 enclosure

door(s) for observing the processor and I/O status indicating lights.

2.05 The supplier shall have the capacity to supply an enclosure with special paint and graphic

displays.

2.06 The supplier shall wire all programmable controller inputs and outputs to customer-

specified terminal blocks.

2.07 The assembled system shall include fuse blocks as sized by the customer's application.


October 2016 16920-3

2.08 Within the enclosure all I/O racks, processor racks, and power supplies shall be grounded

to meet the manufacturer's specifications.

2.09 All outputs from the PLC shall be fused between PLC and terminal block in panel.

2.10 If more than one controller is mounted within an enclosure, the capability must exist to

share a single programming panel or line printer.

2.11 All pushbuttons, switches and other operator devices must be UL listed and/or CSA

approved and sufficiently large and durable to provide dependable, long life operation.

2.12 All cables (with associated plugs, connectors and receptacles) requiring user field

installation, shall be designed for commercial use to withstand an industrial environment.

2.13 Upon receipt of the purchase order, but prior to the start of the manufacturing of the

equipment, the supplier shall meet with the City’s staff to discuss sequence of operation

before submitting drawings of the complete assembled system for approval by the

purchaser or their consultant.

2.14 Drawings which are returned to the supplier for correction or revision shall be resubmitted

for approval before starting fabrication of the work in question unless marked "approved

as noted”.

2.15 All drawings shall include page, sheet, and line numbers.

2.16 The first page of all drawings and schematics shall be a cover sheet consisting of a Bill of

Material, purchase order number, manufacturer’s job number, user’s name, location,

application, and shipping address.

2.17 The drawings shall include a mechanical layout detailing the overall external dimensions

the enclosure. The drawings shall include such pertinent information as location of door

handles, windows, lifting lugs, and enclosure mounted items such as tachometer or current

meters, cooling fans, etc.

2.18 The supplier shall provide documentation detailing the mounting of the processor, I/O

racks, motor starter, disconnect switch, fuse blocks, wireways, etc. All materials shall be

labeled to provide easy cross-reference to Bill of Material listing.

2.19 Electrical prints detailing all hardwiring, done by the supplier, to devices such as relays,

motor starters, disconnect switches, fuse blocks, etc. shall be provided with individual

wire numbers and relay contact cross-reference designations.

2.20 Sections describing inputs shall designate input modules by name, slot module, and

terminal location.


October 2016 16920-4

2.21 The last sheet in the set shall be for terminal block designations each containing their

individual terminal location.

2.22 At the time the equipment is shipped, one (1) reproducible copy of each drawing

mentioned above shall be provided with the equipment.

2.23 The supplier shall provide a disk copy and print out of PLC ladder logic.

2.24 The supplier shall provide a minimum of six (6) spare slots in the PLC. Cover all unused

I/O slots.

PART 3 – Design Description

3.01 A major consideration of the programmable controller system shall be its modular, field

expandable design allowing the system to be tailored to the customer’s machine and/or

process control application. The capability shall exist to allow for expansion of the system

by the addition of hardware and/or user software.

3.02 The processor plus input and output circuitry shall be of a modular design with

interchangeability provided for all similar modules.

3.03 Modules are defined as devices, which plug into a chassis and are keyed to allow

installation in only one direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion of the

modules. The programmable controller systems must be able to determine the correctness

of the module and chassis configuration prior to executing the user program.

3.04 The programmable controller shall have downward compatibility whereby all new module

designs can be interchanged with all similar modules in an effort to reduce obsolescence.

3.05 All hardware of the programmable controller shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0°

to 60°C (32° to 140°F), with an ambient temperature rating for storage of -40° to + 85°C

(-40° to +185°F.)

3.06 The programmable controller hardware shall function continuously humidity range of 5%

to 95% with no condensation.

3.07 The programmable controller system shall be designed and tested to operate in the high

electrical noise environment of an industrial plant.

3.08 The CPU shall have the capability of addressing up to 4096 input and 4096 output points.

3.09 Each input and output module shall be a self-contained unit.

3.10 The programmable controller system shall include the capability of addressing remote

input and output modules up to 10,000 cable feet from the processor as an optional


October 2016 16920-5

module. The communication link between the module and any remote input and output

distribution chassis shall be via a 20 AWG tinned copper twin axial cable with braided and

foil shields. The communications baud rate to the remote locations shall be at least 57.6

Kbaud and user selectable on a per module basis. If the maximum distance is reduced to

5000 cable feet, the communications speed shall increased to 230.4 Kbaud. These

communication rates shall be translated into the I/O rack scan rates of 10.6 and 4

millisecond per adapter or logical rack, respectively.

3.11 The programmable controller shall use multiple independent scans designated for

processing of input and output information, program logic, and background processing of

other processor tasks. Discrete input and output modules located in the same backplane

(slots 1-30) as the CPU should be scanned in under 32 microseconds per modules. The

processing of a typical logic program shall not exceed 0.5 to 2 milliseconds for 1024

instructions with a maximum overhead of 0.6 milliseconds.

3.12 The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports RS-

232-C signals. It shall be accessible in ladder logic and provide support for Point to Point

and Slave SCADA communication protocol systems. Alternatively, it must be usable for

programming purposes or for access to remote programmers via modem or for laptop

access for programming/troubleshooting locally.

3.13 The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports RS-485

signals. It shall be accessible in ladder logic and provide support for DH485 protocol

systems. It must be usable for programming purposes and peer to peer communication

between well facilities.

3.14 The Programmable controller shall execute Boolean conditional instructions (or contacts)

within 0.45 microseconds each. The Programmable controller shall execute Boolean

output instructions (or coils) within 0.64 microseconds each. The Programmable

controller shall execute 3 operand (x 16 bit). Add and Subtract instructions within 1.71

microseconds each. The Programmable controller shall execute 3 operand (x 16 bit)

circular comparison (or limit) instructions within 1.96 microseconds each. The

Programmable controller shall execute 2 operand (x 16 bit) Move instructions within 1.26

microseconds each.

PART 4 – Main Frame Hardware

4.01 The CPU shall be a self-contained unit, and will provide Ladder Rung program execution

and support remote or local programming. This device will also supply 1/0 scanning and

inter- processor and peripheral communication functions.

4.02 The operating system shall be contained in permanently mounted yet reprogrammable

devices, which allow for easy field upgrades without the need of tools.

4.03 In a single chassis system all system and signal power to the CPU, support modules shall


October 2016 16920-6

be distributed on a single motherboard or backplane. No interconnecting wiring between

these modules via plug-terminated jumpers shall be acceptable.

4.04 The CPU within the system shall perform internal diagnostic checking and give visual

indication to the user by illuminating a "green" indicator when no fault is detected and a

"red" indicator when a fault is detected.

4.05 All system modules, main, and expansion chassis shall be designed to provide for free air

flow convection cooling.

4.06 The main chassis front panel shall include indicators showing the following status

information:

A. Non-Run or Run mode of the CPU

B. The fault status of the CPU

C. Battery status

D. Communications status for channels 0 and 1

E. Forces Present/Active

4.07 Processor mode shall be selected by a key switch mounted on the front panel of the CPU.

The key shall select the following modes: RLTN - No ladder edits possible, program

always executing; PROGRAM - Programming allowed, program execution disabled; and

REMOTE - Programming terminal can make edits and change processor mode, including

TEST mode, whereby the logic executes and inputs are monitored, but output states are

not changed.

4.08 Non-volatile memory shall store the operating system information to protect against loss

in the case of power loss or system shutdown. Only at the time of a hardware change, shall

this configuration status be altered or re-entered.

PART 5 – Power Supplies

5.01 The programmable controller shall operate in compliance with an electrical service of

either 120 VAC, single phase, in the frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz, 240 VAC, single

phase, in the frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz, or 24 VDC.

5.02 The manufacturer shall be able to provide as standard equipment a system power supply

capable of converting 120 VAC line power to the DC power required to operate the

programmable controller system. Provide two 24 VDC power supplies in the control panel

to provide power for the 24 V DC programmable controller inputs and for the pressure

transmitters. The power supplies shall be wired in an on-line/backup configuration using a


October 2016 16920-7

24 VDC relay. The power supplies shall be Siemens SITOP or Idec.

5.03 A single main power supply shall have the capability of supplying power to the CPU and

local input/output modules. Auxiliary power supplies shall provide power to each

expansion chassis.

5.04 The power supply shall automatically shut down the programmable controller system

whenever its output current is detected as being excessive.

5.05 When the power supply is wired to utilize 120 VAC power, the system shall function

properly within the range of 85 to 132 VAC. The power supply shall provide surge

protection, isolation, and outage carry-over of at least I cycle of the AC line.

5.06 Install a constant voltage transformer having a sinusoidal output waveform.

5.07 Design features of the programmable controller power supply shall include diagnostic

indicators mounted in a position to be easily viewed by the user. These indicators shall

provide the operator with the status of AC and DC power applied.

5.08 At the time of power-up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of the processor and 1/0

modules until the DC voltages are within specifications.

5.09 The power supply shall provide fuse protection.

5.10 Provide a transient voltage surge suppressor in the control panel for component

protection.

PART 6 – Program Storage

6.01 The program storage medium shall be of a solid state battery backed RAM type.

6.02 The programmable controller system shall be capable of addressing up to 16 K words,

where each word is comprised of 16 data bits.

6.03 Memory shall be available in 12 K with additional 4 K data word segments of RAM

memory.

6.04 Memory shall contain battery back-up capable of retaining all stored program data through

a continuous power outage for 24 months under worst case conditions. The capability

shall exist to replace the CPU's battery without incurring a loss of user program. A low

battery condition must be detectable in ladder logic, but shall not automatically generate a

major fault.

6.05 The programmable controller system shall be supplied with EEPROM as a backup for

volatile memory up to the full capacity of the controller. System shall be programmed to


October 2016 16920-8

load on power cycling to processor.

6.06 The operator should be able to backup volatile memory, including data and program logic

onto either a 3½-inch floppy diskette or hard disk, at their option.

6.07 All user memory in the processor not used for program storage shall be allocable from

main memory for the purpose of data storage. The programmable controller system shall

be capable of storing the following data types:

A. External Output Status

B. External Input Status

C. Timer Values

D. Counter Values

E. Signed Integer Numbers (16 bit)

F. Binary Numbers

G. BCD Numbers

H. Direct and Indexed addressing

I. Internal Processor Status Information

J. ASCII Character Data

The above listed data types shall be distinguishable to the CPU by the addressing format.

Management of the data types into memory subsections shall be an automatic function of

the CPU operating system. Any data can be displaced in Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal,

Decimal, or ASCII radices. Function-specific data types such as PID, Message, or

Processor Status shall have dedicated displays available annotating the meaning of specific

control bits and words within them and allowing for selective control where appropriate.

A complete PLC logic addressing shall be supplied to the City.

6.08 If contacts or entire rungs are intentionally deleted from an existing logic program, the

remaining program shall be automatically repositioned to fill this void. Whenever contacts

or entire rungs are intentionally inserted into an existing program, the original program

shall automatically be repositioned to accommodate the enlarged program.

6.09 To reduce the effective scan time in order to detect short pulse duration inputs, it shall be

possible to program a select logic rung more than once into memory.

6.10 The number of times a normally open (N. 0.) and/or normally closed (N.C.) contact of an

internal output can be programmed shall be limited only by the memory capacity to store

these instructions.

6.11 Ladder logic programs shall have immediate access to the subelements of control

structures by address and subelement mnemonic, such as timer accumulator value or timer

done bit.

PART 7 – Input and Output – General


October 2016 16920-9

7.01 Each input or output module shall be a self-contained unit housed within an enclosure.

7.02 The input/output enclosure (chassis) with its respective modules shall be of universal and

compatible with several programmable controllers manufactured by the supplier. Racks

shall be sized to accommodate I/0 in increments of 4, 7, 10, or 13 slots per chassis. A

maximum of 3 chassis may be interconnected and directly controlled by the local CPU I/0

scan.

7.03 Isolation shall be used between all internal logic and external power circuits. This isolation

shall meet the minimum specification of 500 VRMS.

7.04 It shall be possible to replace any 16 or 32 point input or output module without

disturbing field wiring.

7.05 Each I/0 module shall contain a visual indicator to display ON/OFF status of individual

input or output points.

7.06 All user wiring to I/0 modules shall be through a heavy-duty terminal strip, pressure-type

screw terminals shall be used to provide fast, secure wire connections.

7.07 All 16 point, 32 point, and specialty input/output modules shall be color coded and titled

with a distinctive label.

7.08 All input modules shall have a specified filter time constant to limit the effects of voltage

transients.

7.09 The input/output enclosure shall be capable of expansion to accommodate an additional

20% of each type of input and output specified.

PART 8 – Input and Output Modules

8.01 The programmable controller manufacturer shall offer discrete input/output hardware

consisting of the following types:

A. Inputs:

1. AC/DC input for devices which operate at 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz. or 24 VDC

2. AC input for devices which operate at 120 Or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

3. DC input for devices which operate at 5 to 30 VDC

4. TTL (5 volt DC) input for transistor-transistor logic with low true logic,

compatible with input devices such as solid state control and measuring


October 2016 16920-10

equipment.

B. Outputs:

1. AC output for devices which operate at 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

2. AC output for devices which operate at 220/240 VAC, 50/60 H7

3. AC output for devices which operate at 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz

4. DC output for devices which operate at 10 to 60 VDC

5. Isolated Contact output which provides eight (8) isolated outputs capable

of switching 120 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC power

6. TTL (5 volt DC) output which provides transistor-transistor logic with low

true logic, compatible for operating 5 VDC level electronic devices

7. Combination Contact Output and 120 VAC Input available in two (2) in

two (2) out, four (4) in four (4) out, or six (6) in six (6) out configuration

8. All outputs to be fused.

8.02 Analog I/O modules of the following types shall be offered by the manufacturer.

A. Analog input which accepts analog signals and converts them to sixteen (16) bit

binary values. Digital resolution shall be available in I part in 65536 voltage or I

part in 32767 current Analog inputs shall be differential. Analog inputs shall be

available in the following ranges:

1. Voltage range: -10 to +10 VDC

2. Current range: -20 to +20 mA

B. Analog output which converts a fifteen (15) bit current or sixteen (16) bit voltage

binary number (14 bit resolution) into an equivalent single-ended analog output

signal. Analog outputs shall be available in the following ranges:

1. Voltage range: -10 to +10 VDC

2. Current range: 4 to +20 ma

8.03 Encoder module capable of accepting input pulses up to 50 KHz in either a single or

quadrature form from an encoder shall be available. Inputs to the module shall be TTL

compatible (5 VDC). Each module shall have four output terminals with open collector


October 2016 16920-11

outputs. The counting format of the module shall be 15 bit binary.

8.04 Specialized input modules of the following types shall be available:

A. Thermocouple input module that reads millivolt signals generated by thermocouple

or millivolt devices. These signals shall be displayed as either 14 bit binary, 16 bit

binary, tenths of a degree, whole degrees, hundredths of a millivolt or tenths of a

millivolt. Thermocouple types E, J, K, T, B, R, N, and S are compatible with this

module. Over-range, under-range, and open circuit detection will be provided as

standard status to the CPU. Up to four types of thermocouples can be connected

to a single card simultaneously.

8.05 An axis positioning module shall be available.

A. A module shall be available to control the motion of a closed-loop servo motor

axis. It shall be able to interface to differential line driver encoders and TTL

encoders and shall provide scaleable +10 V signal for various drives. It shall

include hardware and software commands for features such as E-Stop, jog

forward, and jog reverse. It shall provide software configuration for parameters

such as number of encoder lines, resolution, gain, and speed.

8.06 An I/O module that can contain BASIC programs in its resident. Battery-backed memory

shall be available. Non-volatile UVPROM or EEPROM memory will be optional. This

module shall interface to various devices through RS-232-C, RS-422, or RS-423A.

Multiple peripheral devices shall interface to the module at one time.

PART 9 – Interfacing and Peripherals

9.01 The programming means shall be an IBM or compatible, portable-, or industrial-quality

programming terminal. The terminal shall include a monochrome or color CRT screen and

a keyboard for program entry, editing, search, and monitoring functions.

9.02 The terminal keyboard shall allow for loading of the program format and ASCII

characters.

9.03 The terminal shall be able to function as a stand-alone ASCII (alphanumeric) data terminal

with an RS-232-C interface allowing connection to an in-house computer, data terminal,

or modem.

9.04 The programming terminal shall be compatible for interfacing, with an electrical service of

either 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. or 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz.

9.05 The terminal shall provide for selecting the communication rate between 110 and 19200

baud for RS-232-C communications.


October 2016 16920-12

9.06 The terminal shall be capable of displaying a minimum of thirty (30) graphic (line drawing)

characters.

9.07 The programming terminal shall be capable of displaying a rung consisting of a maximum

of seven (7) series elements and six (6) parallel elements,

9.08 The programming terminal shall have the capability to be remotely located a maximum of

4000 cable feet from the processor.

9.09 The means to indicate contact or output status shall be by intensification of the contact or

output on the CRT screen. Each element's status shall be shown independently, regardless

of circuit configuration.

9.10 The programmable controller system shall be able to interface with a data terminal, which

is RS-232-C compatible (up to 19200 baud) to generate hard copy logic diagrams and/or

message generation.

9.11 The system shall have the capability to interface to a 3½ or 5¼-inch magnetic floppy disk

and/or a hard disk for loading a user program into, or recording the contents of, the

processor's memory. It shall be possible to load or record the entire contents or selected

portions of memory.

9.12 The manufacturer shall offer a multi-point communication network providing a data

transfer path for up to 32 programmable controllers and/or mini/micro-computers. The

communicating stations shall be distributed anywhere along a single bus that extends a

maximum of 4,000 cable feet in length. The communication network shall support the

following features:

A. Token passing system

B. Peer-to-peer communication

C. Message error checking

D. Retries of unacknowledged messages

E. Diagnostic checks on other stations

F. Interface to more than one network

G. A user-oriented command language for manipulation of data structures of variable

size and organization, such as setting or resetting bits, word and file transfers, and

program loading.

H. Bi-directional communication between the programmable controllers and the


October 2016 16920-13

communication network via a standard modern interface. The protocols shall meet

EIA RS-232-C electrical standards and ANSI standard communication protocols.

I. The ability to communicate with all other models of programmable controller

manufactured by said manufacturer.

J. The ability to monitor the status of any processor remotely via the network.

PART 10 – Programming Techniques

10.01 The programming format shall be traditional relay ladder diagram. The programming shall

be accomplished using RS Logix by Rockwell Automation. A copy of the RS Logix shall

be furnished on compact disc to the Owner as part of the O & M Manuals.

10.02 It shall be possible to program a maximum instruction matrix containing as many as 128

instructions.

10.03 The capability shall exist to change a contact from normally open to normally closed, add

instructions, change addresses, etc. It shall not be necessary to delete and reprogram the

entire rung.

10.04 It shall be possible to insert relay ladder diagram rungs anywhere in the program, even

between existing rungs, insofar as there is sufficient memory to accommodate these

additions.

10.05 A single program command or instruction shall suffice to delete an individual ladder

diagram rung from memory. It shall not be necessary to delete the rung contact by

contact.

10.06 It shall be necessary to issue a two part command in order to delete all relay ladder rungs

from memory. This will provide a safeguard wherein the operator must verify, their

intentions before erasing the entire program.

10.07 A clock/calendar feature shall be included within the CPU. Access to the time and date

shall be from the programming terminal, user program, or message generation.

10.08 Latch functions shall be internal and programmable.

10.09 The system shall have the capability to address software timers and software counters in

any combination and quantity up to the limit of available memory. All management of

these instructions into memory shall be handled by the CPU. Instructions shall permit

programming timers in the "ON" or "OFF" delay modes. Timer programming shall also

include the capability to interrupt timing without resetting the timers. Counters shall be

programmable using up-increment and down-increment.


October 2016 16920-14

10.10 Timer instructions shall include selectable time bases in increments of 1.0 second and 10

milliseconds. The timing range of each timer shall be from 0 to 32,767 increments. It shall

be possible to program and display separately the timer's preset and accumulated values.

10.11 The programmable controller shall use a signed integer format ranging from -32,768 to

+32,767 for data storage of the counter preset and accumulated values.

10.12 The programmable controller shall store data in the following formats:

A. Signed Integer Numbers ranging from -32,768 to +32,767

10.13 The programmable controller shall have support for integer signed math functions

consisting of addition, subtraction, multiplication, divisions and square root,

10.14 When using modules such as analog where multiple channels are terminated on one

module, it shall be possible to transfer the current status of all channels to the CPU upon

execution of one program instruction. This instruction shall be bi-directional to include

data transfer from the CPU to the module or from the module to the CPU.

10.15 Instructions shall be provided for grouping contiguous 16 bit data words into a file. The

system shall address up to 256 files with up to 256 words per file. File manipulation

instructions such as high speed "file copy" and "file fill", "file to file" move, "element to

file" move, "file to element" move, and "first in-first out" shall be supported by the system.

The four function math instructions and instructions for performing "logical OR!”, "logical

AND", “exclusive OR!”, and comparison instructions such as "less than", "greater than",

and "equal to" shall be included within the system. All instructions shall execute on either

single words or files.

10.16 The system shall contain instructions, which will construct synchronous 16 bit word shift

registers. Additional instructions shall be provided to construct synchronous bit shift

registers.

10.17 The programmable controller shall have a jump instruction, which will allow the

programmer to jump over portions of the user program to a portion marked a matching

label instruction.

10.18 In applications requiring repeatable logic rungs it shall be possible to place such rungs in a

subroutine section. Instructions, which call the subroutine and return to the main program,

shall be included, within the system. It shall be possible to program several subroutines

and define each subroutine by a unique label. The processor will support nesting of

subroutines up to eight levels deep. The program format as displayed on the CRT shall

clearly define the main program and all subroutines.

10.19 The program format shall display all instructions on a CRT programming panel with

appropriate mnemonics to define all data entered by the programmer. The system shall be


October 2016 16920-15

capable of providing a "HELP" instruction which when called by the programmer will

display on the CRT a list of instructions and all data required to enter an instruction into

the system memory.

10.20 At the request of the programmer, data contained in system memory shall be displayed on

the CRT programming panel. This monitoring feature shall be provided for input/output

status, timer/counter data, files, and system status. Ladder logic rungs shall be displayed

on the CRT with rung numbers in sequential order.

10.21 The system shall have the capability to enter rung comments above ladder logic rungs.

These comments may be entered at the same time the ladder logic is entered.

10.22 The capability shall exist for adding, removing, or modifying ladder logic rungs during

program execution. When changes to ladder logic are made or new logic rungs are added,

it shall be possible to test the edits of such rungs before removal of the prior logic rung is

executed.

10.23 It shall be possible to manually set (force) either on or off all hardwired input or output

points or Analog values from the CRT programming panel or the main chassis front panel.

Removal of these forced 1/0 points shall be either individually or totally through selected

keystrokes. The programming terminal shall be able to display forced 1/0 points,

10.24 The execution of the program logic shall be accelerated by scanning the rung only until a

positive decision as to the state of the outputs has been made. In many cases, this will

mean slopping over logic elements if the output condition has been predetermined.

10.25 A means to program a fault recovery routine shall exist. When a major system fault occurs

in the system, the fault recovery routine shall be executed and then the system shall

determine if the fault has been eliminated. If the fault is eliminated, program execution

resumes. If the fault still exists, the system will shut down.

10.26 An interrupt routine shall be programmable such that the routine shall be executed

regularly. The interval at which the routine is executed shall be user-specified in the range

of 1 to 32767 milliseconds. This routine must be able to close an asynchronous control

loop consisting of 32 Input points, 32 output points, 100 contact/coils, 10 addition

instructions, 10 subtraction instructions and 32 circular comparison (Limit) instructions

while never exceeding a 2 millisecond interval. The measurement of this interval is from

the Input filter delay time to the time that the physical output transitions.

10.27 The ability to program ladder logic via symbols from the global database of the

programmable controller shall exist.

10.28 An instruction shall be supported to incorporate closed loop control systems. The

"proportional", "Integral", and "derivative" elements shall be accessible to the user in

order to tune a closed loop system.


October 2016 16920-16

10.29 The CPU shall support indexed addressing of inputs and outputs, along with all data table

words (integer, binary, timers, and counters) for the software instruction set,

10.30 The system shall support both bit and word level diagnostic instructions.

10.31 To facilitate conditional event detection programming, output instructions shall include a

"one shot" instruction, which may be triggered on the low-to-high (rising) rung condition.

10.32 The processor shall support Master Control Reset (Relay) type functionality to selectively

disable sections of relay ladder logic.

10.33 An interrupt routine shall be programmable such that the routines shall be executed based

upon the input conditions of up to eight discrete hardware inputs in the processor chassis.

The routine will be executed within 500 microseconds of the detection of the input signals.

The 8 inputs will be repetitively examined/scanned within a 100 microsecond time period.

10.34 Ladder logic shall feature full and detailed documentation. Each bit, rung, instruction, and

block shall include written description of that item and details of its function in the control

routine.

PART 11 – Quality Requirements

11.01 The programmable controller processor shall be able to withstand conducted susceptibility

tests as outlined in NEMA ICS 2-230.

END OF SECTION